System for optical disks

 

(57) Abstract:

The invention relates to optical recording and playback. The claimed method of unit movement of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the storage medium rotating at a peripheral velocity. The method includes defining a first radial distance between the initial position and the center of the carrier, determining a second radial distance between the end position and the center of the carrier, determining a distance along the circle between the start position and end position, determining the initial peripheral speed of the carrier, the computation of the trajectory velocity with respect to the first radial distance, the second radial distance, the distance around the circumference and the initial peripheral speed and a moving block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the obtained trajectory speed. The trajectory speed is calculated so that the block carriage is moved both radially and circumferentially in the end position, essentially at the same time. In addition, it may be determined end circumferential speed, and the rotation of the carrier can be izmenenii end circumferential velocity. The technical result - the reduction of error and improve performance, as well as increasing the efficiency of the device. 4 S. p. f-crystals, 251 ill., 46 table.

Cross-references to applications related to this application

This application is an application with a partial continuation of patent application U.S. Cep. N 08/376882 dated January 25, 1995, which application is partially a continuation of patent application U.S. Cep. N 08/105886 of August 11, 1993 , which application is filed as a continuation application to U.S. patent Cep. N 07/657155 from February 15, 1991, which granted a US patent N 5265079.

Background of the invention

1. The scope of the invention

The present invention relates to systems for recording and storing data, comprising a housing with an opening for receiving a removable cartridge disk drive in which to ensure its protection is a medium for recording information. In particular, the invention relates to a system for encoding and recording with high performance information on optical disks in the format of high density, and for reading and decoding the recorded information.

2. Description of the prior art

Needs in a storage device of a large capacity komputerow. Optical data storage systems are becoming a more popular means to meet these increasing needs. Such optical data storage systems provide large amounts of memory at the same time when the relative cost-effectiveness and speed of access.

In optical memory systems on disks encoded video signals, audio signals and other data signals are written to disk in the form of track record information on one or both flat surfaces of the disk. Optical data storage system as its main element contains at least one laser (or other light source). In the first operating mode, the laser generates a laser beam of high intensity, which focused on a small area (spot) on the track record information on a rotating disk memory. This laser beam of high intensity raises the temperature of the material of the record surface above the Curie point, at which the material loses its magnetism and perceives the magnetization due to the magnetic field, in which the disk. Thus, by controlling or bias that surrounds the drive magnetic field and providing cooling on magnitnykh areas "the pit" ("pits") on the recording medium. Then, if the operator needs to play or read a previously recorded information, the laser is set in the second operating mode. In this mode, the laser generates a laser beam of low intensity, which again focuses on the track record of a rotating disk. This laser beam of low intensity warms the disk above the Curie point. The laser beam, however, is reflected from the surface of the disc so that it shows the previously recorded information, due to the presence of the previously formed pits, and thus may play a previously recorded information. Because the laser can be focused with high precision, the information processing system of this type can provide a high recording density and exact reproduction of the recorded information.

Components of a typical optical system includes a housing with an input port through which the user enters the recording media in the drive. This case serves to accommodate, among other elements, mechanical and electrical subsystems to load, read, write, and unloading an optical disc. The functioning of these mechanical and electrical subsystems obespechivaetsya, using disk cartridges, on the Board of the Foundation of the system is usually installed a turntable for rotation of the disk. Rotating platform may include a spindle having a magnet installed on the drive sleeve. The magnet pulls the sleeve of the disk, thereby holding the disk in the desired rotation position.

The optical system with the disk media, as described above, it is necessary to use the magnetic offset of the disk during write operations due to the application of the required magnetic field to at least part of the disk, heated by the laser write operations (write or read). Thus, you must install the device bias magnetic field in a position in which it can conveniently be placed in close proximity to the disk surface when the disk is held by a magnet associated with the spindle.

Various types of storage media or disks are used in optical data storage systems for storing digital information. For example, the standard optical system with the disk media can use drives larger 5 1/4 inch, such optical discs can be accommodated in a protective housing or cassette is combined with manually remove the disc from its protective housing. The operator must then manually load a disc into the loading mechanism, taking care not to damage the surface of the record.

Alternatively, for convenience and in order to protect the drive can be installed in the housing or cartridge, which itself is injected into the input port of the drive, and then transferred to a predetermined position. These disk cartridges are well known in computer technology. The disk cartridge includes a housing cartridge containing a disk, which can record data.

Download tape

To protect the drive when the cartridge is outside of the drive, the tape drive typically includes at least one window, which is normally closed. The window of the cassette may have one or more locking tabs associated with it. The drive includes a mechanism for opening a window on the cartridge once the cartridge is introduced into the system. Such a mechanism may include a connection with a window, which provides contact with the locking protrusion, opening the window. When the cassette is inserted into the drive, a window opens, partially opening the storage medium contained in the cartridge. This provides a loading sleeve disk on the spindle motor, or another item which During the rotation of the disk drive mechanism head write-read access to all areas of the disk media.

To save space occupied by the optical system, data storage, it is desirable to minimize the size of the device that downloads the disk on the spindle and unload. Typically, devices for loading and unloading different type of drives used. Normal loading and unloading discs, which uses tape drives, in a typical case, capable of automatically transporting the tape drive from the receiving port on the spindle. If the disk is no longer required, normal load and unload discs to automatically unloads the disk from the spindle. The boot device to perform the loading and unloading of the disk is usually designed so that when the disc is loaded (i.e. when the disk is moved to the position input in the playback device and the spindle drive moves horizontally, parallel to the card base and the rotary platform, in the direction of the turntable. When the disk is placed in position over the turntable, the disk is lowered vertically, perpendicular to the plane of the turntable, on the spindle. After placing the disk on the rotary platform magnet spindle pulls the sleeve of the disk mounted in the center of the carrier, thus clamping the disc is whether the disk, he proceeds to operation of the output disk. The most common solution at the conclusion of the cassette and disc from the spindle is the method used in most drives in Japan. In the device unloading discs of this type "box" cassette has four pins on its sides entered into the track on the adjacent guide to sheet metal. When removing the disk cassette box raises the disc straight up from the spindle. The device then moves the disk horizontally, parallel to the card base and the rotary platform, in the direction of the receiving port drive ahead from the playback device. When the disk is thus lifted from the spindle during the unload operation, it is necessary to form the cartridge with sufficient force, upward, to overcome the magnetic force of the clamp that holds the bushing drive magnet of the spindle. The maximum force in the upward direction, required to overcome the efforts of the magnetic clamp can be formed by mechanical operation of the eject lever or through the use of electrical systems popping.

In ordinary electrical ejection systems, when the device unloading of the disk cartridge by osushestvlyaetsya, the motor ejection must generate a large load to ensure removal of the disk cartridge. Therefore, if the operator has chosen to use an electrical system to push it required a large electric motor, characterized by a significant torque to the formation of a sufficient vertical lifting force. Should be reserved place in the body system to accommodate this large drive, which leads to an increase in the overall dimensions of the device loading cassettes. In addition, a large motor consumes significant power.

It is therefore desirable to reduce the complexity of the playback device from the disk, while maintaining the overall dimensions of the playback device to increase the usability of the drives in computer systems. In order to ensure the receipt of the cassettes 5 1/4-inch drives while maintaining the dimensions sufficiently small to ensure ease of use in a personal computer, the optical drive must use the compact and carefully arranged in the mechanical and electrical subsystems. With this in mind, it is desirable to reduce the size of the required elektrodvigatel the magnetic clamping forces, the retaining sleeve of the drive magnet of the spindle. By reducing the required effort, the playback device can use a smaller motor to eject the disk. It is therefore desirable to design the device boot disk in which the disk does not rise vertically upward from the magnet of the spindle, but is shot in the side ("peel") from the magnet.

The usual way of achieving this "Stripping" action uses the rotation of the turntable and spindle down from the disk. This method is described in U.S. patent N 4791511 in the name of Marvin Davis, assigned by Laser Magnetic Storage International. It is desirable, however, to create the drive in which the disk "exfoliate" magnet of the spindle.

Focus and initiate tracking

To ensure accurate reading information recorded on the disc, you must have the ability to move the objective lens in the focusing process (i.e., perpendicular to the plane of the disk) or in the Z-direction for focusing the laser beam to a small spot of light in the exact place on the disk during recording and / or search information, and in the process of tracking (i.e., radially from the center of the disc) or in Y-direction positions the king may be performed by moving the objective lens in a direction of an optical axis of the lens to perform focusing, and in the direction perpendicular to the optical axis to implement tracking.

In such systems, the position of the objective lens in the directions of focusing and tracking are usually adjusted using control systems. Actuators adjust the objective lens and convert the signal position adjustment of control systems with feedback in the movement of the objective lens. Most often, these actuators have moving coil, permanent magnets and the stationary yoke (frame), the magnetic field is formed in the air gap between the yoke and magnets. U.S. patent N 4568142 name Iguma to "drive the objective lens describes the actuating mechanism of this type in which the actuator includes a rectangular magnets placed in the U-shaped yokes. Yoke magnets spaced from each other with opposite North poles, are close enough to each other for forming a magnetic circuit. The focusing coil of rectangular shape is connected with the outer sides of the rectangular frame lenses. Four tracking coils attached to the corners of the focusing coil. The ends of the focusing coil is placed in the air gap, obrazona to act on these plates "Central" or "internal" yoke, the coil cannot be wound with the required density, and rigidity of the coil is determined by a compromise requirements. In addition, in this type of construction of the closed magnetic circuit core part of the coil is placed outside the air gaps, which significantly reduces the efficiency of the actuator.

In most optical systems, the rigidity of the coil in the air gap must be very high and the resonant frequency of the decoupling coil should be above 10 kHz, most preferably 25 kHz. In many types of known designs of actuators often required a large number of conductors of the winding of the coil in the magnetic air gap to achieve the maximum efficiency of the drive. To accommodate such a large number of conductors of the coil in the air gap and ensure simultaneous compliance with the restrictions on the space design of actuators, the coil must be fully or partially "free-standing" or should be wound to the maximum fine reel. These types of structures coils have a low rigidity in the typical case, unleashed at lower frequencies. The nature of dynamic resonance is not the Sabbath.

Other designs actuators use the same magnetic gap when the development effort drives the focusing and tracking, so the tracking coil attached to the coil of focus, or Vice versa, for a savings of structural elements, space and weight. In these types of structures frequency decoupling coil tracking, glued on a free-standing coil focus is typically about 15 kHz, significantly below the preferred frequency decoupling.

The perception of focus

System optical recording and playback based on the use of the law of Ukraine on optical disks, CD or VCD, require precise focus of the irradiating optical beam through the objective lens on the surface of the optical disc. Falling of the irradiating beam is usually reflected back through the objective lens and is then used for reading information stored on the disk. After passing through the objective lens of the reflected beam in the General case is directed to a device intended for coarse adjustment of the focus of the irradiating beam on the disk. Information extracted from the reflected beam by means of this device, then ispolzuya disk.

The number of known ways of detecting focusing incident optical beam. For example, in U.S. patent N 4423495, 4425636 and 4453239 describes how to determine the focus of the beam using a prism with a critical angle". In this method, the irradiating beam reflected from the disk memory, is directed at the surface of the prism for detection, which are positioned very close to the critical angle relative to the reflected incident beam. If the focus of the irradiating beam on the surface of the disk deviates from the desired state, then the change in the amount of optical energy reflected from the surface of the prism for detection, can be used to determine the error signal, the focus used to adjust the focus of the irradiating beam.

The way of the prism of critical angle usually requires fine adjustment of the orientation of the surface of the prism to detect relatively irradiating the reflected beam. This requirement is the result of the reflectance characteristics of the prism to detect in the field of critical angle, which makes the detection system focus errors based on this method is extremely sensitive. However the way critical angle ETA on the surface of the partition, formed by the surface of the prism to detect and air. Thus, changes in height, which change the refractive index of air, can give false readings focus (mixing). Additionally, the critical angle is not suitable essentially for use in differential systems determine focus. Differential systems become increasingly important, as they allow you to compensate for some types of noise that may occur in the optical drive. How critical angle unsuitable for differential mode for two reasons. First, the transmitted beam, formed by the measuring prism, is compressed along one axis, which creates asymmetry in the reflected beam. The symmetry of the two rays is preferable in the differential system from the point of view of optimizing the properties of the noise compensation in different environmental conditions. Secondly, at the point on the curve of the reflectivity of the prism, the critical angle where the intensity of the two beams are balanced, the slope is too low for the formation of a useful signal error differential focus.

Device for determination of focus, requiring several mingxiu how critical angle, described in U.S. patent N 4862442. In particular, the optical surface described therein contains a multilayer coating with reflectivity varying continuously with respect to the angle of incidence of the reflected incident beam. While imperfect alignment during the rotation of the surface with a multilayer coating to a lesser extent, will affect the error signal of the focus, however, this method is characterized by a reduced angular sensitivity. In addition, inaccuracies in the determination of the error of the focus signals generated by systems with multilayer dielectric can occur in response to relatively small changes in wavelength of the reflected incident beam. Such sensitivity to changes in wavelength undesirable, because the error signal, the focus should only refer to the focus of the irradiating beam.

In addition, some systems that use a dielectric multilayer reflecting surface, provide signals of the focus errors with a limited degree of sensitivity. For example, in Fig.37 U.S. patent N 4862442 presents specific characteristics of the reflectivity for the layered dielectric reflective surface, and creditpayday in this patent, the reflection intensity is in the range from 0.75 to 0.05 for angles of incidence from 42 to 48o. Such a change in the reflectivity of approximately 10% on C, and generates an error signal focus with relatively low sensitivity.

Accordingly, in the technique there is a need in the optical device, characterized by reflectivity profile, which would form a high-sensitivity error signal focus, relatively stable with respect to changes in the height and chromatic aberration, and which could be used in differential systems.

Initiating search

Storage systems optical data that uses a focused laser beam for recording and instant playback of information, very attractive in mass storage for computer systems. Such systems storing optical data provide high speed data transmission at very high density recording and high speed access to data stored on the storage media, usually on an optical disc. In such systems, memory, optical drives reading and writing data is often performed using a single laser source, operating with two relevant intedit light beam in a specific focal point on an optical disc. When searching the data of the laser beam is focused on the media and changes due to information contained on the data carrier. This light is then reflected from the disk passes through the objective lens to the photodetector. It represents the reflected signal, which transmits the recorded information. It is particularly important that before writing information or reading from the memory the objective lens and stimulating focused beam were precisely focused in the center of the desired track records, so that information can be accurately recorded or read. To achieve an accurate reading information stored on the disk, you must have the ability to move the objective lens in the focusing direction (i.e. perpendicular to the plane of the disk) or in the Z-direction in order to focus the laser beam into a small spot of light in the exact location on disk for recording or reading information, and in the direction of tracking (i.e., radially) or in Y-direction to position the disk just above the center of the desired track on the disk. Correction of the focusing and tracking can be performed by moving the objective lens in a direction of an optical axis of the lens to focus, and direction, perpendicu is piroski and tracking is usually adjusted using control systems. Executive mechanisms support the objective lens and convert the signal position adjustment of control systems with feedback in the movement of the objective lens. It is clear that if the failure to focus light on a small area of the carrier, an unnecessarily large area of the disk is used for storing a given amount of information, or to read too much of the disk. Similarly, if will not be provided precise control of the tracking of the laser beam, it will lead to what information will be stored in the wrong position or information will be read from incorrectly specified position.

In addition to translation along the Z-axis to perform focusing and moving along the Y axis for the implementation of tracking, there are at least four additional mode of travel for the actuator, each of which reduces the accuracy of read operations and write and, thus, undesirable during normal operation of the system. These unwanted modes of travel include rotation about the X axis (the axis orthogonal to the directions X and Z) or pitch; the rotation about the Z-axis, or yaw, rotation about the Y-axis or roll; and a linear pregateam and reactionism, acting on the holder and/or the actuator. These modes usually cause unwanted movement in the operations of the tracking or focus that, as a consequence, affects the alignment of the objective lens relative to the optical disk.

System anamorphically achromatic prism

System memory optical drives often use anamorphically the prism to adjust the ellipticity of the laser beam, to eliminate astigmatism of the laser beam and/or beam steering. In U.S. patent N 4333173 name Yonezawa, etc. , N 4542492 name Leterme, etc., N 4607356 name Bricot and others described the use of simple anamorphically prisms for beam forming systems with optical drives.

Often, anamorphically prisms have applied a thin film for a reflection of part or all of the return beam reflected from optical media) to the detection system. In U.S. patent N 4573149 in the name of Deguchi and others described the use of thin films to reflect the return beam to a detection system. In addition, the input face anamorphically prism is often used to reflect the inverse of the beam in the detection system, as described in U.S. patent N 4542492 and 4607356. Often predpochtitelnei the nals data, and the other detector - control signals, such as signals servo control tracking and/or focusing.

A typical problem for conventional prisms is that anamorphically prism inherent chromatic dispersion, which can be manifested in the transverse chromatic aberration. In other words, if the wavelength of the light source is changed, the resulting angles of refraction when passing through anamorphically the prism also changed. These changes result in a lateral shift of the beam by focusing the beam on an optical medium such as an optical disk. In systems with optical drives small shift of the beam can result in erroneous data signals. For example, if the shift occurs suddenly, the direction data, the beam may miss the data recorded on the optical disk.

If the light source (e.g. laser) was truly monochromatic, chromatic aberration in the lens would not cause problems. However, a number of factors often leads to a change in the spectrum of the laser. For example, most laser diodes react to the change in wavelength with increasing power. In the magneto-optical systems with drives increase in capacity occurs when the known from the prior art. This increase laser power often causes a shift in the wavelength of the order of 1.5-3 nm in conventional systems. Most laser diodes also respond to temperature changes by changing the wavelength. In addition, random "jump mode" may cause unpredictable changes in wavelength, typically in the range of 1 to 2 nm. Radio frequency modulation is often used in laser diodes operating at power level reading, to minimize the effect of "jump mode" on the system. However, radio frequency modulation increases the spectral bandwidth and may result in a shift in the center frequency. Moreover, radio-frequency modulation is generally not used when the laser operates at a power level of the recording. In neoromanticism system sudden change in the wavelength of the incident light usually leads to a lateral shift of the beam in the focused spot up to several hundred nm. The transverse shift of the beam of this size can cause significant errors in the data signal.

In the technique of optical systems known systems using multi-element prism for correcting the chromatic dispersion. This idea is discussed, for example, in the book, Warren J. Smith, Modern Optical Engineering. McGraw-Hill, 1966, pp. 75-77. Kr is smame, which are achromatic. However, the standard system has multiple prisms require a separate installation of many prismatic elements. The installation of a large number of elements increases the cost and complicates manufacture, since each element must be carefully ostrovacice relative to other elements of the system. Small deviations in the alignment can cause significant deviations in the process of functioning. It also complicates quality control. Other existing elements of the multi-element prism use the bonded elements to form a single prism, but these prism systems require that the material of each prism was notable that the system was achromatic. Finally, the existing system, which is achromatic, not providing reflections back beam for systems with multiple detectors.

Search data transition detection

For many years various types of media for recording and erasing data are used for recording and storing data. Such media include, for example, magnetic tapes or disks in the systems of various configurations.

There are magneto-optical system for recording data on magnetic disks and the magnetic field to Orient the polarity of the generalized area on the disk, while the laser pulse heats a localized area, thereby locking the polarity of the localized area. A localized region with a fixed polarity is usually called "Pete". The coding system uses the presence or absence of a pit on the disk to determine the recorded data as "1" or "0" respectively.

When recording data sequence of binary input data can be converted through a digital modulation to another binary sequence with more suitable properties. The modulator may, for example, to convert m-bit data code word with n bits code modulation ("binits"). In most cases, there is more code bits than bits of data, i.e., m<n.

To read data in a magneto-optical system is focused Lu the I optical disk, so the laser beam can selectively access one of the many track record on the record surface. The rotation of the laser beam reflected from the record surface, can be detected using magneto-optical Kerr effect. The change of the first type recorded in the magneto-optical Kerr effect may be, for example, the first binary value, and the corresponding change of the second type, the second binary value. The output signal is generated from the first and second binary values that may occur with certain clock intervals.

Although there is a growing need for systems with disk drives, providing the memory with higher densities, the possibility of achieving high density storage of data is met with certain limitations. In General, suitable upper limit of the density data is determined, in particular, reliability requirements, the optical wavelength of the laser diode, as an optical module, the cost of hardware and the speed of the operation. For maximum data density also affects the ability to registrovat various forms of noise, interference and distortion. Mother precise data recovery. Moreover, since the technology for most optical drives, intermediate and high efficiency is limited by the conditions of compatibility with earlier models, methods, data processing progress is not as fast as it could be.

When recovering the recorded data existing channels reading a magneto-optical and other types of drives usually have difficulties in connection with a number of problems caused by the increase of the permanent component in the read signal. One of the reasons for the rise of the permanent component is the entry asymmetrical combinations of data for a certain number of bytes or data segments. Symmetrical combinations of data can be considered as having an average DC component of zero in the region of interest. Due to the fact that the sequence of recorded bits can be essentially random in many codes, modulation, localized area of the recorded data with different combinations of ones and zeros, can form a single-ended signal read with unwanted constant components. Because of the combination of characters in the data change over time, the level of the component, reducing limits on the detection threshold and increasing the susceptibility to noise and other interference.

An undesirable increase in the permanent component is also caused by variation in the size of the pit due to thermal effects on the laser recording or storage media. When heating the recording laser, for example, the spot size may increase, leading to greater width of the pit. When reading the recorded pits variations in their dimensions will determine the formation of a single-ended input, containing the constant components. Variations in the dimensions of the pits not only causes an undesirable increase in the permanent component, but also cause a shift in time relative locations of the data, which leads to a decrease in stock in time and leads to possible errors in the readings.

Attempts were made to overcome these problems. For example, various systems of disk drives use the code without constant component, such as 0/3/8/10 code, otherwise known simply as 8/10 code. Since 8/10 code requires 10 memorized bit to get 8 bits of data, it has an effectiveness of 80%, which is a disadvantage from the viewpoint of achieving a high use of double differentiation. This method is typically associated with detection of the peaks of the first derivative of the input signal by detecting zero crossings of the second derivative of the input signal. Thus, the DC component can be effectively filtered. The disadvantage of this method is that the differentiation or double differentiation may cause undesirable noise effects. The second drawback is that the method can reduce the stock over time to a critically low level (for example, up to 50%).

In another way associated with the problem of the constant component, the data to be memorizing, randomisierte to record them, so that none of the combinations of the data is not repeated in the sector data. This method, however, may be unacceptable from the point of view of the International organization for standardization and might not be compatible with previous systems, magnetic disk storage. Another drawback is the fact that the opposite of randomization (i.e., derandomizing), it may be unnecessarily complicated.

Another way to control the growth constant component associated with the use of so-called bits CRT (powerpad their account for to minimize the growth constant component during playback. Before recording two consecutive data segment is analyzed to determine determine whether combinations of ones and zeros form a positive constant component, a negative component, or the absence of a DC component during playback. If, for example, two consecutive data segment have the same polarity, one of the data segments is inverted before writing to media. In order to stay within the constraints of a particular coding system, however, you may need to record bits resynchronization between the segments so that the combination of continuous bits, and change the sign of the flow were relevant. The drawback of this method is that it will not provide the desired reduction in the growth of the permanent component, and time constants should be determined so that the projected increase in the permanent component did not affect the efficiency. In addition, this method requires additional overhead, including analysis of data segments to determine their relative polarity.

Therefore, there is a need to change the s slew constant component, do not create unacceptable levels of noise or significant reduction of reserve time, do not require large overheads or use algorithms derandomization and at the same time providing a high storage efficiency.

Data storage and other aspects of the search data

Optical discs for recording and erasing data currently used as media for storing data. Magneto-optical recording is a method commonly used to write data to disk and/or to search for data on the disk. When the recording magnetic field orients the polarity of the generalized area on the disk, while the laser pulse heats a localized area, fixing the polarity of the smaller area. A localized region with a fixed polarity is usually called "Pete". Some of the coding system uses the presence or absence of a pit on the disk to determine the data being written as "1" or "0" respectively. The most widely used coding system for recording on the basis of the pit uses a code with limited sequence length - RLL 2,7-code, as it provides the maximum ratio of data to Pete. This tipster with increasing frequency.

The present invention provides a method of unit movement of the carriage from an initial position to an end position relative to the carrier, rotating with a certain peripheral speed. The method corresponding to the invention, includes the steps of determining a first radial distance between the original position and the center of the substrate, defining a second radial distance between the end position and center the media, determine the distance along the circle between the original position and end position, determining an initial peripheral speed of the carrier, the calculation of the trajectory velocity relative to the first radial distance, the second radial distance, the distance around the circumference of the original peripheral speed and the moving block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the obtained trajectory speed. The trajectory speed is calculated so that the block carriage came to the end position as the radius and circumference substantially at the same time. In addition, it may be determined end circumferential speed of rotation of the carrier can be changed from the initial peripheral speed to the final peripheral speed, and t is titanium option of carrying out the invention the way to move a block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the carrier, characterized by a center and a circumference and rotating about a center, includes the steps of determining a first radial distance between the initial position of the block carriage and the center of the substrate, defining a second radial distance between the end position of the block carriage and the center for media, determine the distance along the circle between the initial position of the block carriage and the end position of the carriage parallel to the circumference of the carrier, determine the initial peripheral speed of the medium relative to the center of the carrier, the calculation of the trajectory velocity relative to the first radial distance, the second radial distance, the distance around the circumference and the initial peripheral speed so that to move the block carriage from an initial position to a final position in accordance with the trajectory of the speed of the block carriage is moved both radially and circumferentially in the end position substantially at the same time, and move the block carriage from an initial position to a final position substantially in accordance with the trajectory of speed.

In the ü additional steps to define the peripheral speed of the medium relative to the center of the carrier and the application of force to the carrier to change the initial peripheral speed to the final peripheral speed, moreover, the trajectory velocity also linked to the desired peripheral speed, and the block carriage will move both radially and circumferentially to the end position at substantially the same time, if there is to move from an initial position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the trajectory if the initial speed and the peripheral speed of the carrier is changed to the final peripheral speed.

The above method according to the invention, can be also determined by the fact that the media reaches the destination peripheral speed before the block carriage will move to the end position, or, alternatively, the media can reach the destination peripheral speed essentially at the same time, when the block carriage will move to the end position.

Another way of unit movement of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the carrier, characterized by a center and a circumference and rotating relative to the block carriage at a peripheral speed relative to the center, in accordance with the invention, includes the steps of unit movement of the carriage from an initial position to a final position in accordance with the first trajectory velocity, VP is stoane between the intermediate position of the block carriage and the center of the carrier, determining a second radial distance between the end position of the block carriage and the center for media, determine the distance along the circle between the intermediate position of the block carriage and the end position of the carriage parallel to the circumference of the carrier, determine the initial peripheral speed of the medium relative to the center of the carrier, the calculation of the trajectory velocity relative to the first radial distance, the second radial distance, the distance around the circumference and the initial peripheral speed so that when the block carriage is moved from the intermediate position to a final position in accordance with the obtained trajectory speed, block carriage will move both radially, and around the circumference of the end position substantially at the same time, and move the block carriage from the intermediate position to a final position on the merits in accordance with said trajectory speed.

This is another method may further include the additional steps of determining the destination peripheral speed of the medium relative to the center of the carrier and the application of force to the carrier to change the initial peripheral speed to the final peripheral speed, and trajectorial, and the circle, in the end position essentially at the same time, if you are moving from the intermediate position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the trajectory if the initial speed and the peripheral speed of the carrier is changed to the final peripheral speed.

Above is another method corresponding to the invention can be implemented so that the carrier reaches the end peripheral speed before the block carriage will move to the end position, or, alternatively, so that the carrier reaches the end peripheral speed essentially at the same time, when the block carriage will move to the end position.

Another alternative way of unit movement of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the carrier, characterized by a center and a circumference and rotating relative to the block carriage at a peripheral velocity around the center, according to the invention, includes the steps of determining the radial distance between the initial position of the block carriage and the end position of the block carriage, determine the distance along the circle between the initial position of the block carriage and the end position of the block carriage pair is, is ycycline trajectory velocity relative to the radial distance, the distance around the circumference and the initial peripheral speed so that the moving block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position in accordance with the trajectory of the speed of the block carriage is moved to be both radially and circumferentially, in the end position essentially at the same time, and move the block carriage from an initial position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the obtained trajectory speed. This is another alternative method may also include the additional steps of determining the destination peripheral speed of the medium relative to the center of the carrier and the application of force to the carrier to change from the initial peripheral speed to the final peripheral speed, and trajectory speed is also linked with the desired peripheral speed, and the block carriage will move both radially and circumferentially, in the end position essentially at the same time when moving from the initial position to the end position on the merits in accordance with the obtained trajectory and speed when changing the initial peripheral speed of the carrier to the final peripheral speed.

The third way to move a block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the carrier, characterized by a center and a circumference and rotating relative to the block carriage at a peripheral velocity around the center when it is run in accordance with the invention, includes the steps of unit movement of the carriage from the initial radial position to the end position in accordance with the first trajectory speed, determining an intermediate block position of the carriage relative to the carrier, determine the radial distance between the intermediate position of the block carriage and the end position of the block carriage, determine the distance along the circle between the intermediate position of the block carriage and the end position of the carriage parallel to the circumference of the carrier, define the initial peripheral speed of the medium relative to the center of the carrier, the calculation of the trajectory the velocity relative to the radial distance, distance circumferentially of the initial replication is s in accordance with the trajectory of the speed of the block carriage is moved, both radially and circumferentially, in the end position essentially at the same time, and move the block carriage from the intermediate position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the trajectory of speed.

This third method may further include the additional steps of determining the destination peripheral speed of the medium relative to the center of the carrier and the application of force to the carrier to change from the initial peripheral speed to the final peripheral speed, and trajectory speed, in addition, linked to the desired peripheral speed, and the block carriage will move both radially and circumferentially, in the end position essentially at the same time, when moving from the intermediate position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the trajectory and speed when changing the initial peripheral speed of the carrier to the final peripheral speed.

This third method according to the invention can likewise be carried out so that the medium has reached the destination peripheral speed before the block carriage will move to the end position, or, alternatively, so that the medium has reached the destination peripheral speed p is subramania, additional features and advantages will become obvious to a person skilled in the art from the following description with reference to drawings illustrating.

Brief description of drawings:

Fig. 1 is a view in isometric of the optical drive made according to the invention;

Fig.2 is a top view of the drive according to Fig.1 with the remote casing;

Fig. 3 is a cross section of the drive according to Fig.1 in the direction of the arrows 3-3 on Fig.1;

Fig.4A is a top view of the optical module of the drive according to Fig.1;

Fig.4B is a diagram of an optical channel of the drive according to Fig.1;

Fig.5 is a block diagram of an electronic system drive according to Fig.1;

Fig. 6 is another view in isometric drive with tape drive, enter in it;

Fig. 7 is a view in isometric with spatial diversity elements of the drive according to Fig.6, illustrating its major subunits;

Fig.8A and 8B - types in the ISO Board of the Foundation shown in Fig.7;

Fig. 9 is a top view of the side of the drive according to Fig.6 with some of the removed parts for the best show of the lever, gear, actuator arm, the actuator of this transfer and functional relationships between these elements;

Fig.10A-10F - views side view and isometric arm;

figga-slider;

Fig. 13 is a top view of the adjusting lever in two positions, one of which is shown by the dotted line illustrating the installation of the carriage in the back of the drive, is located in the initial position;

Fig.13A is a perspective view of the drive according to Fig.1, illustrating, in particular, the carriage unit Executive exact mechanism that supports the optical elements used to focus lazernogo beam on the track record data of the optical disk;

Fig.14A-14C - views side view and isometric installation of the lever;

Fig.15A and 15C - types in ISO receiver cassette;

Fig. 16A and 16B are the views from the side, with the introduction of the cartridge disk drive according to Fig. 6 with some remote parts for the best show of the release tabs on the right-hand pull valves, latches and functional relationships between these elements;

Fig. 17A and 17B - types in ISO latches holding the receiver cassette in the upper position;

Fig.18 is a view in isometric of the clamp coil unit offset;

Fig.19 is a view in isometric of the coil unit offset;

Fig.20 is a view in isometric with spatial diversity components the main components forming the coil block offset;

Fig. 21 is a view in isometric of the rotary rod or napthine element coil unit offset, installed coil unit displacement and which, in turn, is mounted on an angle bar shown in Fig.21;

Fig. 23 is a side view of the right side of the receiver cassettes and tapes immediately before the beginning of the cycle eject a cartridge, depicting disk drive installed in a working position on the spindle;

Fig.24 is a side view of the right side of the receiver, cassette and cassette during the ejection cycle, depicting the rotatable cassette and disc is removed from the spindle;

Fig.25 is a side view of the right side of the receiver, cassette and cassette during the ejection cycle, depicting the system of the cartridge is loaded in the upper position and the disk at the beginning of his expulsion from the drive;

Fig. 26 is a schematic representation in perspective of the actuator according to the present invention;

Fig.27 is a perspective view of the lens holder for the actuator of Fig.26;

Fig.28 is a perspective view of the actuator of Fig.26 in the housing means creating a magnetic field in relation to the recording system;

Fig.29 is a top view of the recording system in Fig.28;

Fig.30 is a side view from the right side of the recording system in Fig.28;

Fig.31 is a front view of the side of the recording system in Fig.28;

F. mechanism of Fig.26;

Fig. 33 is a perspective view of the focusing coils and the permanent magnets of the actuator of Fig.26;

Fig. 34 is a schematic view in cross section of the focusing coils and the permanent magnets of the actuator of Fig.26 on line 34-34 in Fig.33, illustrating the power of focus, the current to the actuator;

Fig. 35 is a schematic view in cross section of the tracking coil and the permanent magnets of the actuator of Fig.26, illustrating the strength of the tracking force to the actuator;

Fig.36 is a schematic representation of the preferred option the device run-time perception of the focusing of the electron beam corresponding to the invention;

Fig. 37 is an enlarged top view in cross section of a differential version of the separation module beam corresponding to the invention (FTR prism);

Fig. 38 is a front view of the first and second quadrature detectors contained in the device of the perception of focus corresponding to the invention;

Fig. 39 is a graph illustrating reflectivity FTR prism as a function of angle of incidence of the servo beam;

Fig. 40 is a graph of the values of the differential signal of the focus error generated in a preferred embodiment of zestawienie examples of the implementation of the optical system read/write, which can be used to block carriage and the actuator corresponding to the invention;

Fig.42 is a perspective view of the block carriage and the actuator;

Fig.43 is a view from the diversity of the elements of the block carriage and the actuator;

Fig.44 is a view with distributed elements of the actuator;

Fig. 45 is a schematic top view illustrating the power of a coarse focus, acting on the block;

Fig. 46 is a schematic side view, further illustrating the power of a coarse tracking;

Fig. 47 is a view with distributed elements, illustrating the power of focus, the current to the actuator;

Fig. 48 is a view with distributed elements, illustrating the power of exact focusing current to the actuator;

Fig. 49A is a schematic top view illustrating the symmetry of the forces of coarse focusing in the horizontal plane;

Fig. 49B is a schematic side view illustrating the symmetry forces the coarse tracking in the vertical plane;

Fig. 50A is a schematic top view illustrating the symmetry of the forces accurate tracking in the horizontal plane;

Fig. 50B is a schematic end view illustrating the combination of the resultant force technometria reaction forces accurate tracking in the horizontal plane;

Fig. 51B report - schematic end view illustrating the combination of the resultant force accurate tracking with the center of mass of the actuator precise tracking;

Fig. 52A is a schematic side view illustrating the symmetry of the forces focusing in the horizontal plane;

Fig. V - schematic end view illustrating the combination of the resultant force focus with the optical axis of the objective lens;

Fig. 53A is a schematic side view illustrating the symmetry of the reaction forces focusing in the horizontal plane;

Fig. V - schematic end view illustrating the combination of the resultant reaction forces focus with the optical axis of the objective lens;

Fig. 54 is a schematic top view illustrating the bending strength and force exact drive, generated in response to the force of bending;

Fig. 55A is a schematic side view illustrating the symmetry of the forces of the suspension carriage in a horizontal plane;

Fig. 55V - schematic end view illustrating the combination of the resultant force of the suspension carriage with the optical axis of the objective lens;

Fig. 56A is a schematic top view illustrating the symmetry of the friction forces in the horizontal plane;

Fig. W is a schematic side view illustrating somee inertial forces, operating at the exact center of mass of the actuator and the center of mass of the carriage in response to vertical acceleration;

Fig. 58A is a schematic side view illustrating the combination of the resultant force of the inertia of the exact drive with the optical axis of the objective lens;

Fig. 58B is a schematic side view illustrating the combination of the resultant force of the inertia of the carriage and the optical axis of the objective lens;

Fig. 59A is a schematic top view illustrating the inertial forces acting on the components of the block carriage and the actuator in the horizontal accelerations;

Fig. V - schematic top view ravetastic of inertia forces for horizontal accelerations;

Fig. 60A is a schematic end view illustrating the exact drive and inertial force of the carriage for accelerations above the resonance frequency of the lever bending;

Fig.60V - schematic end view illustrating the exact drive and

the inertial force of the carriage for accelerations below the resonance frequency of the lever bending;

Fig.61A-V diagram illustrating the relationship between a provision of accurate tracking and accurate current drive;

Fig.A-C is an illustration of the impact of asymmetric forces focus block;

Fig. 63 illustrates an alternative block of caII lens holder in the focusing direction;

Fig. 65 is an illustration of the operation of the actuator moving the lens holder in the tracking direction;

Fig. 66 representation of a simple anamorphically prism and illustration of the influence of chromatic aberration in the prism;

Fig.67 - the image of the existing system anamorphically prism;

Fig. 68 is a view exemplary embodiment prism system with an air gap corresponding to the present invention;

Fig.69 and 69A - view options for performing system multi-element prism air gap corresponding to the invention;

Fig. 70, 70A, 70 V - types from the side, top and bottom respectively of the plate prism system option prisms shown in Fig.69;

Fig. 71A and V - types from the side, top and bottom, respectively trapezoidal prism system option prisms in Fig.69;

Fig. 72 and 72A, a side view and a top view of optical surfaces, respectively, of a variant of the chromatic correcting prism system of prisms in Fig.69;

Fig. 73 another embodiment of a system of multi-element prism air gap corresponding to the invention;

Fig. 74, A and V - types from the side, top and bottom respectively of the quadrangular prism variant according to Fig.73;

Fig.77A and V diagram of signals for balanced and unbalanced input signals, respectively;

Fig.78 is a block diagram of the read channel design;

Fig.79A is a more detailed diagram of the cascades channels read;

Fig.V - detailed scheme of the individual cascade integrator;

Fig.80A-80E - frequency responses of the different stages of the channels read;

Fig. 80F is a graph of group delay for the combination of the cascades in the channel readout;

Fig.80G(1)-80G(4) - waveforms in various stages channels read;

Fig.81 is a block diagram schematic of peak detection and tracking;

Fig.82 diagram of the peak detection and tracking in Fig.81;

Fig. 83 - waveforms illustrating the tracking using the threshold signal envelope DC input;

Fig.A-84D - waveforms at various points in the channel readout;

Fig.85 is a block diagram of the optical system records search data;

Fig.86 - waveforms illustrating the regular pulse of the start of the laser pulse GCR format and irregular pulse start laser using RLL 2,7-format;

Fig.87 is a sequence of waveforms illustrating the pulse trigger the laser to razlije;

Fig.89 is a sequence of waveforms illustrating the pulse start of the laser for the correction of the amplitude asymmetry;

Fig.90 is a block diagram of a circuit for correcting the amplitude asymmetry;

Fig.91 is a block diagram illustrating the interconnection element conversion tool pulses;

Fig. 92 - the sequence of waveforms illustrating the adjustment of the threshold by using a dynamic threshold schemes;

Fig.93 is a block diagram of the dynamic threshold scheme;

Fig. 94 is a block diagram of the optical system of recording and search of data, characterized by compatibility with previous systems;

Fig.95 diagram of the track of the optical disk with a high recording density data;

Fig.96 - chart of the sector format of the optical disk with a high recording density data;

Fig.97 is a more detailed block diagram schematic of the read/write head according to Fig.94;

Fig. 98 table representing, for each of the 21 zones preferred format of an optical disk with a high recording density of the data recording tracks within the zone, the number of sectors per track within the zone, the total number of sectors in the zone and the frequency of the recording data recorded in the area;

Fig. 99 - table of equations used to calculate the bits to the ex-F), to illustrate the 8-bit bytes in the three address fields and a data field, excluding bytes Retiming, is converted into bits channels on disk;

Fig.100V - second half of the table (from Ref.80 to FF) to illustrate the 8-bit bytes in the three address fields and a data field, excluding bytes Retiming, is converted into bits channels on disk;

Fig. 101A-119 is a block diagram of electronic circuitry for a preferred variant embodiment of the invention;

Fig.120 is a view in isometric of the mechanical block decoupling and pole piece in accordance with the preferred implementation;

Fig.121 is a view in isometric of the mechanical block junction, according to the second preferred variant implementation;

Fig. 122 - state diagram of the module firmware read mode, used in connection with the present invention;

Fig. 123 - state diagram of the module firmware recording mode used in connection with the present invention;

Fig. 124 - the Nyquist diagram the transfer function of the circuit of focus for the selected correction values closed loop;

Fig. 125 is a graphical representation of the amplitude response of the transfer function of the circuit of focus to understand the tion chain focus for open and closed States;

Fig. 127 - curves of the amplitude response of the transfer functions of the compensation focus;

Fig. 128 - curves of the phase response of the transfer functions of the compensation focus.

Description of the preferred embodiments of the invention

Build system: basic optical, electrical and mechanical components

In Fig.1 presents the optical drive (drive) 10, having a housing 14. Drive 10 provides playback and/or record to disk (not shown) located in a removable cassette 12 to the drive. Alternatively, the disk may be placed in the enclosure 14 drive 10.

In Fig. 2 presents a top view of the disk drive 10 with a detached housing 14 for clarity of presentation of some important mechanical, electrical and optical components of the drive 10. In Fig.3 presents a cross section of the drive 10 in the direction of lines 3-3 of Fig.1. In Fig.2 presents the card base 16, the spindle 17, the block linear actuators 20, block carriage objective lens 22, the optical module 24, the circuit Board of the drive 26 and a flexible circuit connector 28. In Fig.3 shows the main circuit Board 30, the motor spindle 18, the circuit Board 27 optical fashion is now drive 10, for their positioning and orientation with respect to each other. Preferably, the fee base 16 is made of steel casting.

As shown in Fig. 2, block 20 linear actuators 20 includes a pair of actuators with linear windings 23. Each actuator with a linear winding 23 is composed of a guide 34, which is rigidly fastened to the card base 16. The guides 34 are substantially parallel to one another. Next to each of the guides is the pole tip 32. A portion of each pole piece surrounds one of the windings 23 of the actuator. Each winding 23 is attached to the opposite side of the carriage block 22 of the lens, so that selective excitation winding 23 of the block 22 of the lens carriage is moved along the guide rails 34. Winding 23 of the actuator excited by signals from the circuit Board 26 scheme of excitation, which leads to the linear movement of the carriage block 22 of the lens relative to the optical module 24 and relative to the corresponding disk (not shown) inserted into the drive 10. Thus, the carriage block 22 of the lens performs coarse tracking disk.

Optical module 24 and the block 22 of the carriage lenses together form the basis of the EP, various sensors and optical elements (not shown). When the device is a laser directs a beam of radiation from the optical module 24 in the direction of the carriage block 22 of the lens and the optical unit 24, in turn, receives the return beam (not shown) from block 22 of the lens carriage. The carriage block 22 of the lens attached to the block 20 linear actuators, as described above. The carriage block 22 of the lens contains a pentaprism (not shown), a lens (not shown), actuators (not shown) for focusing the objective lens and the servo (not shown) for precise adjustment of the position of the objective lens relative to the position of the block 20 linear actuator and put the disk to ensure accurate tracking of the disk. Electric information and control signals are transferred between the block 23 of the lens carriage and the main circuit Board 30, on the one hand, and the circuit Board 26 of the drive, on the other hand, through a flexible connector 28.

Circuit Board 27 of the optical module includes an exciter laser and pre-amplifiers (not shown). Circuit Board 26 of the drive controls the drive spindle 18, actuators 23 with linear winding unit 20 line performer of the OI Board 30. The main circuit Board 30 contains the electronic components for which different considerations when designing (for example, reduction of noise, electromagnetic interference and power loss) does not allow to place them on the circuit Board 27 of the optical module or circuit Board 26 arousal.

The motor spindle 18 is rigidly fixed on the Board of the Foundation 16. The motor 18 directly causes the rotation of the spindle 17, which, in turn, rotates the disk.

Optics: Optical module and the unit lens

In Fig.4A shows a top view in cross section of the optical module 24. Optical module 24 includes a housing 40, a semiconductor laser diode 42, a collimating lens 44, the lens of achromatization 46, the prism anamorphoscope stretching 48, the beam splitter beam scattering 49, DFTR-prism 50, the cylindrical lens 51, the lens of the reader 52, the microprism 54, sensors tracking detector 56 and 58, the front sensor 60 and the detector sensor data 62. These items are also shown in Fig. 4B, which presents the scheme of the optical path of laser beam 64. In Fig.4B shows the elements of the optical module 24 in conjunction with the pentaprism 66 and the lens 68 of the block 22 of the lens carriage. For simplicity th same plane, as the laser beam 64, which pass through the optical module 24. In fact, the pentaprism 66 is placed so as to direct a portion 70 of the laser beam perpendicular to the parts of the laser beam 64, which pass through the optical module 24.

As shown in Fig.4B, it is clear that the laser beam 64 is a collimated beam formed by the lens 44 of the divergent beam emitted by the laser diode 42. The beam 64 passes through the prism 46 and 48, through the beam splitter 49 and out of the optical module 24 to the block 22 of the lens carriage. There it passes through the pentaprism 66 and focuses on the surface of the disc through the objective lens 68.

After reflection from the disk, the reflected part of the laser beam 64 is returned through the objective lens 68 and the pentaprism 66 and re-enters the optical module 24. The first part of the beam 64 is reflected from the boundary surface of the beam splitter between the lens 48 and the beam splitter 49, passes through and is focused by lens 52 and read is included in the microprism 54. There the beam is split into two parts, respectively, polarization, and each part is detected by a separate sensor element detection data 62.

The second part of the beam 64 passes through rosepetal prisms 48 and into DFTR-prism 50. There's this second part of the beam 64 is divided into two parts, each of which is focused by a cylindrical lens 51 on the respective surfaces of the respective tracking sensors 56 and 58. In response to this, the sensors 56 and 58 generate signals that are sent to circuit Board 27 of the optical module, where these signals are used to signal errors of tracking and focusing.

Electronic systems: Main circuit Board, the circuit Board and the initiation of the scheme of the optical module

Let us return to the consideration of Fig.1, 2, 4A and 5. In Fig.5 presents a block diagram of the electronic subsystems of the drive 10, where the block 80 includes a pre-amplifier 82 of the sensor reading, the causative agent 84 laser and pre-amplifiers 86 tracking sensors. As shown in Fig.4A and 5, the preamplifier 82 sensor reading is connected to the detector sensor data 62 and amplifies the signal generated by the detector data 62. Similarly, pre-amplifiers 86 tracking sensors connected to the tracking detectors 56 and 58 and amplify the signals generated by the tracking detectors 56 and 58. The laser diode 42 is connected to the exciter 84 laser that generates the excitation signal of the laser 42. Subsystem 82, 84 and 86 of the block 80 are grouped instead of the s, traveled by the signals from the sensors 62 to the pre-amplifier 82 and from sensors 56 and 58 to pre-amplifiers 86, to reduce the negative impact of noise on these signals. Since the signal exciter 84 generates the excitation of the laser diode 42, is a relatively high frequency, the correct design practice requires that the laser exciter 84 was placed next to the laser diode 42.

Block 88 in Fig.5 includes an interface block 90 with the motor spindle, the connection unit 94 from the position sensor, the switch block and display 96. Components 90, 92, 94 and 96 of the block 88 on the circuit Board 26 schematic of the pathogen. The interface block 90 of the motor spindle controls the spindle motor 18. Interface unit 92 provides interfacing with various displays and switches 96, including displays front panel diagram eject the cassette, the switches associated with the carriage 12 of the disk. The connection unit 94 position sensor connects actuators 23 of the block 20 actuators that are powered by the power amplifier 102.

The rest of the subsystems in the block diagram in Fig.5 is located on the main circuit Board 30, shown in Fig.3. These Podesta the systems interface (SCSI), the buffer unit 108 and GLIC interface 110 with electronically-erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) 112. The main circuit Board 30 also includes a diagram of the analog interface 114, and a digital signal processor 116, the embedded controller 118 from memory with random access (NVR) and erasable ROM (EPROM) 120. Note that in the case of disk drives 10, which drives the magneto-optical recording, the power amplifier 102 also excite the coil displacement 122.

Device boot tapes

In Fig.6 shows a system of recording on magnetic disks 1-10. In Fig.6 shows a removable cartridge 1-13 disk placed to enter into the drive 1-10, comprising a device for loading and unloading corresponding to the present invention.

The disc drive 1-10 includes the lower housing 1-16 and frontal charge 1-19. Front Board 1-19 includes an opening for receiving a drive 1-22, control lamp 1-25 display drive operation and the eject button 1-28 cassettes.

The disc drive 1-10 has a focusing mechanism and a tracking mechanism, the lens and read the drive, and the mechanisms are controlled by a feedback circuit including an electronic circuit for signal tracking for correction of work m the and the movable component of the drive, and second means for maintaining a first means between this component and the source of undesirable mechanical forces, providing mechanical isolation of the specified component. These aspects of the present invention will be described in detail below in the relevant sections of the description dealing with specific features of the invention.

The outer casing of the cartridge 1-13 disk conventional type includes a top flat surface 1-31 and the lower flat surface 1-32, which is shown in Fig. 25. The cartridge 1-13 disk also has a front end wall 1-34 labeled. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the front end wall 1-34 cartridge 1-13 disk remains visible to the user when the introduction of the cassette 1-13 in the disc drive 1-10. The side walls, for example side wall 1-37 passes between the upper flat surface 1-31 and the lower flat surface 1-32, and in addition, the cartridge has a rear wall 1-38 between the upper flat surface 1-31 and the lower flat surface 1-32 parallel to the front end surface 1-34 labeled. Near the end 1-34 side walls 1-37 are the channels 1-40 for placing pins installation 1-43 cassette (Fig.8A-8B), located on the Board of the Foundation 1-46.

The cartridge 1-13 disk also has a flap 1-49, spring-loaded in the closed position (Fig. 6, 7 and 16). To the Pitel ' in the preferred embodiment carries out the reading of bilateral cassettes 1-13 disks, a similar flap and the recessed part are on the lower flat surface 1-32, but these signs are not shown on the drawings. The valve typically has a latch 1-55 (not shown) at the rear 1-38 cartridge 1-13 disk 1-13.

In the cartridge 1-13 is a disc 1-14 (Fig.23-25) having a metal sleeve 1-15. As is known from the prior art, the disc 1-14 can be made in the form of a rigid substrate having a coating of magnetic material. In the coating of magnetic material is made tracks in the form of concentric or spiral rings. The magnetic coating may be on one or on both surfaces of the rigid substrate, the coating ensures the implementation of the magnetic recording data on the disc 1-14 using converters, commonly called heads. In the center of the hard substrate is a metal sleeve 1-15.

In Fig.7 shows the main components of the disc drive 1-10 according to the present invention. The lower housing 1-16 hosting fee base 1-46. The motor 1-61 spindle is installed on the Board of the Foundation 1-46. The motor 1-61 spindle includes a magnet 1-63 spindle, which attracts the metal sleeve 1-15 disc 1-14 (Fig.23-25), when the overall position 1-67. The ejection mechanism 1-67 includes left Shoe-slider 1-70, the right Shoe-slider 1-73 and lever 1-76. The ejection mechanism 1-67 described in more detail below. Lever 1-79 also shown in Fig.7 in position over the left Shoe-slider 1-70. The receiver cassettes marked common position 1-82. Also in Fig.7 shows the left craving 1-85 valve, right thrust 1-88 flap and flap 1-91, each of which is mounted to rotate on the receiver 1-82 cassettes. Front Board 1-19 drive shown before the receiver 1-82 cassettes. Finally, it is shown the rotary unit 1-94 coil magnetic bias attached to the lever 1-97 coil offset with clips 1-100 coil displacement, shown above the lever 1-97 coil displacement. For more information about these components will be given below.

In Fig. 7 also shows that the lower case 1 to 16 has side walls 1-103 and the rear wall 1-106. On the inner base of the lower housing 1-16 there are four installation positions 1-109, with fixed fee basis 1-46. The lower housing 1-16 also contains the electronic controls, which are not shown in the drawings.

In Fig. 8A and 8B presents details of the construction Board of the Foundation 1-46. Fee base 1-46 is settled in, shrunk it, sealed, bonded or associated with it. Fee base 1-46 represents the fastening component, which brings together many elements that characterize the present invention, and provides their interaction. On the periphery of the Board of the Foundation 1-46 has front wall 1-112, left outer side wall 1-115, the left inner side wall 1-118, right outer side wall 1-121, right inner side wall 1-124 and the rear vertical wall of 1-127. Left and right outer lateral walls 1-115 and 1-121, respectively, each include a vertical slot 1-130, 1-133. The left vertical slit provides accommodation for the left lifting pin 1-136 (Fig.15A) on the receiver 1-82 cassettes when the receiver 1-82 cassettes positioned relative to the card base 1-46. Right vertical slit 1-133 similarly provides accommodation right lifting pin 1-139 (Fig.15V) receiver 1-82 cassettes.

Two pin 1-43 to install the cartridge (Fig.8B) is placed near the front ends of the left and right outer lateral walls 1-115, 1-121, respectively. These pins 1-43 for installation are intended for introduction into the channels 1-40 cassette (Fig.6). When pins 1 to 43 are located in the channels 1-40, pins 1-43 UD is (forward and backward).

Bearing 1-142 motor spindle formed in the circuit Board 1-46 Foundation. The motor 1-61 spindle (Fig.7) may be supported on a support 1-142 motor spindle, for example, spring clips (not shown) attached to the intermediate rib 1-145.

Fee base 1-46 has a different axis and the fastening pins associated with it. For example, the axis of swing 1-148 lever installed on Board of the Foundation 1-45 beside the support 1-142 motor spindle. Pin 1-151 spring arm fixed at the bottom of the card base 1-46 next to the front wall 1-112 (Fig. 8A). Other pins fixed on the bottom Board of the base 1-46 next to the front wall 1-112, act as a rotary axis for the gear mechanism of buoyancy. Fee base 1-46 also includes channel 1-154 left Shoe-slide and channel 1-157 right Shoe-slider. Channels 1-154 and 1-157 pass along the sides of the card base 1-46. Channel 1-154 left Shoe-slider is formed between the left outer side wall 1-115 and the left inner side wall 1-118. Left Shoe-slider 1-70 during installation is located between the left inner side wall 1-118 and the left outer side wall 1-115 and moves in the left channel 1-154 (see Fig.9, 13 and 16). Similarly, the channel 1-157 pre-124. The right Shoe-slider 1-73 when installation is located between the right inner side wall 1-124 and right outer side wall 1-121 and moves in the right channel 1-157. Left and right shoes, floaters, 1-70 and 1-73, respectively, may be held in the respective channels 1-154, 1-157, for example, the tabs on the spring-loaded clamps (not shown) that hold the motor 1-61 spindle on its support 1-142.

At the end of the channel 1-157 right Shoe-slide, near the right vertical wall of 1-127, formed socket 1-160 Board base 1-46, where the rear side of the inner side wall 1-124 merges with the rear side of the right outer side wall 1-121. This Jack 1-160 is designed to accommodate the axis of rotation 1-163 (Fig.17B and 17A) latch 1-166 receiver. Latch 1-166 receiver has a vertical surface 1-169 (Fig.17B), which affects the release protrusion 1-172 (Fig.7 and 16A) attached to the right traction 1-88 valve, for opening the latches 1-166 receiver.

Fee base 1-46 has a hole 1-175 in the right vertical wall 1-127. The laser diode 42 (not shown), which must be located behind the rear vertical wall between the left angular counter 1-178 and right-angle stand 1-181, emits cocoteraie laser beam on the information track on the disc 1-14. The carriage 1-184 will be discussed below.

Fee base 1-46 also has a hole 1-187 made it to install a rotary axis 1-190 (Fig.14C) installation arm 1-79. This hole 1-187 press in the left inner side wall 1-118. In Fig. 9, for example, shows the lever 1-79 in the position in which its rotary axis 1-190 is in the hole 1-187. The disc drive 1-10 includes the optical module 1-189, which is made similarly to the optical module 24 mentioned above.

In Fig.14A-14C shows the detailed implementation of the installation arm 1-79. In addition to the rotary axis 1-190, lever 1-79 includes a clamping end 1-193. Lever 1-79 has a plug 1-196, formed at the end remote from the clamping end 1-193. Plug 1-196 has a long side 1-199 and the short side 1-202. When the lever is positioned, plug 1-196 covers the ledge 1-205 (Fig.11C) on the left Shoe-slider 1-70. Lever in position when the plug 1-196 covers the ledge 1-205 right Shoe-slider 1-70, better shown in Fig.9, 13, 16A, and 16B. The position of the mounting arm 1-79 when it is determined by the location of the left Shoe-slider 1-70 in the left channel 1-154.

As can be seen from Fig.13, the lever is, 8A and 8B) in the rear vertical wall 1-127 card base 1-46. In particular, the carriage positioning the laser beam on the center of the track containing the data to be read. The carriage 1-184 moves along the support rails 1-208, Fig.9. Conventional magnet Assembly moves the carriage 1-184 on rails 1-208. When the receiver 1-82 carriage is in the raised position, the lever 1-79, which is driven by the left Shoe-slider 1-70, holds the carriage 1-184 at the back of the drive. This is the position shown in Fig. 9 and 16A and illustrated using Fig.13, where the lever 1-79 shown by the solid line. When the left Shoe-the slider is moved forward by the lever 1-76 in the process of Stripping the cartridge 1-13 drive lever 1-79 rotated by the protrusion 1-205, prijigauschee to the short side 1-202 fork 1-196, while clamping the end 1-193 mounting arm 1-79 holds the carriage 1-184 the back of the drive 1-10. When the receiver 1-82 cassette is in its lower position, the left Shoe-slider 1-70 brought to the back of the drive 1-10 via a lever 1-76. Under this condition, the protrusion 1-205, which was moved back by the left Shoe-slider 1-70, turned the lever 1-79 toward the front of the drive 1-10. When the left Shoe-slider 1-70 and installation growling is on may move freely below the disc 1-13 in the drive 1-10.

The ejection mechanism 1-67 best seen in Fig.7 and 9. It contains the following main components. The motor ejection cassettes 1-209 supplies the ejection mechanism. In particular, the motor push 1-209 actuates gear, which drives the output Cam which, in turn, acts on the lever 1-76 (Fig.9) to rotate in the first direction (counterclockwise in Fig.9), while pushing the cartridge 1-13 ROM drive 1-10. In the beginning of the process of pulling the motor 1-209 actuates the corresponding worm gear 1-211. Worm gear 1-211 fixed on the Central shaft of the electric motor pushing 1-209. This worm gear 1-211 actuates the first large gear wheel 1-214, rotating about a first axis 1-217. This rotation of the first large gears 1-214 causes the rotation of the first small gear wheel 1-220, which is fixed at the bottom of the first large gears 1-214 to implement rotation in conjunction therewith about the first axis 1-217. The first small gear wheel 1-220 moves the second large gear wheel 1-223 relative to the second axis 1-226. The second small gear wheel 1-229 close second axis 1-226. The second small gear wheel 1-229, in turn, causes the rotation of the third large gear wheel 1-232 relative to the third axis 1-2 35mm. This is the third large gear wheel 1-232 actuates a Cam 1-238, which causes the lever 1-76 axis 1-148 arm.

The lever 1-76 will be described with reference to Fig.10A-10F, and Fig.9. The lever 1-76 set can be rotated on the Board of the Foundation 1-46 axis 1-148. Trap 1-239 spring arm is made on the pointed part of the lever 1-76. Spring 1-241 lever (Fig.9) is fixed between the trap 1-239 spring, lever and pin 1-151 spring lever. Spring 1-241 shift lever 1-76 in the second direction (clockwise in Fig.9) about the axis 1-148 lever. This direction of loading of the cassette, which moves the right Shoe-slide forward, and the left Shoe-slider 1-70 ago to install the cartridge 1-13 disk on the spindle motor 1-61. The lever also includes a skirt or wall 1-244, which runs on top of gear lever and thereby helps to hold the gears in position on the respective axis. End of the arm closest to the skirt 1-244 lever includes a U-shaped fork 1-247, and the end of the lever remote from the skirt 1-244, contains a similar U-way is Noah hours 1-253 left Shoe-slider 1-70 (Fig.11C). Similarly, U-shaped fork 1-250 lever 1-76 made with the possibility of rotation relative to the cylindrical connecting rack 1-256 (Fig.12E) of the right Shoe-slider 1-73. The lever 1-76 thereby can be rotated connected to the forward ends of the left and right shoes-the slider 1-70, 1-73, respectively. In addition, since the left and right shoes, floaters, 1-70, 1-73 held in corresponding channels 1-154, 1-157 by spring clips (not shown), which also hold the motor spindle 1-61 in his position, the lever 1-76 held on its axis 1-148 due to the interaction between the U-shaped forks 1-247, 1-250, and a cylindrical connecting struts 1-253, 1-256.

When the lever 1-76 rotated in the first direction (counterclockwise in Fig. 9), the left Shoe-slider 1-70 moves forward in the channel 1-154, while the right Shoe-slider 1-73 simultaneously moves backward in the right channel 1-157. Thus, rotation of the lever 1-76 in the first direction (counterclockwise in Fig.9) raises the receiver 1-82 cartridge so that the cartridge 1-13 disk may be ejected or loaded in the disc drive 1-10. On the other hand, when the lever 1-76 rotated in the second direction (clockwise is temporarily moves forward in the right channel 1-157. The lever 1-76 in this direction lowers the receiver 1-82 cartridge, placing the disk on the spindle motor. Raising and lowering the receiver 1-82 cassettes due to the rotation of the lever is discussed further below.

As indicated above, the left Shoe-slider 1-70 moves in the left channel 1-154, and the right Shoe-slider 1-73 moves in the right channel 1-157 under the influence of lever 1-76. Additional details regarding the slider 1-70, 1-73, below.

In accordance with Fig.11A-11C, especially the performance of the left Shoe-slider 1-70 are as follows. Left Shoe-slider includes a cylindrical connecting rack 1-253 at its front end. The protrusion of the adjusting lever 1-205 performed on the first recessed part 1-259. Lever 1-79 moves along the first recessed part 1-259 left Shoe-slider 1-70 under the influence of the ledge 1-205. In the left Shoe-slider 1-70 made S-shaped slit 1-262. When the left Shoe-slider 1-70 positioned in the left channel 1-154, S-shaped slit 1-162 is open towards the left outer side wall 1-115, near and behind the left vertical slit 1-130. When the receiver 1-82 cassettes positioned relative to the base plate 1-46, left lifting pin 1-136 (Fig.15A) pickup is than the thickness of the left outer wall 1-115. So the left lifting pin 1-136 acts from the left vertical slit 1-130 and moves in an S-shaped slit 1-262 in the left Shoe-slider 1-70. When the receiver 1-82 cassettes so positioned relative to the card base 1-46, and left lifting pin 1-136 is moved in the vertical slit 1-130 and S-shaped slit 1-262, the receiver 1-82 cassettes limited in its movement forward and backward and can only move up and down vertically. Vertical crack 1-130 restricts the movement of the forward-backward receiver 1-82 cassettes, while the S-shaped slit 1-262 in the left Shoe-slider 1-70 determines the height of the vertical receiver cassettes. In other words, depending on what part of the S-shaped slit 1-262 is behind a vertical slit 1-130 at any given time, the receiver 1-92 cassettes may be in its highest position, the lowered position or in a position between these two extreme positions.

The second recessed part 1-265 there at the top of the left Shoe-slider 1-70. Horizontal pin (not shown) can be attached to the card base 1-46, so as to provide movement along the second recessed part 1-265. This horizontal pin (not shown) bodø is collected at the edge of the second recessed part 1-265 after reaching one of the end positions of the left Shoe-slider.

The extreme rear end of the left Shoe-slider 1-70 neckline 1-268, which is best seen in Fig.11B and Fig.7. Neckline 1-268 is on the offset end portion 1-272 left Shoe-slider 1-70. Neckline 1-268 interacts with the shoulder 1-275 lever coil offset 1-97, Fig.7. This shoulder 1-275 of the lever rotates the lever 1-97 coil offset depending on the position of the left Shoe-slider 1-70, in particular, the provisions of the cut 1-268. Offset end part 1-272 left Shoe-slider 1-70 moved to the neckline 1-278 (Fig.8B) in the left outer wall 1-115 card base 1-46.

With reference to Fig.12A-12E will be presented to the implementation of the right Shoe-slider 1-73. As mentioned above, the lever 1-76 connected with the right Shoe-slider 1-73 through a cylindrical connecting rack 1-256. The right Shoe-slider 1-73 has an S-shaped slit 1-281, formed in it. This S-shaped slit 1-281 is a reversed (mirror-symmetric) version of the S-shaped slit 1-262 in the left Shoe-slider 1-70. It is evident from Fig. 7, of the consideration which becomes obvious that when the shoes floaters, 1-70, 1-73 connected to the lever 1-76, S-shaped slit 1-262, 1-281 are mirroring each other. Such a device is necessary, POSCO is I crack 1-281 in the right Shoe-slider 1-73, thus, the opened side of the right outer wall 1-121, when the right Shoe-slider 1-73 is in its working position in the right channel 1-157. Similar to that described above for the left Shoe-slider 1-70, when the receiver 1-82 cassettes positioned relative to the card base 1-46, right lifting pin 1-139 (Fig. 15V) is moved in the right vertical slit 1-133 (Fig.8B). Because right lifting pin 1-139 longer than the thickness of the right outer side wall 1-121, the right lifting pin 1-139 is relative to the right outer side wall 1-121 in the right vertical slit 1-133 and moves in an S-shaped slit 1-281 in the right Shoe-slider 1-73. Right vertical slit 1-133 restricts the right lifting pin from moving parallel to the longitudinal axis of the Board of the Foundation 1-46 (i.e., parallel to the line passing perpendicularly through the front wall 1-112 and rear vertical wall 1-127). Because right lifting pin 1-139 moves in an S-shaped slit 1-281, vertical height for the receiver 1-82 cassettes determined by the position of the right lifting pin 1-139 in an S-shaped slit 1-281. S-shaped slit 1-281 in the right Shoe-slider 1-73 moved by the right vertical slit 1-133 with the same speed as S-mod is executed in the form of a mirrored S-shaped slits 1-262, 1-281 ensures that the left and right lifting pins 1-136, 1-139, respectively, are held substantially at the same height above the card base 1-46 at any given point in time.

As shown in Fig.12A-12E, the right slide-Shoe 1-73 has the following additional features. On the upper surface of the right Shoe-slide made recessed part 1-284. A pin (not shown) can be installed horizontally across the right channel 1-157, so as to move along the recessed surface 1-284. Horizontal pin moving along the recessed surface 1-284, will limit the maximum forward and backward right Shoe-slider 1-73, because horizontal pin will abut the edge of the burial 1-284 in the extreme positions of the right Shoe-slider 1-73. The right Shoe-slider 1-73 also has a clipping region 1-287 to accommodate protrusion (feet) 1-290 (Fig.17A and 17B) release 1-166 receiver. Elevated part of the 1-293 provided on the right end of the right Shoe-slider 1-73. When the lever 1-76 rotated in the first direction (counterclockwise, for example, as in Fig.13), causing the right Shoe-slider 1-73 back in the right channel 1-157, the fixation occurs between the foot 1-not 1-296 (Fig.17A), located at the foot 1-290, slides on the second sliding surface 1-299 (Fig.12C and 12E), which is located on the elevated part of the 1-293 right Shoe-slider 1-73. When the surface 1-296 and 1-299 slip relative to each other, foot 1-290 spring-loaded in the direction shown by the arrow 1-302 in Fig.17A, is cut 1-287 in the right Shoe-slider 1-73, making the right Shoe-slider 1-73 held in the rear position and, therefore, holds the receiver 1-82 cassette in its extreme upper position. When the receiver cassette is in this position, the cartridge 1-13 disk in drive 1-10 will be pushed or will be loaded in the disc drive 1-10.

S-shaped slit 1-262 and 1-281 in the left and right sliders 1-70, 1-73, respectively, play a significant role in the implementation of actions "peeling", performed according to the invention during the loading of the disk on the spindle motor and discharged from a tape drive. This function is S-shaped slits 1-262, 1-281 of providing such manipulation of the tape drive, is illustrated below.

With reference to Fig.15A and 15C will be described receiver 1-82 cassette and the components mounted thereon. The receiver 1-82 cassette is a detail, molded under pressure is 88. When the drive is fully assembled, the receiver 1-82 tape runs along the outside of the left and right outer side surfaces 1-115, 1-121 card base 1-46. The receiver 1-82 tape passes vertically up and down when lifting pins 1-136, 1-139 move up and down, tracking the corresponding S-shaped slit 1-262, 1-281. The receiver 1-82 cassettes are also tilted slightly up and down relative to the imaginary transverse axis passing through the left and right lifting pins 1-136, 1-139. This slight tilt in conjunction with moving up and down generates the above action of exfoliation (removal) of the tape provided by the invention. The receiver 1-82 cassette can be clicks into place or is separated from the rest of the mechanism, if the cover of the disc drive 1-10 charged.

The receiver 1-82 cassette has a left receiving channel 1-305 cassettes and right receiving channel 1-308 cassette formed therein. The absorber 1-311 placed in the rear part of the right receiving channel 1-308, preventing improper introduction of the cassette 1-13 disk. As can be seen from Fig.6 and 7, the cartridge 1-13 disk has a couple of cracks 1-314, made in the side walls 1-37. If the cartridge 1-13 is entered correctly, the rear wall 1-38 entered into the receiving hole of the first 1-22,Yety 1-13 in the disc drive 1-10 completely. If, on the other hand, the user tries to enter the cartridge 1-13 disc front end with the labeled side facing 1-34 forward, then thrust absorber 1-311 will abut the front end side 1-34 cassette, thereby preventing the introduction of cassette disc in the disc drive 1-10 completely. The back wall 1-317 receiver 1-82 cassette neckline 1-320. This area is cut 1-320 allows release tab 1-172 (Fig.16) on the right traction valve 1-88 abut on the vertical surface 1-169 (Fig.17B) release 1-166 receiver. Because the left and right thrust damper 1-85 and 1-88 respectively rotated to the rear of the disc drive 1-10, when the cartridge 1-13 disk is inserted in the receiver 1-82 cartridge, as the cartridge 1-13 approaching full input, release the tab 1-172 unhooks the latch 1-166 receiver by clicking on the vertical surface 1-169 for the lock 1-166 receiver. This rotation of the latch 1-166 receiver releases the foot 1-290 from its engagement with the raised part 1-293 right Shoe-slider 1-73. When the latch 1-166 receiver rescaled thus, the receiver 1-82 cassette can be omitted, placing the tape drive in the working position on the spindle motor 1-61.

With reference to Fig.7, 15A, is the first and right thrust 1-85 and 1-88 respectively attached to the rear corners of the receiver 1-82 cassette, near the back wall 1-317. More specifically, the left thrust damper 1-85 can be rotated attached to the receiver 1-82 cassette at the first point swing 1-323, and right thrust damper 1-88 can be rotated attached to the receiver 1-82 cassette at the second point swing 1-326. Thrust 1-85 and 1-88 shifted by means of a spring (not shown) to the front Board 1-19 drive 1-10. When the device is one or the other of the rods 1-85, 1-88 opens the release valve cartridge and opens the damper 1-49, when the cartridge 1-13 disk is inserted in the disc drive 1-10. What kind of rods damper 1-85 or 1-88 will open the gate 1-49 cassette, is determined by which side of the cassette 1-13 disk is facing up when you enter the cartridge 1-13 in the drive. If the cartridge 1-13 is introduced first side up, the right thrust 1-88 activates the release valve and opens the valve 1-49. If the cartridge 1-13 is entered its second side facing up, then left craving 1-85 activates the release valve and opens the valve 1-49. If the drive 1-10 no cartridge, then pull 1-85 and 1-88 rely on stops 1-329 rods valves, which are made in one piece with the receiver 1-82 cassette. These lugs 1-329 ensure that the free ends 1-322 rods 1-85 and 1-88 properly positioned for release latch saln rotary coil unit of magnetic displacement 1-94. The coil block offset 1-94 used during recording and erasing in the drive 1-10. The coil block offset 1-94 includes a steel rod, 1-335, which covers the coil wire 1-338. When the coil block offset 1-94 positioned above the disc 1-14, as shown in Fig.23, it passes radially across the disc 1-14 and therefore enables the generation of a strong magnetic field along the radial strips disk 1-14 passing from the spindle 1-62 (Fig. 23-25) to the edge of the disc 1-14. When the disc 1-14 rotates under the coil unit offset 1-94 by an electric motor 1-61 spindle, is provided by forming a magnetic field over the entire surface of the disk 1 to 14, thereby allowing the user to record information on all parts of the disc 1-14 from its extreme inner to outermost tracks. Coil 1-338 and rod 1-335 closed the upper part of the body 1-341, which is installed on the lower part of the body 1-334 coil offset.

The coil block offset 1-94 installed on the curved plate 1-347 coil displacement, Fig. 22, which, in turn, mounted on the bracket 1-97 coil displacement, Fig.21. Bracket 1-97 coil offset spans the width of the Board of the Foundation 1-46 and can be rotated held by a pair of clamps 1m way as the bearings, which can rotate the bracket coil offset 1-97. Clamps 1-100 include a resistant ledge 1-350 (Fig.18), which restricts the movement of the forward receiver 1-82 cassette in the process of ejection, as explained with reference to Fig.23-25. As indicated, the bracket 1-97 coil displacement includes a lever arm 1-275, interacting with cut 1-268 on the rear left side of the slide-Shoe 1-70 for raising and lowering the coil unit offset 1-94. Because the lever arm 1-275 is engaged with the cutout 1-268 in the left Shoe-slider 1-70, the latter controls when the coil block offset 1-97 rotated to the cassette 1-13 or turn from it.

The coil block offset 1-94 can be rotated about a point 1-353 close to its center and is spring-loaded in a downward direction. Therefore, the coil unit offset 1-94 can remain parallel to the cartridge 1-13 disk, while in the lower position (i.e. the position shown in Fig.23, when the cartridge 1-13 is fully loaded) and being in the top position (i.e. the position shown in Fig.25, when the cartridge 1-13 disk unloaded). The ability of the coil unit offset 1-94 to maintain parallelism cassette 1-13 disk, while in the upper position, provides clearance, t is tuski offset is in the down position and loaded into the cartridge 1-13, it relies on the cartridge 1-13 in three places.

With reference to Fig.23-25 describes how to eject a cartridge 1-13 ROM drive 1-10. In Fig.23 shows the cartridge 1-13 in position when the sleeve 1-15 disc is completely on the spindle 1-62 motor 1-61. In this position, the coil unit offset 1-94 loaded in the cartridge 1-13 drive through the open gate 1-49. When the cartridge 1-13 is fully loaded so that the left Shoe-slider 1-70 moved to its rearmost position by a lever 1-76. Shoulder 1-275 bracket 1-97 coil displacement is rotated to the rear side of the drive 1-10. This rotation of the shoulder 1-275 lever installs coil unit offset 1-94 in the cartridge 1-13 disk. Since the lifting pins 1-136 and 1-139 receiver 1-82 cassette is limited to only vertical movement through vertical slots 1-130 and 1-133 (Fig. 8A and 8B), when the left slider 1-70 moved to the back of the drive 1-10 lever 1-76, as shown in Fig.23, the receiver 1-82 cassettes using its lifting pins 1-133 1-136 and moves to the lowest point of the S-shaped slits 1-262 and 1-281.

An intermediate stage of the ejection cycle is illustrated by means of Fig.24. After the user initiates the ejection of the cartridge 1-13 disk desi arrows in Fig.9). This lever pushes the left slider 1-70 toward the front of the drive 1-10, as shown in Fig.24. When the left slider 1-70 glides forward, cut 1-268 rotates the shoulder 1-275 lever forward while lifting the coil block offset 1-94 from cartridge 1-13 disk. As shown in Fig.24, the lifting pins 1-136 and 1-139, which is attached to the receiver 1-82 cassettes, move up S-shaped slits 1-262 and 1-281 movement of the lever 1-76. Since the lifting pins 1-136 and 1-139 placed on the receiver of the tapes at the point where the transverse axis passing through both the lifting pin 1-136 and 1-139, will not pass through the spindle 1-62, implement the action exfoliation to remove bushings 1-15 disc magnet 1-64 spindle while lifting the receiver 1-82 cassettes. In other words, as shown in Fig.24, the disc 1-14 does not rise vertically from the spindle 1-62 in the cycle of ejection. On the contrary, due to the placement of the lifting pins 1-136, 1-139 on the receiver 1-82 cassettes, the rear of the cartridge 1-13 disk rises before the front part of the cartridge 1-13 when lifting pins 1-136 and 1-139 track corresponding S-shaped slit 1-262 and 1-281. This action of exfoliation reduces the maximum force required to remove bushing disc 1-15 with magnetic clip 1-64 motor 1-61 spindola by moving the slider 1-70 and 1-73, the ledge 1-356 (Fig.15A) on the back 1-317 receiver 1-82 cassette abuts against the lower surface of the thrust ledge 1-350 (Fig.18) at the terminals 1-100 coil displacement. This contact between the lower surface of the thrust ledge 1-350 and the upper surface of the ledge 1-356, in conjunction with the continuing rotation of the lever 1-76 and the resulting longitudinal movement of the slider 1-70 and 1-73 causes a slight forward tilt, as shown in Fig.24. This is essentially about the point of contact between the thrust ledge 1-350 and ledge 1-356 when lifting pins 1-136 and 1-139 continue to raise the receiver. This movement with a slight tilt of the receiver cassettes 1-82 allows the above-mentioned action "peeling" when removing the tape.

In Fig.25 shows the position of the drive 1-10 after completion of the movement of the receiver 1-82 cassettes with a slight incline, when the receiver 1-82 rests on the stops near the receiving hole 1-22 disk. At this point, the left slider 1-70 reached its extreme forward position and pushed his shoulder 1-275 lever in its extreme forward position, thereby moving the coil unit offset 1-94 of the cartridge 1-13 disk. The coil unit displacement, therefore, is installed in parallel on the cartridge 1-13 disk, essentially aprotic the inner side of the upper surface of the disc drive 1-10. The coil block offset 1-94 runs vertically about 9 mm from its load position in the cartridge 1-13 disk to describe the raised position.

When the receiver 1-82 cassette is moved to its upper position (approximately 5 mm above its lowest position), the right slider 1-73 (Fig.12A-12E) is fixed in its rearmost position by means of latch 1-166 receiver (Fig. 17A-17C), as described above. When the receiver 1-82 is in its upper position, shown in Fig.25, the receiver cassettes 1-82 is parallel to the circuit Board base 1-46, ready to eject a cartridge 1-13. The force of the spring rods damper 1-85 and 1-88, which is shifted toward the front of the drive 1-10, as described above, and the spring force of the valve 1-49 cassette, which is biased to the closed position, ensure the ejection of the cartridge 1-13 from the drive 1-10, as shown in Fig.25.

The process of loading the disk is essentially the reverse process of pushing out. Therefore, the detailed description of the input disk is not given.

When implementing the present invention, when the sleeve 1-15 removed from the magnet 1-64 spindle, the required force pushing effectively reduced due to the fact the way dis is s required to remove bushing 1-15, than had been the case in known systems with a vertical rise. In addition, this design allows to save the overall height of the drive. The above design allows for removal of the sleeve disk 1-15 with magnet 1-64 using a mechanism that uses the available space on the sides of the disc drive 1-10, and does not require parts that span the width of the Board of the Foundation 1-46 for linking movement of both sides of the receiver 1-82 cassettes using the extra space in height. Another advantage of this design is no criticality of most of the required dimensions. In addition, the mechanism that leads to the action of the coil displacement, which performs the loading of the coil unit displacement in the cartridge 1-13, characterized by its simplicity of construction and has a minimum number of wear points. The whole structure is generally characterized by ease of Assembly and manufacture most of the items.

While the above has been described the preferred embodiment of the invention, specialists in the art it should be clear that there can be produced various changes within the scope and essence of the invention. For example, the present invention may be we with phase change or recording system), by excluding parts used for engaging the bracket 1-97 coil. In addition, although the preferred embodiment was used cartridge with a magneto-optical disk 5 1/4 inch., the present invention is applicable to all media types and all sizes of drives.

A two-axis actuator moving coils

In Fig.26 is a schematic representation of a two-axis electromagnetic actuator 2-10 made according to the present invention. The actuator 2-10 contains the objective lens 2-12 placed in the holder 2-14 lenses. Radial coil (coil tracking) 2-16 wound and attached to the holder 2-14 lens so that it, in principle, placed perpendicular to the axis Z. the First and the second focusing coil and 2-10 2-18 placed on the sides of the holder 2-14 lens and attached to the tracking coil 2-16, so that they are perpendicular to the axis Y. the First pair of permanent magnets 2-22 placed next to the first focusing coil 2-18, and the second pair of permanent magnets 2-24 located adjacent to the second focusing coil 2-20.

As shown in Fig.27, the holder 2-14 lens contains a generally rectangular yoke 2-30 with a circular aperture 2-23 in the middle. attorney 2-34, having a pair of grooves 2-44 formed on its edges, for placing and fixing the tracking coil 2-16 when it is wound around the platform. Base 2-36 supporting platform 2-34, includes first and second T-shaped section 2-46 and 2-48 with crack 2-50 between them. As explained below, this base 2-36 acts as a mass balance for the holder 2-14 lenses. Ferrule 2-30, platform 2-34 and base 2-36 Shusterman from two sides with the formation of the first and second opposite ends 2-52 and 2-54 holder lens.

The focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 attached to the tracking coil 2-16, so that the Central axis of the focusing coils coincide, intersect and preferably perpendicular to the Central axis of the coil tracking. The focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 preferably formed from a thermally associated wire with a layer of binding material therein and preferably wound on an appropriate holder or mandrel. Coils 2-18 and 2-20 preferably wound with the highest possible density without deformation of the wire. Specialists in the art it should be clear that this density will depend on the type of wire. In the process of winding the coil focus 2-18 and 2-20 preferably heated to be molten is I, so it was high enough to melt the binder material, but not so high as to cause melting of the insulation. After cooling coils 2-18 and 2-20 removed from the holder and these free-standing coil is then attached to the coil tracking a well-known manner using an appropriate adhesive.

Each free-standing focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 has an oval shape and two longitudinal side 2-56 connected by a pair of shorter ends 2-58. Side 2-56 and ends 2-58 coils 2-18 and 2-20 surround an open or hollow Central region 2-60. The tracking coil 2-16 wound on an I-beam platform 2-34 holder 2-14 lens so that the coil is mounted and secured within the grooves 2-44 and positioned against the opposite ends 2-52 and 2-54 holder lens. As shown in Fig.26 and 27, two focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 attached to the tracking coil 2-16 so that the tracking coil placed in the center of 2-60 each focusing coil. The focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 also positioned so that each coil is adjacent to the opposite ends 2-52 and 2-54 holder 2-14 lenses. Thus, the tracking coil 2-16, and the focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 rigidly attached to the holder 2-14 lenses 9, 30, 31, a light source (not shown), typically a laser diode, emits a laser beam 2-70 (Fig.31). Ray 2-70 falls on the prism 2-72, which is orthogonal reflects the light beam up to the objective lens 2-12. Lens 2-12 focuses the beam 2-70 in a well-defined focal point or optical spot 2-74 on the surface of the carrier, for example an optical disc 2-76. After falling on the disc 2-76 light beam 2-70 changed by the information recorded on the disc 2-76, and is reflected in the form of divergent light beam carrying the same information encoded on the disc 2-76. The reflected beam re-enters the objective lens 2-12, where he collyriums and again reflected by the prism 2-72 to the photodetector (not shown), which detects data recorded on the disc 2-76. In addition, if the light beam incident on the photodetector, out of focus or nechustan, the value of resuscitate or defocus is measured electronically and is used as feedback for servo

system (not shown), well known from the prior art, which provides re proper alignment of the objective lens 2-12 relative to the disc 2-76.

These feedback signals that determine the value of svetovogo beam to the desired position of the focus relative to the disc 2-76. If necessary radial movement (tracking) for accommodating the objective lens 2-12 near the center of the selected track 2-76, to the tracking coil 2-16 applied current. This current interacts with the magnetic field generated by the pairs of permanent magnets 2-22 and 2-24, for the formation of the forces that move the actuator 2-10 in the direction of tracking. These forces are generated according to the Lorentz law F=b X. I. l, where F is the force acting on the tracking coil 2-16, b - magnetic flux density of the magnetic field between the pairs of permanent magnets 2-22 and 2-24, I is the current flowing through the tracking coil 2-16, and l is the length of the coil 2-16. If the current I applied to the tracking coil 2-16, flows through it in a counterclockwise direction, relative to the orientation of Fig.29, it generates a force that moves the actuator 2-10 right. This move to the right shown in Fig.31 arrow 2-15. If the current applied to the coil 2-16, flows through it in the opposite direction, clockwise, it generates a force that moves the actuator 2-10 to the left as shown in Fig. 31 arrow 2-17. Thus, the actuator 2-10 moves radially to position the objective lens 2-12 near the center of the carousel of the mechanism 2-10 for the implementation of the focus is performed, when current is generated in the two focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 attached to the tracking coil 2-16 on the sides of the lens holder 2-14. When the current in these coils 2-18 and 2-20 flows in the counterclockwise direction in the plane of Fig.30, it generates a force that moves the lens holder 2-14 and the objective lens 2-12 upwards, as shown by the arrow 2-19 Fig. 31, to the surface of the optical disc 2-76. Conversely, if the applied current flows through the coils 2-18 and 2-20 in the clockwise direction in the plane of Fig. 30, it generates a force that moves the lens holder 2-14 down, as shown in Fig.31 arrow 2-21, or from the surface of the disc 2-76.

Because the tracking coil 2-16 connected with the lens holder 2-14 and in turn the focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 directly related to the tracking coil 2-16, the coil and the lens holder act as a "solid mass", and the frequency at which the coil unleashed relative to the holder lens, is substantially increased. In the exemplary embodiment of the actuator in accordance with the present invention, the measured frequency of the interchange amounted to 30 kHz.

In accordance with Fig.28 and 29, a pair of magnets 2-22 and 2-24 remain stationary when moving the lens holder 2-24 and for whom ergates objective lens 2-14 between the pairs of magnets 2-22 and 2-24. Pair of wires 2-82 and 2-84 attached to a stationary printed circuit Board 2-85, which is installed vertically relative to the lens holder 2-14 and acts as a support for the wire pairs 2-82 and 2-84. Pair of wires 2-82 and 2-84, in addition, attached to electrical contacts on the movable circuit Board 2-87, which is attached to the lens holder 2-14 in a vertical orientation. In particular, the free end of each of the focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 are soldered to the electrical contacts 2-86, so that current is supplied to the focusing coil 2-16 and 2-18 through the second or lower pair of wires 2-84 soldered to the contacts 2-86. The other free end of each of the focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 are soldered to the circuit Board 2-87 and connected along the electrical contact 2-88. The free ends of the tracking coil 2-16, and the first or upper pair of suspension wires 2-82 soldered to electrical contacts 2-89 movable circuit Board 2-87, so that current is supplied to the coil through the upper pair of wires. Base 2-36 lens holder 2-14 acts as a mass balance, balancing the weight of the objective lens 2-12 and circuit Board 2-87, which are attached to the lens holder 2-14.

Alternatively, four of the bending element can be used for the suspension of the lens holder 2-14. Flexural al 2-14 move up and down to focus and forbid to modify the orientation of the optical axis of the lens 2-12. Thus, the objective lens 2-12 will not turn relative to the surface of the optical disc 2-76 move the lens holder 2-14 in the direction of focus. Each Flexural element, in addition, contains a narrow portion, which acts as a hinge, allowing to some extent to make the movement of the lens holder 2-14 in the lateral direction to adjust the tracking.

In addition to the implementation of the movement for accurate focusing and tracking of the lens holder 2-14, it is often desirable to determine the position of the lens holder 2-14 relative to the base 2-80. To determine the position of the objective lens 2-12 direction and/or focus actuator 2-10 equipped with a position sensor 2-90. Preferably the light emitting diode 2-92 placed on one side of the actuator 2-10, opposite to the sensor 2-90, so that when the centering holder objective lens 2-14 within reason 2-90 light emitted by the led 2-92, will pass through the slit 2-50 in the lens holder 2-14 and to irradiate the portion of the sensor 2-90. As sensor 2-90 preferably uses a position-sensitive detector, and the sensor is placed so that when the lens holder 2-14 is located in the center founded the lens holder 2-14 moves in the lateral direction, i.e. in the direction of tracking, it will be irradiated in different parts of the sensor 2-90, thus indicating the position of the lens holder 2-14 in the direction of tracking. Therefore, if the lens holder 2-14 offset from the center of the base 2-80, part of the light emitted by the led 2-92, will be blocked by the lens holder 2-14, causing uneven distribution of light on the sensors 2-90. This uneven distribution can then be analyzed to determine the position of the lens holder 2-14 relative to the base 2-80 using well-known circuits and methods.

When the servo system is formed by the control signal, a certain current is applied to the tracking coil 2-16, and/or to the focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 depending on the direction in which it is necessary to shift the lens holder 2-14 with attached lens 2-12. Such tracking systems and feedback loops controlling the amount of current, well-known in the art. As mentioned above, this current interacts with the magnetic field generated by the pairs of permanent magnets 2-22 and 2-24, to create a force that moves the lens holder 2-14 with attached lens 2-12 in the appropriate direction fokusirovkoi below. As shown in Fig.32 and 33, a pair of permanent magnets 2-22 and 2-24 oriented opposite poles opposite each other. More specifically, the first pair of magnets 2-22 contains the first or upper magnet 2-100 and a second or lower the magnet 2-102 of the stack, United along a flat surface so that the North pole of the upper magnet 2-100 and the South pole of the lower magnet 2-102 (Fig.33) are located next to the lens holder 2-14. The second pair of magnets 2-24 contains the third or upper magnet 2-104 and a fourth or bottom magnet 2-106 of the stack, United along a flat surface with the opposite orientation, so that the South pole of the upper magnet 2-104 and the North pole of the lower magnet 2-106 (Fig.33) are located next to the lens holder 2-14. As shown in Fig.32, the lines of force corresponding to this orientation, out of the North pole of each pair of magnets 2-22 and 2-24 and included in their South pole. Iron plate 2-110 (shown dotted) can be attached to each pair of magnets 2-22 and 2-24 on the sides opposite the lens holder 2-14. Iron plate 2-110 effectively continuum magnetic flux coming out of the sides of the magnets 2-100, 2-102, 2-104, 2-106, opposite the lens holder 2-14, thereby increasing the magnetic flux near berggasthaus to the actuator 2-10, more detail is shown in Fig.34. When the current I applied to the focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 in the shown direction, i.e. from the plane of the drawing near the upper magnets 2-100 and 2-104 and in the plane of the drawing near the bottom of the magnets 2-102 and 2-106, they are formed of forces Ffocus1 and Ffocus2, which is transmitted to the lens holder 2-14 for acceleration or deceleration of the moving mass (lens holder) and to the pairs of wires of the suspension 2-82 and 2-84, curving wire suspension to move the lens holder 2-14 together with the objective lens 2-12 closer to the optical disc 2-76. Since the lines of magnetic flux curve, as described above, the direction of the magnetic field in the coils 2-18 and 2-20 varies vertically. For example, the focusing coil 2-18 placed next to the first pair of magnets 2-22, in the plane of Fig.34, vertically intersecting the coil near the upper magnet 2-100, the magnetic field has the first direction at the top of the coil 2-18 defined by B1, and the second direction in the clipping plane near the lower magnet 2-102 at the bottom of the coil 2-18, designated B2. According to the Lorentz law F=b X. I. l, the current interacts with the magnetic field B1 for forming the first component force F1 acting on the part of the focusing coil 2-18 near the upper magnet 2-100, and vzaimodeystviya with the lower magnet 2-102. Because of the horizontal parts of the force components F1 and F2 are equal and opposite in direction, these horizontal components of the forces cancel each other out in accordance with the rules of vector addition for the formation of the resulting force Ffocus1, which is directed vertically upwards in the plane of Fig.34. Similarly, the horizontal components of the force for the rest of the coil 2-18 reimbursed, giving vertical resultant force, which is directed vertically upward (i.e., has no horizontal component) and therefore moves the lens holder 2-14 closer to the surface of the optical disc 2-76.

Because the lines of flux generated by the second pair of magnets 2-24, bent opposite to those generated by the first pair of magnets 2-22, the direction of the magnetic field at any point in the coil focus 2-20 differs from the direction of the field at the corresponding point in the focusing coil 2-18. And again, due to the curvature of the lines of flow, the direction of the field acting on the coil 2-20, varies vertically along the coil. In the plane of Fig. 34 which vertically crosses the coil near the upper magnet 2-104 of the second pair of magnets 2-24, the direction of the magnetic field opma as in clipping plane near the lower magnet 2-106 the direction of the magnetic field is determined B4 at the bottom of the coil 2-20 and generated force F4. Forces are summed to form the resultant force Ffocus2, which, as shown, is directed vertically upwards.

Thus, it can be seen that the forces Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 acting on the focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20, respectively, to move the lens holder 2-14 up. Conversely, if the current to the focusing coil 2-18, 2-20 applied in the opposite direction, it will form a force that moves the lens holder 2-14 down or from the surface of the optical disc 2-76. Moving the objective lens 2-12 closer to or further from the surface of the optical disc 2-76, the focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 provide accurate focusing of the laser beam emerging from the objective lens 2-12, on the surface of the disc 2-76.

As shown in Fig.35, the movement of the actuator 2-10 for precise tracking is performed when the generated current to the tracking coil 2-16, attached to the lens holder 2-14. In the plane of Fig.35, which horizontally crosses the tracking coil 2-16, the magnetic field direction B1 acts on the cross section of the coil 2-16, nearest to the first pair of magnets 2-22, and the magnetic field having the direction B2, acts on the cross-section of the coil located near the second paragastric on the part of the coil next to the first pair of magnets 2-22, but the force F2 acts on the part of the tracking coil next to the second pair of magnets 2-24. These forces are summed according to the laws of vector addition for the formation of the resulting force Ftrack, which operates by moving the lens holder 2-14 to the right in the plane of Fig.35. When forces act on the tracking coil 2-16 thus, they are passed through the lens holder 2-14 providing acceleration or deceleration of the moving mass (lens holder), and are applied to pairs of suspension wires 2-82 and 2-84 which bend in the appropriate direction to move the objective lens 2-12 and combine the center of the exiting laser beam with a center of the selected track for recording data on the surface of the optical disc 2-76. Conversely, if the applied current I flowing in the coil 2-16 in the clockwise direction, it generates a resultant force that moves the lens holder 2-14 left in the plane of Fig.35.

Thus, it is possible to see that the considered communication device according to the invention allows to reduce the distance between the resulting forces acting on the coil 2-16, 2-18, 2-20, and the optical axis of the objective lens 2-12, and, consequently, to reduce the negative active transportation modes, such as intellego mechanism, corresponding to the invention requires only two pairs of permanent magnets, i.e., only four magnet and three coils for the implementation of the displacements in the directions of the tracking and focusing, thereby decreasing the size and weight of the actuator and increase the frequency of the junction. Due to the small number of components of the actuator, simplifies its manufacture and Assembly in comparison with known designs of actuators having a greater number of coils, magnets and pole pieces. In addition, since the tracking coil and the focusing 2-16, 2-18, 2-20 directly related to the lens holder 2-14 and not wound on the yoke or pole, significantly improved the stiffness and resonant frequency response. In addition, a direct connection between the coil 2-16, 2-18, 2-20 reduces the distance between the point where the generated effective power of focusing and tracking, and an optical axis of the objective lens, and thereby, decrease the negative active travel, such as pitch, roll and yaw.

The present invention allows to improve the efficiency of the motor. For actuators constructed in accordance with the invention, the obtained values acdialog direction. These values are significantly higher than achieved in previously known constructions. Specialists in the art it should be clear that the present invention provides the use of approximately 40% of the coil, thus increasing the efficiency of the actuator compared to known designs.

The preferred embodiment of the invention has been described with reference to the coordinate system shown in Fig.26, in which the optical disc 2-76 located above the objective lens 2-12, so that focusing is performed by moving the actuator 2-10 up and down along the Z-axis, and tracking is performed by moving the actuator in the lateral direction along the y axis. Specialists in the art it should be clear that an actuator made in accordance with the invention, may also be introduced into the optical system, having an orientation that is different from the above.

The device of the perception of focus

In Fig.36 shows a schematic representation of a preferred variant of the device of the perception of focus 3-10 corresponding to the invention. The device 3-10 contains the optical system 3-12 walking beam S contains part of the irradiating beam I, reflected by the disc 3-14. Methods of forming such witness beam is well known to specialists in this field of technology. For example, the optical system, such a system 3-12, for the formation of the servo beam S is described in U.S. patent N 4862442 shown here for reference. A summary of the operating principle of the optical system 3-12 below.

As shown in Fig.36, the optical system 3-12 contains a laser source 3-16, forming a linearly polarized beam B. Beam In collyriums collimating lens 3-18, and the collimated beam is directed by the optical beamsplitter 3-20 on the objective lens 3-24. The collimated beam is then directed by the objective lens 3-24 on the surface of the optical disc 3-14. The optical disk may, for example, be a CD-ROM, videodisc, the law of Ukraine on the optical disk. The disc 3-14 reflects the irradiating beam focused on it, back through the objective lens 3-24 to block the beam splitting 3-20. Specialists in the art it should be clear that the power beam splitting 3-20 may contain the first beam splitter (not shown) for changing the direction of the first part of the reflected beam for irradiating the formation of the servo beam s beam splitting Unit 3-20 mobilecause beam for forming the information beam. Such an information beam carrying the information contained on an optical disc 3-14. Servo beam S is intercepted FTR-prism 3-30, the construction of which is described in detail below.

As described in more detail below, the servo beam S is divided FTR-prism 3-30 on the transmitted beam T and the reflected beam R. In the device according to Fig.36 the transmitted and reflected beams T and R are essentially equal cross-section and intensity. The transmitted beam T falls on the first quadrature detector 3-32, and the reflected beam R on the second quadrature detector 3-34. The electrical signals generated by the quadrature detectors 3-32 and 3-34 in response to the intensity distribution of the transmitted and reflected beams T and R, are used by the control unit 3-37 for forming a differential signal of the focus error indicating the focus of the irradiating beam I on the disc 3-14. A preferred example of execution control unit 3-37 and used it a way of forming the differential signal of the focus error discussed below. The error signal, the focus may, for example, be used to control a mechanical device (not shown) used to control the focusing of the incident beam I Hid in cross section from the top to the FTR prism 3-30. Prism 3-30 contains the first and second optical elements 3-35 and 3-36, between which there is a separating layer 3-38. Optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 can be made of glass with a refractive index greater than the refractive index of the separating layer 3-38. For example, in the preferred embodiment, the optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 can be made of glass with a refractive index of 1.55, and the separating layer 3-38 may be made solid, such as magnesium fluoride (MgF2) or quartz (SiO2), with a refractive index of 1.38 1.48, respectively. The separating layer 3-38 does not have to be hard; it can be formed by liquid or air, provided that the optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 have a higher refractive index.

Physics of the interaction of the light beam S with a layer 3-38 consists in the following. If the layer 3-38 and the optical element 3-35 no, it is a well-known phenomenon of total internal reflection at the hypotenuse faces of the optical element 3-36 for the transmission of the whole beam S beam direction R. However, a certain amount of light energy exists beyond the hypotenuse of the optical element 3-36 in the form of "not most is other element 3-35 and extends in the direction of the beam So This phenomenon is known as frustrated total reflection (FTR). In these conditions, if the FTR prism is located relative to the beam S so that the angle of incidence And beam S on the separating layer 3-38 close to the field of frustrated total reflection, the curves of the transmission and reflection will have a very large slope (angular sensitivity). This allows us to produce a highly sensitive system for the perception of focus. In addition, the curves of transmission and reflection for this system, based on the principle of frustrated total reflection, will be relatively insensitive to the wavelength of light in the beam S, compared with the corresponding characteristics of the multilayer structure.

Prism 3-30 may be manufactured by applying a separating layer on any of the optical elements of a conventional thin-film technology. Complementary optical element is then attached to the free surface separating layer using an optical adhesive. Although the refractive indices of the first and second optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 usually chosen to be identical, but can also be selected and different refractive indices. In the preferred embodiment, the first and second optical elements istvanne equal cross-section.

As shown in the front view in Fig.38, the first quadrature detector 3-32 includes first, second, third and fourth photosensitive elements 3-40, 3-42, 3-44 and 3-46, respectively, which generate electrical signals T1, T2, T3 and T4 in accordance with the intensity of the transmitted beam T falling on them. Similarly, the second quadrature detector 3-35 contains the fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth photosensitive elements 3-50, 3-52, 3-54 and 3-56, respectively, which generate electrical signals R1, R2, R3 and R4 in response to the incident reflected beam R. Photosensitive elements may be a pin diode, and the level of electrical output of each diode is proportional to the adopted optical energy.

If the objective lens 3-24 in Fig.36 is located relative to the disc 3-14 so that the irradiating beam I is properly focused, the rays entering in the servo beam S, well collimated (i.e., essentially parallel) and therefore fall on the separating layer 3-38 essentially at the same angle a as shown in Fig.37. In contrast, if the objective lens 3-24 not focuses the incident beam I in the plane of the disc 3-14, the rays in the beam S will be either converging or expenses which the second beam is well focused, while rays with different angles of incidence correspond to the case of defocusing of the beam I. the prism 3-30 is designed in such a way that the characteristics of reflection and transmission of a separating layer 3-38 very sensitive to the angle of incidence of the optical energy to the layer 3-38. Thus, the spatial intensity distribution of the transmitted and reflected beams T and R can be varied by changing the focus of the irradiating beam I with respect to the surface of the disc 3-14. I.e. a well-focused beam of I gives a well-collimated servo beam S, so that all rays have the same reflection separating layer 3-38. Accordingly, the transmitted and reflected beams T and R will have a substantially uniform intensity with good focusing of the beam I. conversely, diverging or converging servo beam S will form the transmitted and reflected beams T and R with uneven intensity distribution, since the rays in the servo beam S will experience a different degree of reflection of the separating layer 3-38. By detecting these spatial changes in the intensity of transmitted and reflected beams photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 form of electrical signals, which can be used DL is CCA I.

Method of forming a differential error signal, the focus with regard to the degree of callmerobbie servo beam S can be explained by using Fig.39. In Fig.39 shows a graph of the reflectivity (intensity of the beam, R is the beam intensity S) FTR-prism 3-30 in function of the angle of incidence of rays in the servo beam S relatively to the separating layer 3-38. More specifically, the graph in Fig.39 represents the reflectivity Rs, Rp prism 3-30 in response to the irradiation of the s-polarized and p-polarized optical energy wavelength to 0.78 μm. The reflectivity profiles in Fig. 39 correspond FTR-prism 3-30 having a separating layer 3-38 with a thickness of 4.5 μm and a refractive index of 1.38, and a separating layer located between the glass elements with a refractive index of 1.55. As shown in Fig.39, the prism 3-30 is preferably positioned relative to the tracking beam's angle of incidence And with the appropriate working point P. I.e., at the working point P of the prism 3-30 is positioned so that the incident beam I, is properly focused on the disc 3-14, forms a well-collimated servo beam S, the rays which fall on the separating layer 3-38 angle A1. Since the reflectivity at the om 3-12, including the prism 3-30, are essentially identical to the average intensity.

If the distance between the objective lens 3-24 and 3-14 disk is changed so that the witness beam becomes either converging or diverging, the first part of it will fall on the separating layer 3-38 at an angle of incidence, a large A1. For example, at an angle A2 (Fig.39) the corresponding portion of the tracking beam will experience reflection coefficient of approximately 0.7. Since the first part of the witness beam experienced the reflection coefficient of 0.5 with a well collimated servo beam S, the area of the photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34, perceiving part of the reflected and transmitted beams R and T obtained from the first part of the witness beam, will have correspondingly more or less optical energy than when proper focusing of the incident beam I. Similarly, the field of photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34, optically conjugate with the parts of the transmitted and reflected beams T and R for the second part of the servo beam S incident on the separating layer 3-38 under the angle A3, a smaller angle A1, will receive a correspondingly greater or lesser number of optical energy than in good focus. In response to the electrical signals generated by the photodetectors is ravnomernost intensity distribution of the transmitted and reflected beams T and R. Moreover, since in the preferred embodiment, the prism 3-30 is optically different, change the intensity of the transmitted beam T due to changes in the angle of incidence of the part of the servo beam S are mirror reflections equal and opposite changes in the value part of the reflected beam R, formed in the same part of the witness beam. Adifferential signals focusing errors can be obtained independently using transmitted or reflected beams, respectively, using the equations

The error signal on the screen before.)=(T1+T2)-(T3+T4) (1)

The error signal focus (reflected.)=(R1+R2)-(R3+R4) (2)

In a differential system of differential error signal focus (DFES) is formed by the control unit 3-37 in accordance with the following equation:

DFES=(R1+R2+T3+T4)-(T1+T2+R3+R4) (3)

The control unit 3-37 contains circuitry that provides the arithmetic operations according to equation (3) to form a differential error signal focus (DFES) in accordance with these operations. Pre-amplifiers (not shown) to amplify the electrical signals from the photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 before they are processed by the control unit is t to synthesize differential signals focusing errors, characterized by a lower sensitivity to some of the shortcomings of the beam, not due to the inaccuracy of the focus position of the irradiating beam relative to the disc 3-14. Since a localized decrease in the intensity of the servo beam S is not associated with the positioning of the focus of the irradiating beam affects the photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 equally, this reduction does not affect the magnitude of the differential signal focusing errors due to appropriate compensation, according to equation (3).

As mentioned above in the section "Background of the invention", known focus system were not effective enough to implement the differential circuit perception of focus described by equation (3). In particular, the feature of the present invention is that the FTR prism 3-30 provides for the formation of transmitted and reflected beams of essentially the same cross-section and intensity, so that they can effectively contribute to the formation of the differential error signal focus.

In addition, for the formation of the differential error signal focus in order to maintain the focus of the irradiating beam I in the direction normansolomon management 3-37 to generate the error signal tracking (TES). This signal indicates the radial position of the irradiating beam I is relatively commonly used spiral or concentric track record (not shown) on the surface of the disc 3-14. The error signal, the tracking will allow the I beam to track a particular track, despite the eccentricities due to the mechanical control device (not shown) for adjusting the radial position of the objective lens 3-24 relative to the disc 3-14. The error signal tracking is calculated by the control unit 3-37 based on the electrical output signals of the photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 in accordance with the following equation:

TES=(T1+T3+R3+R1)-(T2+T4+R2+R4) (4)

And again, the way of determining the error signal of the tracking on the basis of the ratio between spatial changes in the intensity of the tracking beam and the corresponding positioning of the irradiating beam is disclosed, for example, in U.S. patent N 4707648.

Probably, in most systems for controlling the focus of the irradiating beam relative to the optical disk, it is desirable to form as the signals of the tracking error and the error signals of the focus in response to the electrical output signals from the elements of photodetective. Since the formation of Signalator, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the use of quadrature detectors. It is also known that the error signal, the focusing can be obtained on the basis of the electrical signals generated by the photodetectors having only two independent photosensitive region (two-element detectors). Accordingly, in systems requiring the generation of only the error signal, the focusing may be used singly photodetective element, instead of the first and second elements 3-40 and 3-42 photodetector 3-32, and single photodetective element can respectively replace the third and fourth elements and 3-46 3-44. Similarly, a single photodetective element can be used instead of the fifth and sixth elements 3-50 and 3-52 photodetector 3-34 and a single element may be used instead of the seventh and eighth elements 3-54 and 3-56.

The steepness of the profile of reflectivity in Fig.39 at the working point P is proportional to the sensitivity of the differential error signal of the focus generated by the device 3-10. More specifically, the sensitivity of the device 3-10 to change the focus of the irradiating beam I increases with increasing groupsmy 3-30, characterized by reflectivity profile with the maximum slope.

The shape of the reflectivity curve in Fig.39 at the working point P can be changed by changing the thickness of the separating layer 3-38. For example, increasing the thickness of the separating layer 3-38 translates the angle of minimum reflectivity Am critical angle AC (Fig.39), without affecting the value of the last. Therefore, increasing the thickness of the separating layer serves to increase the slope of the curve reflectivity near the working point P. Similarly, the reduction in the thickness of the separating layer 3-38 increases the angular separation between the critical angle AC and the angle of minimum reflectivity Am. The shape of the curve reflectivity of the prism 3-30 may be changed to adjust the sensitivity of the differential error signal focus. Acceptable form can be obtained, for example, when using a separating layer with a thickness greater than half the wavelength of the irradiating beam I.

The value of the critical angle AC can be changed by changing the refractive index of the separating layer 3-38 relative refractive index glass elements 3-35 and 3-36. So obrazy surrounding glass elements can be manufactured by the prism 3-30 in accordance with the desired reflectivity profile.

In Fig. 40 shows a graph of the normalized differential error signal focus (NDFES) formed in the device 3-10 as a function of deviation from the desired displacement of the objective lens 3-24 relative to the disc 3-14.

The data in Fig. 40 were obtained using prism 3-30 having a separation layer with a refractive index of 1.38 and a thickness of 4.5 μm between two glass elements with a refractive index of 1.55, and the prism 3-30 was irradiated witness beam with wavelength to 0.78 μm. As shown in Fig. 40, the differential value of the error signal, the focusing is preferably equal to zero when the desired displacement of the objective lens 3-24 relative to the disc 3-14. The sign (+ or -) of the differential error signal to the focus, therefore, indicates that the offset between the objective lens and the disk surface is greater than or less than what is required for proper focusing. As described above, the differential error signal, the focusing can be used to control a mechanical device (not shown) designed to adjust the distance between the objective lens 3-24 and the disc 3-14. You can see that the slope of the normalized differential signal oshi the servo beam S is represented here as essentially collimated in the fall on the separation layer 3-38, the present invention is not limited to the configurations forming collimated tracking beams. If you are using convergent or divergent witness beams, inaccurate positioning of the focus of the irradiating beam will change the degree of convergence or divergence of the beam. Specialists in the art it should be clear that the device of the perception of focus corresponding to the invention, can be used to generate a differential error signal focus in response to such changes in the convergence or divergence of the beam.

Thus, it is shown that corresponding to the invention the device of the perception of focus overcomes the disadvantages of the known systems determine focus by ensuring that the reflected and transmitted beams of essentially the same shape and intensity, from which the differential method, can be obtained precision is not sensitive to the height error signal focus. Disclosed here is a way of focusing nevertheless retains the characteristics peculiar to some related systems determine the focus with low sensitivity to mechanical vibrations, reduced susceptibility to nakhrewali the tracks)

In Fig.41 is a schematic representation of the principle of the exemplary embodiment of the optical system of the read/write 4-50 when reading data from a specified position 4-52 on storage media, such as optical disk 4-54. Although the system 4-50 shows how the system can be written only once, specialists should be clear that the block carriage and the actuator corresponding to the invention can also be used in a magneto-optical systems with erasing information. The information is transmitted to the disk 4-54 and read from it by means of a light beam 4-56 generated by the light source 4-58, passing through many components, including a beam splitter in the form of a cube 4-60, which divides the light beam 4-56 polarization, a quarter-wave plate 4-62, which changes the polarization of the light beam 4-56, collimator lens 4-64 and the objective lens 4-66, which directs the light beam to the desired position 4-52 on disk 4-54.

When the device is a light source 4-58, in a typical case, a laser diode, emits a light beam 4-56 in the direction of the convex collimator lens 4-64. Collimator lens 4-64 converts this light beam 4-56 in parallel linearly S-polarized light is selected prisms 4-72 and 4-74, bonded together at their respective hypotenuse, and includes a polarization-sensitive coating, forming usersmanual surface transition 4-76 between the two hypotenuse. The beam splitter 4-60 parts and/or combines light beams of different polarization States, in particular linear S-polarization and linear P-polarization. The separation is performed using polarization-sensitive coating, which transmits a linearly P-polarized light rays and reflects linearly S-polarized light beams. The light emerging from the beam splitter 4-60, passes through the quarter wave plate 4-62, which converts linearly polarized light beam 4-70 into circularly polarized light beam 4-78. After exiting the quarter-wave plate 4-62 this circularly polarized beam enters the actuator 4-80.

The actuator 4-80 contains a mirror 4-82, which is orthogonal reflects the light beam 4-78 up in the direction of the objective lens 4-66. This lens 4-66 brings circularly polarized beam 4-78 in a well-defined focal point 4-52 on the surface of the optical disk 4-54. After falling on the disk 4-54 circularly polarized light beam 4-th light beam 4-84, carrying the same information encoded on the disc 4-54. The reflected circularly polarized light beam 4-84 re-enters the objective lens 4-66, where he collyriums. Light beam 4-84 again reflected from the mirror 4-82 and re-enters the quarter wave plate 4-62. After exiting the quarter-wave plate 4-62 circularly polarized beam 4-84 is converted into a linearly P-polarized light beam 4-86. Since the linearly P-polarized light beams transmitted through the beam splitter 4-60 without reflection on usersmanual surface, the beam 4-86 arrives at the photodetector 4-88, which detects data stored on disk 4-54. In addition, if the light beam 4-86 incident on the photodetector 4-88, out of focus or resuction, the degree of defocus or resuscitate is measured electronically and is used as feedback for servo system (not shown), which again justorum the objective lens 4-66.

In Fig. 42 presents the electromagnetic block carriage and the actuator 4-100, made in accordance with the invention. The unit can be used in conjunction with an optical module 4-102 for recording and reading data on the surface of the Opti is a quarter-wave plate 4-62 and the beam splitter are 4-60 in the optical module 4-102. The motor 4-104 spindle is placed next to the unit 4-100 and causes the rotation of the optical disk (not shown) about an axis of rotation And over the unit 4-100. Unit 4-100 includes the carriage 4-106 with the first and second support surfaces 4-108 and 4-110, mounted slidable on the first and second guide 4-112 and 4-114, respectively, and an actuator 4-116 mounted on the carriage 4-106. As you can see, guide 4-112 and 4-114 form a frame which moves the carriage. The light beam 4-120 from the light source 4-58 in the optical module 4-102 supplied to the actuator 4-116 through a circular aperture 4-118 and is reflected by the mirror, contained within the actuator through the objective lens 4-122 that defines the optical axis On the surface of the disc. As you can imagine, the axis of rotation a of the disk parallel to the optical axis Of the objective lens 4-122.

The carriage 4-106 and actuator 4-116 moved horizontally along the guide rails 4-112 and 4-114 in the tracking direction using the actuator coarse tracking to provide access to different tracks with recording information on the disk surface. The tracking actuator includes two permanent magnet 4-130 and 4-132, each magnet is attached to the C-opasnosti across the ends of the outer pole pieces 4-134 and 4-136 with the formation of a rectangular frame around the permanent magnets 4-130 and 4-132. Two coils coarse tracking 4-142 and 4-144 equal length attached to the vertical plates 4-174 and 4-176 (Fig.43) and surround the inner pole pieces 4-138 and 4-140 with a clearance sufficient to move the pole tips 4-138 and 4-140, when the carriage 4-106 moves in the direction of tracking. In this embodiment, the coil coarse tracking 4-142 and 4-144 are the only moving parts of the actuator coarse tracking. As explained below, the actuator 4-116 can also move the objective lens 4-122, zoom in or out it on the disk, thus focusing the light beam 4-120 in the desired position on the disk surface.

In Fig. 43 presents a view with spatial diversity of elements, including the carriage 4-106 and actuator 4-116. The carriage 4-106 contains essentially rectangular base 4-150, which is fixed to the actuator 4-116. The basis 4-150 has a substantially flat upper surface 4-152, rectangular camera 4-154, formed in it. The first bearing surface 4-108 has a cylindrical shape, and the second bearing surface 4-110 consists of two elliptical reference sections 4-160 and 4-162 approximately equal length which meet the again 4-108, 4-110 experiencing the same degree of pre-load. Support surfaces 4-108 and 4-110 also made so that both of them have the same size of its surface in contact with the guide 4-112 and 4-114. Length of track sections forming a second bearing surface, is approximately equal to the length of the first support surface, although some minor deviations in length to account for wear and tear.

Two vertical walls 4-156 and 4-158 pass upward from the upper surface 4-152 base 4-150 near the ends of the camera 4-154. The basis 4-150 also contains two areas 4-164 and 4-166 platform formed at the ends of the base 4-150 above the support surfaces 4-108 and 4-110. The ledge 4-168 connects the upper surface 4-152 base 4-150 with the second area 4-166 platform. The first U-neck 4-170 formed in the first area 4-164 platform, and the second U-neck 4-172 formed in the second region 4-166 platform and the ledge 4-168.

Coil coarse tracking 4-142 and 4-144 attached to the two vertical plates 4-174 and 4-176 respectively. Plate 4-174 and 4-176 positioned respectively in the notches 4-180 and 4-182 formed at the ends of the base 4-150. The basis 4-150, in addition, contains a charge balancing mass 4-184, korotory protrudes outward from the base 4-150 near the coil coarse tracking 4-142. Circular aperture 4-192 formed in the front side 4-194 base 4-150 and provides a light beam passing 4-120, emitted by the optical module 4-102 (Fig. 42). Bracket 4-196 with a circular hole 4-198 placed between the second vertical wall 4-158 and the first area 4-164 platform along the front side 4-194 base 4-150. Bracket 4-196 in addition neckline 4-200 for placement of the photodetector 4-202 so that the photodetector is located between the bracket 4-196 and the first area 4-164 platform.

The actuator 4-116, often referred to as 2D-drive for the two directions of movement, i.e., the focusing and tracking on the basis of 4-150 between the vertical walls 4-156 and 4-158 areas 4-164 and 4-166 platform. Prism (not shown) placed inside the chamber 4-154 at the base 4-150 for deflection of the light beam 4-120, emitted from the optical module 4-102 so that the beam 4-120 comes out of the actuator 4-116 through the objective lens 4-122. The objective lens 4-122 placed in the lens holder 4-210 attached to the focus actuator and the exact gracinha, which moves the lens 4-122 to precision align and focus the emerging beam 4-120 in the desired position on the surface on which inzy.

Components of the actuator 4-116 best shown in Fig. 44. The lens holder 4-210 usually has a rectangular shape and includes a generally rectangular hole 4-212 formed therein. The upper surface of 4-214 of the lens holder 4-210 contains a circular clip 4-216, placed between two ribs 4-218 and 4-220. Circular aperture 4-222 with a diameter substantially equal to the diameter of the shroud 4-216, formed in the lower surface 4-224 holder lens. The rectangular focusing coil 4-230 placed inside the rectangular hole 4-212 in the lens holder 4-210. Two oval coil precise tracking 4-232 and 4-234 placed in the corners of the first end 4-240 focusing coil 4-230, and two identical coils tracking 4-236, and 4-238 placed in the corners of the second end 4-242 focusing coil 4-230. The first pair of U-shaped pole pieces 4-244 placed around the first end 4-240 focusing coil 4-230 and bonded with her tracking coils 4-232 and 4-234, the second pair of U-shaped pole pieces 4-246 surrounds the second end 4-242 focusing coil 4-230 and bonded with her coil tracking 4-236, and 4-238. In addition, two permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252 placed between the respective pairs of pole pieces 4-244 and 4-246, next to the relevant catherinette 4-214 of the lens holder 4-210, and the other two lower bending bracket 4-264 and 4-266 attached to the lower surface of the lens holder 4-210. Each bending the bracket preferably consists of a thin sheet of etched or stamped metal (usually steel or beilieve-copper alloy with a thickness of about 25 to 75 microns. For simplicity it will be described only one of the bending arms 4-260. It is clear that the rest have the identical design. Bending the bracket 4-260 has a first vertical section 4-270 attached to the first, second and third horizontal sections 4-272, 4-274, 4-276. The third horizontal section 4-276 also attached to the perpendicular to the cross member 4-280. The first horizontal section 4-272 includes a flange 4-278, which is attached to the corresponding flange 4-218 on the lens holder 4-210. Similarly, the second flange of the upper bending bracket 4-262 attached to the corresponding flange 4-220, while the lower brackets 4-264 and 4-266 attached to the respective structural elements on the bottom surface of the lens holder 4-210.

Arms 4-260, 4-262, 4-264, and 4-266 also attached to a supporting element 4-290. Supporting element 4-290 has a Central cutout 4-292, which includes a second pair of pole pieces 4-246. Wisnie section 4-280 arms 4-260 and 4-262 attached to these projections 4-292, and brackets 4-264 and 4-266 connected to respective tabs at the bottom of the support element 4-290 to work together to ensure the suspension of the lens holder 4-210 relative to the reference element 4-290. Supporting element 4-290 also contains a hole 4-296 to accommodate led 4-300. Diode 4-300 Shusterman aperture 4-198 in the bracket 4-196 (Fig. 43), and the photodetector 4-202 placed inside the neckline 4-200 in the bracket so that when the washing led 4-300 essentially collimated beam is radiated through the aperture 4-198 in the bracket 4-196 and falls on the photodetector 4-202. Depending on the position of the lens holder 4-210 relative to the reference element 4-290 light emitted diode 4-300, will fall on different parts of the detector 4-202. Analyzing the amount of light falling on the detector 4-202, it is possible to generate the correction signal position to determine the offset required for accurate focusing and tracking with respect to the desired position on the disk surface.

In the example, perform the exact mass of the actuator includes a lens holder 4-210, the objective lens 4-122, the focusing coil 4-230, coils accurate tracking 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238. The mass of the carriage includes a base 4-150, coil coarse tracking 4-142 and 4-144, bracket 4-196, the, the permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252, pole pieces 4-244 and 4-246 and bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-110.

In accordance with the above description of Fig.43 and 44, the coil coarse tracking 4-142 and 4-144 have the same size and symmetrical with respect to the optical axis Of the objective lens. In addition, a pair of tracking coils 4-232, 4-234 and 4-236, 4-238 have the same size and symmetrical about the optical axis O of the lens 4-122. The dimensions of plate balancing masses 4-184 and ledge balancing masses 4-190 preferably selected to compensate for the weight of the support element 4-290 arms 4-260, 4-262, 4-264, 4-266, bearing surfaces 4-108, 4-110, bracket 4-196 and photodetector 4-202, so that the center of mass of the carriage and the center of mass of the actuators accurate tracking and focus (including pole pieces 4-244, 4-246, permanent magnets 4-250, 4-252, the focusing coil and coil 4-230 tracking 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238) intersect the optical axis O of the lens 4-122. As explained below, the combination of these centers of gravity with the optical axis O of the lens 4-122 and symmetry forces the actuator and reaction forces acting on the carriage 4-106 and actuator 4-116 guarantee to minimize unwanted movements that affect the positioning of the objective lens 4-122.

Conversely, in Fig. 46 shown that if the direction of the described forces Fcoarse1' and Fcoarse2', which moves the carriage in the plane of the drawing in Fig.46 (to the right in Fig.45). The amount of movement in the direction of the tracking depends on the magnitude of the current in the coils coarse tracking 4-142 and 4-144. Thus, the carriage 4-106 is moved for positioning the objective lens 4-122 so that the exiting laser beam 4-120 focused on a desired track of the information recording surface of the optical disk.

When the control signal is formed in the optical module 4-102, the required current is applied to the coils accurate tracking 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, and 4-238 or to the focusing coil 4-230 depending on the required direction of movement of the lens holder 4-210 and related objective lens 4-122. This tracking system and the feedback circuit controlling the amount of current, well-known in the art. This current interacts with the magnetic field of permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252 to generate force, displacing the lens holder 4-210 and an associated objective lens 4-122 in the direction of the tracking or focus. For example, if you re-positioning in the direction of the focus in accordance with the error signal to the focus, this signal is transmitted to the servo amplifier (not shown), xcvii with the Lorentz law F=b X. I. l.

As shown in Fig.47, permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252 2D actuator 4-116 oriented so that the South pole of the magnets 4-250, 4-252 facing the lens holder 4-210. In this configuration, the magnetic field is formed In the flow lines which emerge from the magnets 4-250, 4-252 and inwards in the direction of the lens holder 4-210, as shown. When the current I applied to the focusing coil 4-230, flows through part of the coil 4-230 located in the magnetic field b In the direction shown in each part of the focusing coil generates an upward-directed force Ffocus which is transmitted to the arms 4-260, 4-262, 4-264, 4-266, flexing them to move the lens holder 4-210 together with the objective lens 4-122 closer to the optical disk. Conversely, if the current I flows through part of the coils in directions opposite shows the generated downward force acting on the bracket and moving the lens holder 4-210 together with the objective lens 4-122 from the surface of the optical disc. The magnitude of the offset depends on the amount of current applied to the focusing coil 4-230. Moving the objective lens 4-122 closer to or further from the surface of the optical disk, the focusing coil 4-230 allows precise focusing of the laser puckane in Fig.48, moving the actuator 4-116 to ensure accurate tracking is implemented by generating a current in the four coils accurate tracking 3-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238, attached to the focusing coil 3-230. When the current applied to the tracking coils flows in the directions shown through parts of the tracking coils in the magnetic field, generated power Ftrack that moves the lens holder 4-210 right. When the forces Ftrack act on the coil tracking 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238, they are passed through the focusing coil 4-230 and the lens holder 4-210 to arms 4-260, 4-262, 4-264, 4-268, which are bent in the correct direction and the objective lens 4-122 moves in the direction of the forces to the right in Fig.48. If current flows through the tracking coil 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238 in the opposite direction, it generates force that ensures the movement of the lens holder 4-210 left. The amount of current applied to the coils accurate tracking 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238, relatively small compared with the magnitude of the current applied to the coils coarse tracking 4-242, 4-244, and sizes of coils accurate tracking is much smaller than the dimensions of the coils coarse tracking. This leads to an increase of the resonance frequency and allows for more height In Fig. 49A-B schematically represented by the block of the actuator and carriage 4-100, which illustrates the symmetry and balance of powers provided in the present invention.

In Fig.49A is a diagram illustrating the symmetry forces the coarse tracking force to the actuator 4-116 in the horizontal plane. If the current applied to the coils coarse tracking 4-142, 4-144, as described above, the generated power Fcoarse1 and Fcoarse2, which are centered in part coils coarse tracking 4-142, 4-144, located near the permanent magnets 4-130, 4-132, respectively. The dimensions of the first coil coarse tracking 4-142 set equal to dimensions of the second coil coarse tracking 4-144, the currents flowing in each coil are equal, so the power Fcoarse1 and Fcoarse2 acting on the coil, also equal. In addition, the coil coarse tracking 4-142, 4-144 placed at equal distances Lc1, Lc2 from the objective lens 4-122, so that the resulting moments about the optical axis O of the lens 4-122 equal and yaw carriage is minimized. In Fig. 49B centers of force Fcoarse1 and Fcoarse2 coarse actuator shown in a vertical plane. Since these forces are aligned vertically with the center of mass of the carriage SMS (i.e., intersected by the line orthogonal radial axis equal and therefore the pitch of the carriage, which may cause deviation of the beam angle of the prism, thereby introducing bias tracking is reduced.

Drive power accurate tracking in the horizontal and vertical planes is shown in Fig.50A and 50B. Power Ftrack1 and Ftrack2 generated by the excitation coils accurate tracking 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238 in the magnetic field of permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252, centered between the pairs of coils accurate tracking 4-232, 4-234 and 4-236, 4-238 and are held horizontally in the direction of tracking. The dimensions of the coils are equal and the magnitudes of currents applied to the coils, equal, equal and therefore the magnitude of the resulting forces Ftrack1 and Ftrack2. In addition, coils accurate tracking 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238 placed at equal distances from L respect to the optical axis Of the objective lens 4-122, so the moments about the optical axis O are equal, so that the yaw of the lens holder 4-210 with lens 4-122 relative to the vertical axis is reduced. As shown in Fig.50V, the resultant force accurate tracking Ftrack acts on the center of mass CMf accurate actuator so that the pitch of the lens holder is reduced.

Fig. 51A illustrates the reaction forces Freact1 and Freact2 from the actuator accurate tracking, which act on the carriage 4-106, counteracting the si is s tips 4-244 and 4-246, posted by over the tracking coils 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238 on each side of the lens holder 4-210. As described above, the values of the forces tracking Ftrack1 and Ftrack2 equal. Additionally, the dimensions of the pole pieces 4-244, 4-246 equal, so that the generated reaction forces Freact1 and Freact2 also equal. As pole pieces 4-244 and 4-246 placed at equal distances LRfrom the optical axis O of the lens 4-122, the moments about the optical axis O are equal in magnitude, which reduces the rotation about the vertical axis or yaw. In Fig.51B report shows the resulting reaction force Freact in the vertical plane. This force acts at the center of mass CMFexact drive at a distance of LRMabove the center of mass SMS, thus on the carriage 4-106 valid point. As the distance LRMand reaction forces Freact1 and Freact2 very small, the specified time is very small and has no significant influence on the characteristics of the carriage.

Resultant forces focus Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 acting on the actuator 4-116 shown in Fig.52A. Force focus Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 centered in parts of the coil focus coil 4-230 located between the tracking coils 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238 and pole pieces 4-244, 4-246 near constant mA is of the same magnitude flows through each side of the coil 4-230 near the magnets, produce the same power Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 on the sides of the lens holder 4-210 that moves the lens holder with the lens 4-122

in the vertical direction. The coil is placed symmetrically in the hole 4-212 of the lens holder 4-210, so that the centers of power Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 are equidistant at distancesFfrom the optical axis Of the objective lens 4-122. In this configuration, the moments generated about the optical axis O of the lens 4-122 equal, which reduces the roll of the lens holder 4-210. As shown in Fig.V, when observed from the side of the carriage, power focus Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 (in the drawing Ffocus) is aligned with the center of mass SMS carriage that allows you to reduce the pitch of the carriage 4-106.

The reaction forces FFR1 and FFR2, formed in response to forces focus Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 shown in Fig.52A, shown in Fig.53A in the horizontal plane. The reaction forces FFR1 and FFR1 are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the forces focus Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 and centered near the permanent magnets 4-250, 4-252 exact drive between pole pieces 4-244, 4-246. As described above, the power of focus Ffocus1 and Ffocus2 equal, therefore, the reaction forces FFR1 and FFR2 is also equal. Furthermore, the reaction forces FFR1 and FFRFR1 and FFR2 (in the drawing FFR) is aligned with the center of mass SMS carriage, which reduces the pitch of the carriage.

Power Fflex1 and Fflex2 generated by bending the arms 4-260, 4-262, 4-264, 4-266 on the lens holder 4-210 shown in Fig.54. This forces acting on the upper arms 4-260, 4-262. It is clear that identical forces act on the lower brackets 4-262, 4-266. Power Fflex1 and Fflex2 acting on the upper arms 4-260, 4-262, centered on the transverse sections 4-280 these brackets, where they are attached to a supporting element 4-290. When the forces Fflex1 and Fflex2 act on the arms 4-260 and 4-262, the last bend in the appropriate direction to ensure accurate tracking. To maintain the arms 4-260, 4-262 in their bent state the exact drive generates reaction forces FRAand FRthat centered on the pole pieces 4-244, 4-246 on each side of the lens holder 4-210. Power Fflex1 and Fflex2 act at a distance Lflex from the optical axis Of the lens focusing 4-122, and reaction forces FRAand FRBoperate at a distance of LRAand LRBfrom the optical axis O, respectively. It is clear that the moments generated relative to the optical because these forces are effectively isolated from the carriage, except for very low frequencies (typically below 40 Hz), these forces do not affect the efficiency of the actuator under most normal operating conditions.

As described above, the carriage 4-106 has two bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-110, which are mounted slidable on the guides 4-112 and 4-114 to accommodate the carriage 4-106 next to various tracks with recording data on an optical disc. Essentially supporting surface 4-108 and 4-110 act as "springs" that hold the carriage 4-106 over the guide 4-112 and 4-114. Strength rigidity of the support "springs" Fbearing1 and Fbearing2 shown in Fig. 55A. Power Fbearing1 and Fbearing2 centered at the point of contact between the bearing surfaces 4-108 and and guide 4-110 4-112 and 4-114 and pass down through the center of the guides. As described above, the area of surface contact between the bearing surface and guide 4-108 4-112 approximately equal to the area of surface contact between the bearing surface and guide 4-110 4-114, thus, these forces rigidity Fbearing1 and Fbearing2 essentially equal. Support surfaces 4-108 and 4-110 placed at equal distances Lbearing from the optical axis O of the lens 4-122, so that the moments about the optical axis O, formed by these forces Fbearing1 and Fbea carriage Fbearing valid point between the two supports and is aligned with the optical axis O.

Friction Ffriction1A, Ffriction1B and Ffriction2 acting on the supporting surfaces 4-108, 4-110 and guide 4-112 and 4-114 shown in Fig. 56. Since the first bearing surface 4-108 has two sections 4-160 and 4-162, there are two friction Ffriction1A and Ffriction1B, each associated with a corresponding section 4-160 and 4-162, centered in the middle of the support along an area of contact with the guide 4-114. The second friction Ffriction2 acts on the second bearing surface 4-108 and centered in the middle of the support along its contact with the guide 4-112, as shown. Since the contact area of the support sections 4-160 and 4-162, forming a first bearing surface 4-110, substantially equal to the area of contact of the second support surface 4-108, and the amount of pre-load and the friction coefficient is the same for both reference surfaces, the amount of friction Ffriction1A and Ffriction1B equal to the friction force Ffriction2. Support surface 4-112 and 4-114 are located at equal distances LFfrom the optical axis Of the lens focusing 4-122 and the resulting moments about the optical axis of the lens is also equal. In the vertical plane forces Ffriction1A, Ffriction1B and Ffriction2 act on the areas of contact between the guide 4-112, 4-114 and bearing surfaces 4-108, 4-110 (Fig.V), which prepoo center of mass, determining the pitch of the carriage is reduced.

Fig. 57-60 illustrate the inertial forces acting on the carriage 4-106 and actuator 4-116 for both vertical and horizontal accelerations. Inertial forces acting on the exact drive and the carriage in response to vertical acceleration of the block shown in Fig.57. The first downward force of inertia FIF(Fig.57 and 58A) is equal to the mass of the exact drive multiplied by the acceleration acting on the center of mass CMFaccurate drive. The second downward force of inertia FIC(Fig.57 and 58W) acts at the center of mass SMS carriage and is equal to the weight of the carriage, multiplied by acceleration. Fig.58A and 58B also illustrate that the force of inertia FIFand FICaligned horizontally with the optical axis Of the objective lens 4-122.

In Fig.59A shows the inertial forces acting on the coil coarse tracking 4-142, 4-144 and pole tips exact drive 4-244, 4-246 for horizontal accelerations of the carriage and accurate drive respectively. The inertial force FIC1operates at the center of the upper part of the first part of the coil coarse tracking 4-142, and the force of inertia FIC2operates at the center of the upper part of the second coil coarse tracking 4-144. As described above, coils 4-142 and 4 the silts FIC1and FIC2equal to the mass of the corresponding coil multiplied by the acceleration, therefore, the inertial forces acting on the coils 4-142 and 4-144 equal. Since coils 4-142 and 4-144 placed at the same distance Lc from the optical axis Of the objective lens 4-122, the resulting moments about the optical axis of the lens formed by the inertia forces FIC1and FIC2equal. Similarly, since the pole pieces of the exact drive 4-244 and 4-246 have the same dimensions and are placed at equal distances LPfrom the optical axis O, the force of inertia FIC1and FIC2acting on the pole pieces equal and, therefore, equal to the resulting moments about the optical axis of the objective lens 4-122. Applying this same analysis to all other components or "subsystem" block carriage and the actuator, as will be explained in more detail below, we find that the forces of inertia generated by the horizontal and vertical accelerations above the resonance frequency of bending of the brackets are balanced and symmetric about the optical axis O. Runtestcase forces of inertia exact drive and carriage FIFand FICacting on the block in the case of horizontal accelerations are such Ob. The resultant of the inertial force due to the coarse actuator. FICequal to the mass of the coarse actuator, multiplied by the acceleration and resultant force of the inertial force due to the exact drive, FIFequal to the mass of accurate drive times acceleration.

At high frequencies, when the acceleration in the direction of tracking above the resonance frequency of the bending arms of the holder of the lens, about 40 Hz, the components of the unit 4-100 isolated and do not affect the positioning of the objective lens 4-122. Therefore, the inertial forces are different for accelerations above and below the resonance frequency of bending of the bracket. Inertial forces for horizontal accelerations at such high frequencies is shown in Fig.60A. At such high frequencies, the actuator 4-116 isolated from carriage 4-106, so that the first force of inertia FI1equal to the mass of the exact drive multiplied by the acceleration acts at the center of mass CMFaccurate drive, and the second inertial force FI2equal to the mass of the coarse actuator, multiplied by acceleration, centered at the center of mass SMS carriage.

In Fig.60V shown inertial forces in the horizontal accelerations lower than the resonance frequency of bending of the bracket. At such low frequencies, the mass of the fine is ultimoose the center of mass SMS' placed at a distance x vertically above the center of mass SMS carriage, and thus, the power of a coarse actuator Fcoarse1 and Fcoarse2 and friction forces Ffriction1 and Ffriction2 no longer aligned with the center of mass of the carriage, now shifted to the position SMS'. While there is this vertical shift in the center of mass of the carriage, the symmetrical design of the unit 4-100 ensures that the center of mass SMS carriage does not move in the horizontal plane, and the forces acting on the carriage remain symmetric about the center of mass and the optical axis O, while the vertical shift of center of mass from SMS to SMS'.

In addition, the symmetry of the design ensures that the horizontal offset of the center of mass does not occur if the component or components of the carriage unleashed at high frequencies. For example, at frequencies in the kHz range pole pieces of the exact drive 4-244, 4-246 and magnets 4-250, 4-252 will be unleashed. Due to the symmetry of the construction, however, the center of mass will not move in the horizontal plane. Because there is no shift of the center of mass SMS in the horizontal plane, the reaction forces of the focus actuator will not cause the pitch or roll of the carriage at frequencies above those at which these component parts become "connected". Thus, due to the horizontal alignment of the center of mass with opticaine affect the strength of the resonance, drive and reactions acting on the unit 4-100.

In Fig. 61A and B presents the transfer function of the position tracking depending on the drive current of the actuator 4-116 corresponding to the invention, for the objective lens by weight of 0.24 g, suspended in the exact drive with a mass of 1.9, As shown in Fig.61A, the actuator has a nearly ideal characteristics 4-310 with a slope of approximately 40 dB per decade and the ideal characteristic of the phase shift 4-312 (Fig.V). Two characteristics in dB and phase shift identified by the lines 4-310 and 4-312, respectively. In Fig.61C and 61D shows the same transfer function for the lens is offset from the center horizontally or in the direction of tracking 0.15 mm. Both shows characteristics in dB and phase shift (graphics 4-410' and 4-412') respectively detect disturbances or emissions arising from the 3.2 kHz. A phase margin drops to approximately 25oreducing the damping circuit and increasing the setup time and the overshoot. For positioning lenses this means that the horizontal shift in position of the lens breaks the symmetry or balance of forces accurate tracking, acting on the lens, and leads to the appearance of the point relative to the optical OS is Ino the optical axis Of the objective lens 4-122 improved positioning and tracking.

Fig.A-C illustrate the impact of asymmetric forces focus, acting on the unit 4-100. In Fig.A presents the signal tracking in the form of a line graph 4-320, when crossing tracks, for step track 1.5 μm, and each sine wave corresponds to the information track on the surface of the optical disc. In Fig.V the power of focus is centered at the center of mass CMf exact drive and on the optical axis O. the Upper graph 4-322 shows the current applied to the focusing coil in operation, and the lower graph 4-324 shows the error signal tracking when tracking a specific track, for the current focus of 0.1 And acceleration and focusing of 0.75 m/s2. As shown, the error signal of the tracking visibly unaffected by the level of current focus. In Fig. S shows the impact on current and signal focusing errors, as in Fig.V, if the focus is shifted from a state of alignment with the optical axis O and the center of mass CMf approximately 0.2 mm, the Corresponding curves are shown as graphs 4-422' and 4-424', respectively. Signal training now explicitly affected by the current focus. At the same current focusing and accelerating the resulting offset of the tracking of 0.022 m In a typical case, the full allowable offset Copacabana in Fig.V, you can significantly reduce the offset of the tracking.

Alternative block carriage and the actuator 4-400, in which the center of mass of 2D actuator coincides with the center of mass of the carriage shown in Fig. 63. In addition to the symmetry about the optical axis of the objective lens, the exact center of mass of the actuator coincides with the center of mass of the carriage and aligned with the optical axis. The block carriage and the actuator 4-100 in the first embodiment is suitable for most frequency bands. Block 4-400, appropriate alternative implementation of the invention, however, can be used in systems where it is desirable to avoid shifting of the center of mass of the carriage at frequencies below the resonance frequency of bending of the brackets.

Block 4-400 contains the carriage 4-406 having first and second support surfaces 4-408 and 4-410, substantially identical to those used in the unit 4-100, which may be slidable mounted on rails (not shown), and a 2D actuator 4-416 mounted on the carriage 4-406. The carriage 4-406 comprises a pair of coils coarse tracking 4-412 and 4-414 placed in the proper cutouts 4-417 and 4-418 made in the carriage 4-406 near the support surfaces 4-408 and 4-410, which moves the carriage 4-406 displacement of the optical disk.

The actuator 4-416 contains the lens holder 4-420 with a pre-installed lens 4-422. A pair of protrusions 4-424 on the upper surface of the carriage 4-406 support a pair of upper brackets 4-426 attached to the upper surfaces of the pair of protrusions 4-428 on the lens holder 4-420. A pair of lower brackets 4-429, identical in structure to the upper brackets 4-426, supported by the relevant tabs at the bottom of the carriage (not shown) and attached to the lower surfaces of the projections 4-428 holder lens 4-420. The light beam 4-430 is supplied to the actuator 4-416 through the oval aperture 4-432 and is reflected by a mirror (not shown) placed inside the actuator 4-416, through the objective lens 4-422 along the optical axis O'. The actuator 4-416 also attached to the focus actuator and accurate tracking, which moves the lens 4-422 to ensure accurate alignment and focusing of the output beam to the desired position on the surface of the optical disc. The focus actuator and accurate tracking contains two permanent magnet 4-440 and 4-442 attached to opposite ends of the lens holder 4-420. Oval coil precise tracking 4-444 attached to each permanent magnet 4-440 and 4-442 at anchor and 4-406 and supported by the protrusions, educated inside the carriage, so that the lens holder 4-420 is located between the focusing coils 4-448.

Moving coarse tracking carriage 4-406 and actuator 4-416 is similar to that described for the unit 4-100 in Fig.46 and 47. If the current applied to the coils coarse tracking 4-412 and 4-414 in the presence of a magnetic field, according to the law, the Lorentz force is generated that moves the carriage 4-406 and actuator 4-416 in the direction of tracking (Fig.65) for positioning the objective lens 4-422 next to different information tracks on the optical disk.

Fig. 64 illustrates the principle of operation of the actuator 4-416 move the lens holder 4-420 and objective lens 4-422 in the direction of focus. When the focusing coils generates a current in each coil is induced by the electromagnetic field 4-450. Electromagnetic field 4-450 different direction for the respective focusing coils. In the example shown, both the permanent magnet 4-440 and 4-442 will be attracted by the lower coil focus 4-448 (not shown) and push off the top coil of the focus 4-448, thereby moving the lens holder lens 4-420 to the bottom coil of the focus 4-448 yoke disk, moreover, the magnitude of the offset depends on the intensity of the induced magnetic field.

Similarly, Fig.65 illustrates the interaction of permanent magnets 4-440 and 4-442 with coils accurate tracking 4-444. The excitation of these coils moves the lens holder 4-420 horizontally in the direction of tracking to the right or left, depending on the current direction in the coils. For example, shown in the drawing, the magnetic field 4-460 holder lens 4-420 with lens 4-422 moved to the left. Thus, coils accurate tracking 4-444 ensure accurate positioning of the light beam emerging from the objective lens 4-422 in the center of the desired information track on the optical disk.

In the following discussion, the same force and length correspond to those mentioned for unit 4-100. For convenience, the description will use the symbol "'" when discussing the corresponding values when referring to Fig.46, 49B, 50A, 51A-53A, 55A, 56A, 58A and 58B, used when discussing the forces and lengths related to the unit 4-100.

As described above, the actuator coarse tracking is the same as the corresponding actuator unit 4-100. Coil coarse tracking 4-412 and 4-414 have identical dimensions and are placed at equal distances from the op is Fcoarse2' (Fig.46), acting on the carriage 4-406, are at equal distances Lc1' and Lc2' (Fig.49B) from the optical axis O'. In the vertical plane in the radial direction, these forces combined with coincident centers of gravity, respectively, of the exact mass of the actuator SMF' (Fig.58A) and the mass of the carriage SMS' (Fig.58B), which minimizes the pitch of the carriage and the actuator. Similarly, the supporting surface 4-408 and 4-410 placed at equal distances from the optical axis O', so that the force of the suspension carriage also symmetric about this axis. Each of the forces Fbearing1' and Fbearing2' (Fig.55A) are at the same distance Lbearing1' so formed relative to the optical axis moments are equal and the pitch of the carriage and the actuator further reduced. The surface area of the supports in contact with the guides, essentially equal, so that the friction force acting on the carriage 4-406, also equal. Since the reference surface 4-408 and 4-410 placed equidistant from the optical axis O', the moments relative to the axis equal, which reduces the lateral movement of the carriage and the actuator. The unit is designed so that the friction force is vertically aligned with the center of mass of the carriage 4-406 and actuator 4-416.

Coil current to the actuator; equal. In addition, the coil 4-444 placed at equal distances LT' (Fig.50A) from the optical axis O', so that the moments relative to the axis are equal. In the vertical plane, these forces Ftrack1' and Ftrack2' (Fig.50A) is aligned with the centers of gravity of the actuator 4-416 and carriage 4-406, so that the pitch actuator 4-416 reduced. As the forces of accurate tracking, acting on the block are equal, the reaction forces Freact1' and Freact2' (Fig. 51A) formed in response to the force tracking Ftrack1' and Ftrack2' are also equal. These reaction forces are at equal distances LR'from the optical axis and vertically aligned with the centers of gravity, so that the moments about the optical axis O' is equal and yaw reduced.

Similarly, the focusing coil 4-448 have essentially the same dimensions and attached currents form of the same strength Ffocus1' and Ffocus2' acting on the actuator. In this device, the focusing coil 4-448 placed at equal distances LF' (Fig.56A) from the coincident centers of gravity of the exact mass of the actuator and the mass of the carriage, so that the moments about the optical axis O' are equal. Furthermore, since the power of focus Ffocus1' and Ffocus2' (Fig.52A) is equal to the reaction force of the focus FFR1' and FFR2' from the coincident centers of gravity of the mass of the carriage SMS' and the exact mass of the actuator SMF'. Thus the moments generated by the reaction with respect to the optical axis O', equals and the pitch actuator is additionally reduced.

Flexural strength Fflex1', Fflex2' acting on the actuator, and the reaction forces of the exact drive FRA', FR'generated in response to bending forces, essentially the same as shown in Fig.54 for the unit 4-100. As the forces of bending and the response is not symmetric about the optical axis O', the moments generated by these pairs of forces with respect to the axis Of' not equal. These forces, however, effectively isolated from carriage 4-406, except for the lower frequencies (typically below 40 Hz), so that these moments do not impair the characteristics of the actuator under most operating conditions.

Thus, the drive power and reactions acting on the block 4-400, symmetrical about the optical axis O' and aligned vertically with the centers of gravity of the exact mass of the actuator SMF'and mass of the carriage SMS'. Since the centers of gravity of the exact mass of the actuator and the mass of the carriage are the same, the outcome of the actuator 4-416 or any sub block 4-400 will not shift the center of mass, and the forces and moments acting on the block 4-400, will remain uravnovesena the prism system

In Fig.66 shows a known optical system 5-100 containing the light source 5-102, forming the incident light beam 5-106, shown dotted, simple anamorphically the prism 5-108, the focusing lens 5-110 and optical media 5-112. Light beam 5-106 enters the prism 5-108 at an angle of incidence 5-114 relative to the normal to the input face 5-116 prism. The laser light source typically generates an elliptical beam with some degree of astigmatism, as is well known in the prior art. Anamorphically prism 5-108 provides stretching along the minor axis of the ellipse, adjusting the ellipticity of the beam. The angle of incidence 5-114 is chosen to provide the desired tension along the minor axis. Anamorphically prism 5-108 can also correct astigmatism in the incident light beam 5-106. Lens 5-110 focuses the resulting adjusted beam 5-118 with the formation of spots 5-120mm optical media.

Simple prism 5-108 adequate, while the wavelength of the incident light beam is kept constant. In practice, however, the light source typically changes the wavelength due to temperature changes, shifts of power, random leaps mod" and other conditions, as is well known from the preceding is a match between the power level, required for write operations, and the power level required for read operations.

The angle of refraction of light at the junction of the two materials is calculated according to the law of Snella:

n1 sin1 = n2 sin2,

where n1 is the refractive index of material 1;

1 - the angle of incidence relative to the normal;

n2 is the refractive index of material 2;

2 - the angle of refraction relative to normals.

This ratio determines the refraction of a light beam 5-106 included in the prism 5-108. As shown in Fig.66, when the incident beam is 5-106 with one wavelength included in anamorphically the prism 5-108, the beam is refracted at a given angle determined by the refractive index of the prism 5-108 and the angle of incidence 5-114 light beam 5-106. The resulting light beam, corrected for ellipticity and, possibly, the astigmatism of the incident beam 5-106, enters the focusing lens 5-110 and form a focused light spot 5-120mm optical media 5-112. The refractive index, however, change with wavelength. This phenomenon is known as chromatic aberration. Accordingly, when the wavelength of the incident light beam 5-106 changes, the angle of refraction caused by junction 6 the dashed line shows the effect of shifting the wavelength of the incident beam 5-106. The incident light beam 5-106 is refracted at a different angle, and generates the light beam 5-122, which is the focusing lens 5-110 a different angle with the formation of the focused beam 5-124 on optical media. As shown in Fig.66, the light spot 5-124 shifted relative to the 5-120mm spots. This shift resulting from the variation of the wavelength of the incident light beam, referred to as lateral displacement of the beam.

Lateral displacement of the beam can be avoided by abandoning anamorphically prism 5-108. For example, the system can use a circular prism to provide a circular spot on the optical media. When forming a circular beam by means of a lens, but the lens only focuses circular aperture within the elliptical light beam. This leads to inefficient use of the laser power, as part of the light beam outside the circular aperture is lost. Accordingly, a system that does not use anamorphically the prism for beam shaping, not able to take advantage of the adjustment of the prisms of the ellipticity and astigmatism of the incident light beam. The possibilities for beam shaping, provide anamorphically prism, posvecivanje use power preferably, in particular, in systems with optical disks, when increasing the power level required for writing to disk.

In Fig. 67 shows a typical configuration of the multi-element prism system 5-130, well known from the prior art. The system consists of three prismatic elements: prisms 5-132, prisms 5-134 and prism 5-136, focusing lens 5-138 and optical environment 5-140 reflective type. The prism system 5-130 can be designed achromatic by choosing the geometric ratios for individual prisms, refractive indices and dispersions for prisms 5-132, 5-134 and 5-136.

The prism system 5-130 shown in Fig.67 also provides a reverse reflection beam from the optical media 5-140 to the detection system 5-144 due to the inclusion of sitaramayya thin film 5-146 between the prism 5-134 and prism 5-136.

As shown in Fig.67, the input light beam 5-148 passes through the prism 5-132, 5-134 and 5-136 and then focused by the lens 5-138 with the formation of spots 5-137 on optical media 5-140. Light beam 5-148 reflected from the optical media 5-140 back through the focusing lens 5-138 in the prism 5-136 and is reflected from the thin film 5-146 in the form of a light beam 5-150. Light beam 5-1 in the wavelength of the input light beam 5-148 will not cause lateral displacement of the focused light beam 5-137 on optical media 5-140.

As explained above, the optical system may be preferable to use more than one detector. The prism system with an air gap in the path of the passing light beam can provide significant advantages, in particular, providing a compact, achromatic prism system capable of reflecting part of the incident and return beams to multiple detectors. In addition, through the use of air space of symmetric adjustment prism can be added to an existing anamorphically prismatic system. And finally, a single prism system with the air gap will effectively ensure the stability, compactness, ease of fabrication and installation of the unit prisms.

For a more detailed explanation of the construction of an achromatic prism system with an air gap between the prisms, reference will be made to Fig.68, which shows a two-element prism system 5-152 with chromatic correction prism 5-154 added to a simple anamorphically prism 5-156. Corrective prism 5-154 has a refractive index n1, and a simple anamorphically prism 5-156 has a refractive index n2 at the selected wavelength is the incident beam and the output beam , where

= 1+air(a7++2),

and a7 can be computed by repeated application of the law of Snella and geometric inequalities for triangles.

Planning conditions selected to provide the desired result (i.e., full deviation in the system). For example, to design an achromatic system condition is that the angle must be constant in a certain range of wavelengths.

For full angle desired deviation, = A, between the input beam and the output beam, this condition is satisfied as follows:

A = 1+air(a7++2)

In addition, the condition, consisting in the fact that the corrective prism 5-154 is a symmetric prism, in the absence of the resultant stretching of the incident light beam, so that it can be added to a simple anamorphically prism 5-156, as shown in Fig.68, is as follows:

= sin-1[n1*sin(1/2)]

When you select this condition, the correcting prism 5-154 does not stretch the incident light beam. Corrective prism so it can be added to an existing anamorphically prism system selected for proper stretching.

Finally, the unit prisms 5-152 can meet all the requirement is>In some cases it may be desirable that the emerging beam had a significant angular deviation of the incident beam. For example, the deviation of the 90omay be preferred. This can be accomplished by providing total internal reflection in the prism 5-156 before exiting beam from the prism. This changes the above calculated ratios, but the design goals can be met through appropriate choice of parameters.

Applying the above principles additions symmetrical adjustment of the prism to an existing anamorphically prism was designed prism system with multiple surfaces for partial reflection of the backward beam to different detectors. Below are examples of complete unitary achromatic prism system with an air gap, characterized by large angular deviations between the input and output beams and providing a lot of reflection to various detection systems.

In Fig.69 shows an example of performing anamorphically achromatic prism system 5-170 with an air gap corresponding to the invention. Preferably the prism system 5-170 has three prisms, include the 70 is mounted as a single unit. Because the prisms are connected, you do not need to install them separately in the optical system. This reduces installation time, increases stability, reduces installation costs and minimizes functional deviations between different optical systems. Three prism elements are plate prism 5-172, trapezoidal prism 5-174 and corrective prism 5-176. In Fig.69 also shows the path of the light beam as the light beam 5-178 from the light source 5-102, the light beam 5-180 in the air gap, the output/reflected light beam 5-182, the light beam 5-184 channel of the first detector, the first detector 5-185, the light beam 5-186 channel of the second detector to the second detector and 5-187 light beam 5-188 channel of the third detector, the third detector 5-189. Due to the inclusion of an air gap between the corrective lens 5-176 plate and the prism 5-172, through which passes the light beam 5-180 air gap adjustment prism 5-176 can be designed as symmetrical offset at zero resultant stretching of the incident beam 5-178. Therefore, the correcting prism 5-176 can be added to the prism plate 5-172 and keystone p is at 5-190, ensures focusing the output light beam 5-182 on the media 5-191. Describes the characteristics of the system shown in Fig. 69, designed essentially achromatic calculated for the wavelength of 785 +/-22 nm. At this wavelength, the system has the properties described below.

Plate prism 5-172 shown in detail in Fig.70, 70A and 70 V. In Fig. 70 shows a side view of the plate prism 5-172, Fig.70A is a bottom view illustrating the surface S1 5-200, and Fig.70 V - top view illustrating the surface S2 5-202. Plate prism has an optical surface S1 5-200, the optical surface S2 5-202, the optical surface S3 5-204, the surface S4 5-206 and the surface S5 5-208. In one embodiment, the surface S1 5-200 and S2 5-202 essentially parallel and spaced at a distance 5-210. In this embodiment, the distance 5-210 is 6,27 mm Surface S5 5-208 and S3 5-204 also essentially parallel. The surface S1 5-200 and S3 5-204 intersect along an edge 5-211 (edge S1/S2) angle 5-212 (angle S1/S2), preferably at an angle equal to 50o21'+/-10'. The surface S3 5-204 and S2 5-202 intersect along an edge 5-214; surface S2 5-202 and S4 5-206 intersect along an edge 5-216; surface S4 5-206 and S5 5-208 intersect along an edge 5-218; surface S5 5-208 and S1 5-200 intersect along an edge of the 5 - and width 5-224 equal to 8.0 mm. The total length of the prism, indicated 5-225 in Fig.70, from ribs 5-218 to ribs 5-211, measured parallel to the surface S1 5-200, preferably equal 23,61 mm Distance from edge 5-218 to ribs 5-220 marked 5-227, measured along the reference plane 5-226 defined by the perpendicular to the surface S1 5-200 and S2 5-202, preferably equal to 2.14 mm top View in Fig.70A shows unobscured opening 5-230 and unshaded opening 5-232 defined on the surface S1 5-200. Unshaded opening is the area of the surface of the prism within which the surface has a certain quality. In this example, unobscured disclose customer 5-230 and 5-232 are ovals dimensions 8.5 mm 6.5 mm, Preferably aperture 5-230 centered its minor axis at a distance 5-233 from ribs 5-211, and its major axis is in the middle of the surface S1 5-200. Unshaded opening 5-232 centered the minor axis at a distance 5-234 from ribs 5-220 and the major axis is along the middle surface S1 5-200. Preferably the distance 5-233 equal to x 6.15 mm, and the distance 5-234 is 5,30 mm

Top view shown in Fig.70 V, illustrates the unshaded opening 5-235 on the surface S2 5-202. In this example, unobscured opening is defined as an oval with dimensions of 8.5 mm to 6.5 mm, with its small asfig.70 V.

In this example, the distance 5-236 equal to 5.2 mm Unobscured disclose customer 5-230, 5-232 and 5-235 define side surfaces, in which the quality of the surface is preferably defined at least as 40/20, as is well known in the prior art. In this example, as the optical material of the prism 5-172 selected annealed glass VC class A.

In Fig. 71 presents a trapezoidal prism 5-174 for the device of Fig. 69. Trapezoidal prism 5-174 has an optical surface S6 5-240, the optical surface S7 5-242, the optical surface S8 5-244, the optical surface S9 5-246. Surface S6 5-240, S7 5-242 intersect along an edge 5-248. Surface S7 5-244, S8 5-244 intersect along an edge 5-250 angle 5-251. Angle 5-251 preferably equal to 135o. The surface S8 5-244, S9 5-246 intersect along an edge 5-252 angle 5-254, preferably 50o21'. Surface S9 5-246, S6 5-240 intersect along an edge 5-256. The surface S6 5-240 has a length 5-258, preferably equal to 9.5 mm, the Surface S65-240 and the surface S8 5-244 essentially parallel and spaced at a distance 5-260, preferably equal to 8.0 mm, measured in the direction perpendicular to the surface S6 5-240 and surface S8 5-244. Ribs 5-250 and 5-248 separated by distance 5-261 along the square is redstapler top view of a trapezoidal prism 5-174, illustrating the surface S6 5-240 and the surface S9 5-246. Trapezoidal prism 5-174 has a thickness 5-263, preferably equal to 8 mm As shown in Fig. 71A, the surface S6 5-240 has unobscured opening 5-264, preferably representing a circular aperture with a diameter of 6.5 mm, centered on the width of the surface and at a distance 5-265 from ribs 5-248. Preferably the distance 5-265 equal to 4.0 mm Surface S9 5-246 has a circular aperture 5-266, centered on the surface, preferably defined as an oval dimensions 6.5 mm 8.5 mm

In Fig.V presents a bottom view of a trapezoidal prism 5-174 illustrating the surface S7 5-242 and surface S8 5-244 with highlighted disclose customer 5-268 and 5-270. Trapezoidal prism 5-174 has a length 5-272 from ribs 5-252 to ribs 5-248, measured along the reference plane 5-262. Preferably the length 5-272 is 16,13 mm. In one embodiment, the unshaded opening 5-268 for surface S7 5-242 is defined as the oval dimensions 6.5 mm 9.2 mm, centered on the surface S7 5-242 its minor axis parallel to and centrally between the ribs 5-248 and 5-250. Preferably, unobscured aperture 5-270 is an oval dimensions 6.5 mm 6.7 mm, centered on the surface S8 5-244, its major axis of center is, -266, 5-268 and 5-270 is defined as 40/20, as is known from the prior art.

Many of the surfaces of the prisms is coated to facilitate the functioning of the prisms. In this embodiment, the surface S6 5-240 has an antireflective coating with a transmittance greater than or equal to 99.9% at an angle of incidence 90o+/-0,5o. The surface S8 5-244 is coated with a transmittance greater than or equal to 98.5% at an angle of incidence of 10.7o+/-0,5ofor domestic incident light. Surface S9 5-246 has a thin film coating with a low attenuation of the reflected s-polarization state (Rs) (i.e., normal to the plane of incidence) more than 90% and reflected p-polarization state (Rp)=12,5% +/-2/5% at an angle of incidence of the 39o39' +/- 0,5o. The material for the trapezoidal prism 5-174 in this embodiment, shown in Fig.69, 71-V represents annealed optical glass VC class A.

Chromatic correction prism 5-176 in the embodiment, the prism system 5-170 in Fig.69 presented in more detail in Fig.72 and 72A. As shown, the chromatic correcting prism 5-176 has an optical surface S10 5-290, the optical surface S11 5-292 and surface S12 5-294, forming a triangular prism. Surface S11 5-292, S12 5-294 perusek, S11 5-292 symmetric. The surface S12 5-294 has a length of 5 are 300, equal in this example 7,78 mm Thus, ribs 5-296 and 5-298 spaced at a distance of 5 are 300. Surface S10 5-290, S11 5-292 are approaching each other at an angle 5-302, preferably equal to the 38o20'. Surface S11 5-292 and S10 5-290 end at a distance 5-303 from the surface S12 5-294, measured perpendicular to the surface S12 5-294, preferably equal to 10.5 mm

In Fig. 72A shows the surface S10 5-290. Prism 5-176 has a thickness 5-304, preferably equal to 8.0 mm Surface S10 5-290 has unshaded oval opening 5-306, centered major axis parallel to the intersection 5-298 distance 5-308 from him. The minor axis is centered on the surface S10 5-290, as shown. Preferably, unobscured opening 5-306 defined as an oval dimensions 6.5 mm to 2.8 mm, and the surface quality of the aperture 5-306 defined as 40/20. The surface S11 5-292 also has similar unobscured revealing.

As for the trapezoidal prism 5-174, chromatic correction prism 5-176 has a coating on some surfaces. In one embodiment, the surface S10 5-290 and S11 5-292 have antireflective coating (reflectivity is less than or equal to 3% at an angle of incidence of 35.5o+/-1,0Oresme assembled into a single prism system 5-170 (Fig.69), light beams are reflected, as shown and explained below for a wavelength of 785 +/-22 nm. For the purposes of the description reference plane 5-237 defined along one side of the prism system 5-170 (Fig.69A). The incident beam is 5-178 from the light source 5-102 falls on the surface S10 5-290 at an angle of incidence 5-326 parallel to the reference plane 5-237.

Light beam 5-178 exits the prism 5-176 in the air gap in the form of a light beam 5-180 and enters the prism 5-172 through the surface S2 5-202. Part of the light beam is reflected from a thin film on the surface S9 5-246 and exits through the surface S3 5-204 in the form of a light beam 5-188. In one device the beam 5-178 may be directed to the detection system 5-189. So the reflected beam is a part of the input beam, the detection system 5-189 receiving the light beam 5-188, can control the intensity of the incident light beam. The remainder of the light beam that is not reflected from the thin film on the surface S9 5-246 is trapezoidal prism 5-174, internally reflected at the surface S7 5-242 and comes out in the form of a light beam 5-182 through the surface S6 5-240.

In the described example, if the angle of incidence 5-326 light beam 5-178 equal 35o26', the light beam by' +/-5', parallel to the reference plane 5-237 within tolerance 5' and the light beam 5-182 extends normal to the surface S6 5-240 within tolerance 5'.

Lens 5-190 focuses the light beam 5-182 on optical media 5-191. The light beam is reflected back through the lens and is normal to the surface S6 5-240, internally reflected at the surface S7 5-242 and is then reflected on a thin film between the trapezoidal prism 5-174 plate and the prism 5-172. The resulting beam exits trapezoidal prism 5-174 through the surface S8 5-244 in the form of a light beam 5-184 with angle 5-328. Light beam 5-184 enters the first detector 5-185.

Part of the light beam returned from the optical media 5-190, also passes through the thin film is reflected on the surface S2 5-202 and emerges from the prism plate 5-172 in the form of a light beam 5-186. This reflection is caused by an air gap in the prism system. In one embodiment, the light beam 5-184 and the light beam 5-186 can be directed to a separate detection system, 5-185, and 5-187 respectively. For example, the detection system 5-185 can receive the data signals and the detection system 5-187 - control signals (i.e., information about the focus and tracking).

The results of mathematical modeling of the characteristics of prism system 5-170 for changes in wavelength from 780 to 785 nm are presented in table.A. Here Phi is the angle of incidence corrective lens (in this case 35o26'), and its variance is estimated as +/-0,5o. Shear waves are presented in a single column, and the corresponding shift of the focused beam from the prism system are presented in the columns for incidence angles Phi +/-0,5o. For example, as shown in the first row of the table.And, for shifting the wavelength of the incident light beam of 780 - 781,5 nm focused spot is shifted by 0.2 nm for an angle of incidence of Phi, 2.6 nm for an angle of incidence of Phi-0,5oand -2,9 nm for an angle of incidence of Phi+0,5o.

As can be seen from the table.A, lateral displacement at an angle of incidence Phi changes less than 1 nm to shift the wavelength from 780 to 783 nm with the change of angle Phi. This contrasts with a lateral offset of about 200 nm to shift the wavelength 3 nm in the device, such as described, but without chromatic correction. This result indicates STO of the present invention. This device has a corrective prism 5-340, the prism plate 5-342 and a quadrangular prism 5-344. Corrective prism 5-340 plate and prism 5-342 correspond to the correction prism 5-136 plate and the prism 5-172 prism system 5-170 (Fig.69). Quadrangular prism 5-344, however, differs from the trapezoidal prism 5-344.

Quadrangular prism 5-344 more detail is shown in Fig.74, A and B. It has a surface S13 5-346, S14 5-348, S15 5-350 and S16 5-353, which are similar but not identical to the surfaces S6 5-240, S7 5-242, S8 5-244 and S9 5-246 trapezoidal prism 5-174. Surface S13 5-346 and S14 5-348 intersect along an edge 5-353 angle 5-354; surface S14 5-348 and S15 5-350 intersect along an edge 5-355 angle 5-356, the surface S15 5-350 and S16 5-352 intersect along an edge 5-357 angle 5-358, and the surface S16 5-352 and S13 5-346 intersect along an edge 5-349. In one embodiment, the angle 5-354 is 49o40', angle 5-356 equal 135oand angle 5-358 50o21'. The distance between the ribs 5-353 and 5-355, measured perpendicular to the surface S15 5-350 indicated in Fig.74 as 5-360 and preferably equal to 8.0 mm, the Distance between the ribs 5-353 and 5-359 marked 5-362 and preferably equal to 8.9 mm when measured parallel to the surface S15 5-350 and, finally, the distance between the Rebbe what UPE 8,0 mm

In Fig. A presents a top view of the surface S13 5-346 and surface S16 5-352. The thickness of the prism 5-344 marked 5-368, preferably equal to 8.0 mm prism 5-344 has unobscured opening 5-370 on the surface S13 5-346 and unshaded opening 5-372 on the surface S16 5-352, as shown in Fig. 74 A. In the preferred embodiment, unobscured opening 5-370 is a circular aperture centered on a given surface at a distance 5-374 from ribs 5-353. In one embodiment, the unshaded opening 5-370 is a circular aperture with a minimum diameter of 6.5 mm, and the distance 5-374 equal to 4.0 mm, Preferably surface S16 5-352 also has unobscured opening 5-372, centered on the specified surface. In one embodiment, the unshaded opening 5-372 is oval, size 6.5 mm to 8.5 mm, centered on the surface S16 5-352, as shown in Fig.A.

In Fig. V presents a top view of the surface S14 5-348 and surface S15 5-350. The total length of the prism 5-344 from ribs 5-353 to ribs 5-357, measured along a plane parallel to the surface S15 5-350 marked 5-380 and preferably equal 16,13 mm As shown in Fig.V, the surface S14 5-348 has unobscured opening 5-382, centered on the specified surface and reveal an oval dimensions 6.5 mm 9.2 mm, and expanding 5-384 oval dimensions 6.5 mm 6.7 mm

Preferably quadrangular prism 5-344 also has a coating on some optical surfaces. In one embodiment, the surface S13 5-346 has a coating with a reflectivity less than or equal to 0.2% at an angle of incidence 4o40' +/-5' relatively normal for internally incident light. In the same embodiment, the surface S15 5-350 has a coating with a reflectivity less than or equal to 0.5% at an angle of incidence of 10.7 +/-0,5orelatively normal for internally incident light. The surface S16 5-352 preferably has a thin film coating with Rs>90%, Rp=12,5% +/-2,5% at an angle of incidence of the 39o39' +/-0,5orelatively normal. Preferably the thin film coating has a phase shift of less than 8ofor all operating conditions and optical parameters.

For the configuration shown in Fig.74, the angular deviation between the input and output beams is preferably 90o. This simplifies manufacture, since the mounting components for the variance of the 90oimplement simpler than for deviations 87oas in the device according to Fig.69. For sizes and coatings in the device according to Fig.73 prism is not perfectly achromatic, however, it I.

The results of mathematical modeling of the characteristics of prism system 5-339 in Fig.73 for changes in wavelength from 780 to 785 nm are given in table.B. Again the angle Phi is equal to 35o26'.

You can see that the device according to Fig.73 is not achromatic, as the device according to Fig.69. To shift the wavelength from 780 to 783 nm, however, lateral displacement of the focused spot of the light beam emerging from the prism is just a 19.6 nm. Again this contrasts with a lateral offset of about 200 nm to shift the wavelength 3 nm in the device, such as those described above, but without chromatic correction.

Search data transition detection

Detailed description of the system of storing and retrieving data in a magneto-optical device provided in the related application cep. 07/964518 dated January 25, 1993, is shown here for reference.

A block diagram of an example of a magneto-optical system shown in Fig.75. The system can include a read mode and write mode. In write mode, the data source 6-10 transmits the data to the encoder 6-12. Encoder 6-12 converts the data into binary code bits, which are transmitted by the pulse generator 6-14 laser, where the code bits can be transformed into a stimulating pulse to start the stimulated duration, regardless of the combination of code bits and the code bits "0" - no pulse start laser in this interval. Depending on the specific laser and the type of the optical media, the efficiency may be improved by adjusting the relative moments of emergence of the laser pulse or stretching or other alignment pulse duration. In response to the pulse start laser 6-16 heats a localized area on the media 6-18, thereby exhibiting these optical media 6-18 relative to the magnetic flux, which records the polarity of the magnetic material on optical media 6-18. In local areas, usually called "patami", is the memorization of the encoded data in the form of magnetization as long as they will not be erased.

In the reading mode the laser beam or other light source is reflected from the surface of the optical media 6-18. The reflected laser beam has a polarization that is dependent on the polarity of the magnetized surface of the optical media 6-18. The reflected laser beam is supplied to an optical reading device 6-20, which passes the input signal or the signal read by the signal processor 6-22 for a transformation of the form ugodnog the decoder 6-24. The decoder converts the encoded data into its original form and transmits the decoded data to port output data 6-26 for transmission or other processing if necessary.

In Fig.76 presents in more detail the procedure of storing and retrieving data using the format GCR 8/9 code. For GCR 8/9 code element 6-28 (Fig. 76A) is defined as one channel bit. Each clock period 6-42 corresponds to a channel bit; thus, the elements 6-30 - 6-41 meet every one clock period 6-42 clock signal 6: 45 a.m. For example, for a 3 1/2" optical disc rotating with a speed of 2400 revolutions per minute, when the memory capacity of 256 MB clock period 6-42 in a typical case will be 63 NS or clock frequency is equal 15,879 MHz. The output signal GCR code 6-47 encoded output data from the encoder 6-12 (Fig.75). Input GCR signal 6-47 corresponds to the characteristic channel sequence "010001110101". Pulse generator 6-14 laser uses GCR signal 6-47 to obtain pulse GCR signal 6-65 (Fig.76 not adjusted for time or duration to improve performance for a specific combination of data). In General GCR-pulses 6-67 - 6-78 occur with a clock intervals, if GR signal data 6-47 the ima is osites reverses the polarity in the presence of an external magnetic field of opposite polarity with respect to Sertoma media and when the pulse starts, laser energy, sufficient to exceed the Curie temperature on the media. The laser pulses are obtained using GCR-pulse 6-68, 6-69, 6-70, and so on, create a combination of recorded bits 6-80 on optical media 6-18. Therefore, the recorded bits 6-82 - 6-88 correspond to the pulses 6-68, 6-69, 6-70, 6-71, 6-73, 6-76 and 6-77.

Consistently recorded pita 6-82 - 6-85 can merge together, effectively creating an elongated pit. Elongated pit has a leading edge corresponding to the leading edge of the first recorded Pete 6-82, and falling edge corresponding to the trailing edge of the last recorded Pete 6-85.

Reading the recorded pits using an optical device such as a laser, generates the playback signal 6-90. The playback signal 6-90 has a low level in the absence of recorded bits. At the time of the leading edge Pete 6-86 the playback signal 6-90 will increase and remain at a high level until the trailing edge of Pete 6-86, at this point, the playback signal 6-90 would subside and remain low until the next Pete 6-87.

The above procedure can be defined as a pulse-width modulation, as the pulse duration of the playback signal 6-90 Lin pulse signal playback 6-90, provide accurate information about the data. If the playback signal 6-90 to differentiate the peaks of the first derivative signal will correspond to the edges of the recorded pits 6-80. Signal peaks of the first derivative of the playback signal will be only slightly offset from the edges of the recorded pits 6-80, as the playback signal 6-90 shown as an ideal playback signal. To restore information corresponding to the edges of the pit, from the signal of the first derivative, you must protectivity its peaks. This process is discussed below in detail.

In contrast, most existing systems with RLL 2,7-code used in conjunction with modulation pulse position. In systems with modulation pulse position of each pit represents "1" and the absence of Pete is "0". The distance between patami represents the distance between the individual bits. The center of each pit corresponds to the location of the data item. To find the center of Pete the playback signal is differentiated and detected zero crossing of the first derivative. This method can be contrasted with systems with pulse-width modulation, as described above, in which the peaks of the signal is to be pulse-width modulation instead of the modulation on the position of the pulses in the RLL system, such as system RLL 2,7-code. Each channel bits may correspond to a clock period of the clock signal. As in the GCR system described previously using pulse-width modulation, "1" can be represented by transitions in the input signal. Thus, the input signal RLL 2,7 can remain in the same state until 0 is displayed, and changes the state from high to low or from low to high at occurrence of "1".

As in the case of RLL code, and in the case of GCR code and other codes, when reading combinations of the input data signal generated by the optical reading device 6-20, often asymmetrical. When a single signal is transmitted between the circuits with isolated AC current, the average value of the DC component is offset from the midpoint between the peaks. Such unintentional shift from the mid-point may lead to a shift in the apparent position data, negatively affect the ability to accurately determine the positions of the data and to reduce the stock on time or make the recorded data unrecoverable. This phenomenon can be explained with reference to Fig. 77A, B, which presents an ideal input signal S1 obtained from the symmetric comb the mi of the input signal. In Fig.77A can be seen that the areas A1 and A2 above and below the mid-point Mr1 between the peaks of the input signal S1 is equal to, and transitions between "1" and "0" correspond exactly (perfect system) intersections of the input signal S1 to the middle point of Mr1 between the peaks.

In Fig. V, in contrast, shows an input signal S2 obtained from the asymmetric combinations of data. You can see that the area A1' above the mid-point MP2 between the peaks is larger than the area A2' in the lower part of the graph. The input signal S2 therefore has a constant component, which shifts the baseline level of the DC component DCbase above the mid-point MP2 between the peaks. If you want to define transitions between "1" and "0" by detecting zero crossings isolated AC current input signal S2, then there may be errors due to the fact that the level of the DC component is not identical to the mid-point MP2 between the peaks. The level of the DC component does not remain constant, but increases and decreases depending on the properties of the input signal. The greater the increase in the permanent component, the more proyektirovaniye transitions will differ from the true transitions. Thus, the growth of permanent sostavlyajushie is .78 presents the block diagram of the channel read 6-200 in accordance with one embodiments of the invention, providing decreasing the impact of the rise of the permanent component. Read channel 6-200 in General corresponds to the processor 6-22 in Fig. 75.

Read channel 6-200 includes cascade preamplifier 6-202, channel differentiation 6-204, channel alignment (correction) 6-206, channel partial integration 6-208 and channel generation data 6-210. The channel reading will be explained with reference to a more detailed block diagram shown in Fig.79, the waveforms in Fig.A-84D and others.

When optical media 6-18 is scanned for reading data, the cascade pre-amplification 6-202 amplifies the input signal to an appropriate level. Cascade preamplifier 6-202 may include a preamplifier 6-203, well known from the prior art. The preamplifier 6-203 can be located in a different place in the optical reader 6-20. An example of enhanced playback signal 6-220 shown in Fig.A.

The output signal of the cascade pre-amplification 6-202, as shown in Fig. 79A, is fed to a cascade of differentiation 6-204. The cascade of differentiation 6-204 may include a differential amplifier 6-212, such as differential Vientiane 6-204 shown in Fig.80A. The cascade of differentiation effectively increases the relative magnitude of the high frequency component of the amplified playback signal 6-202. An example of the output signal of the cascade of differentiation 6-204 shown in Fig.W.

For a cascade of differentiation 6-204 should cascade correction (EQ, equalizer) 6-206, as shown in Fig.79A. Cascade correction 6-206 provides additional filtering to modify the overall transfer function of the channel and to provide more reliable detection of data. Cascade correction 6-206 converts the differentiated form of the input signal so as to equalize the amplitudes of high-frequency and low-frequency components and to generate a smoothed signal for further processing. Smoothing filters often modify noise spectrum as the signal. Therefore, improvement in the form of the differentiated input signal (i.e., the reduction of distortion) is usually accompanied by a deterioration of the signal-to-noise ratio. Therefore, the design of the cascade correction 6-206 is a compromise between the desire to minimize noise and to provide a signal without distortion at an acceptable cost to the hardware. In General the design of the equalizer C is the service data, signal-to-noise ratio with the shape of the noise spectrum. A significant part of linear intersymbol interference when reading data in a magneto-optical recording system due to the limited bandwidth of the analog read and fall of the input signal amplitude with increasing areal density. Accordingly, the cascade correction 6-206 may contain one or more linear filters, which modify the transfer function of the channel readout to provide more reliable detection of the data. Usually the cascade correction is performed as part of the channel readout, but under certain conditions corrective filtering part can be carried out in the recording channel.

The playback signal can be considered as a sequence of bipolar rectangular pulse of unit amplitude with duration T. the playback Signal may be a sequence of bidirectional step functions at each point of the magnetization reversal, and the amplitude of the steps agreed with the pulse amplitude. When the input signal is applied to the cascade correction 6-206, clock information and the polarity of the pulses of each clock element can be determined from vyhodnocovanie EQ restore the ideal signal, which generates an output signal, the mid-point and the border of the clock element which are similar to the corresponding characteristics of the input signal.

Zero crossing of the output signal occur at the boundaries of the clock elements for accurate clock recovery. If the time and direction of zero crossing is known, the signals of zero-crossings can be restored as the clock signal and the data signal.

In one embodiment, the cascade correction 6-206 contains the equalizer is selected from the class of equalizers recovery waveform. In the General case EQ recovery waveform generates a signal containing binary sequence that resets the form input or playback signal. The corners of the generally rectangular pulses resulting signal is rounded, so as harmonic signal is attenuated in the channel. The resulting signal may also be some amplitude variations.

The equalizer, which generates an output signal with a minimum bandwidth is an ideal lowpass filter (LPF) with a single response on the minimum cut-off frequency and lack of response to high frequent the t, what a narrow-band filter with a minimum bandwidth can be modified and saved zero crossing in the output pulses at times corresponding to the middles of the clock elements. To achieve this result, the fall in the high frequency amplitude characteristics of the adjusted channel preferably symmetrically and localizes the point half-amplitude at the filter cutoff frequency with a minimum bandwidth.

One of the characteristics of the decline is characteristic of the filter in the cascade correction 6-206 species raised cosine, which has led to a corresponding definition of EQ as EQ raised cosine. The transfer characteristic of the decline of the species raised cosine approximately feasible and has an improved response for minimum filter bandwidth. The output pulses have a value of zero in moments of PT, and the amplitude of the damped oscillations of side lobes is reduced. Zero crossing of the output signal of the filter raised cosine more accurate than in the case of a filter with a minimum bandwidth and linear phase response easier achievable with a gradual decline, such as in the case of the gradual decline of the filter with characteristics the I bandwidth. The extension of the strip to the minimum bandwidth fm sometimes defined as a parameter of the channel characteristic of the type raised cosine. So, if code modulation with d= 0, = 0 corresponds to the minimum bandwidth, but is impossible rectangular transfer function, while = 1 represents a filter with twice the minimum bandwidth.

The pulse transfer function of the channel correction type raised cosine (including analog channel and equalizer, but excluding input filter) can be defined as follows:

H(f)=1, for 0<f<(1-fm

H(f) = 1/2{1+cos[(f-(1 -) (fm)/(2fm)]},

for(1-)fm<f<(1+fm

H(f)=0, forf>(1+)fm

where f(f)= kf represents the phase, and k is a constant. The above equations define-equalizers recovery waveform. Channel = 1 has the property of having zeros at intervals of half a clock elements, and at intervals a full clock elements. This channel allows to generate a signal having no intersymbol interference in moments the middle or edges of the clock elements, which represent the moments of zero-crossings and selections, it is possible to accurately recover the clock and data signals. For this equalizer full usery raised cosine able to adjust substantially linear intersymbol interference with adequate signal-to-noise ratio. A substantial rise in the frequency response at high frequencies may be required to compensate for permission for magneto-optical media and optical systems. The bandwidth of the equalizer, is equal to at least twice the minimum bandwidth, preferred to exclude linear intersymbol interference, assuming physically realizable channel working code modulation when d=0. This band width in the General case leads to the decrease of the ratio signal/noise. The bandwidth of the equalizer are selected in order to achieve the optimal compromise between distortion caused by interference and noise. In some cases, it may be desirable to narrow the band through the use of a transfer function when the <0 for improving noise characteristics of the price of additional distortions in the form of jitter clock.

The other well-known equalizer recovery waveform equalizer is with cosine response. Pulse transfer function-channel full bandwidth is defined as follows:

H(f) cos(f/(2fc))for0<f< / BR>
H(f)=0, forf>fc< / BR>
Like family-Eqs, there are many of Eqs. -EQ is and due to the relatively low interference at the boundaries of the clock elements. Known methods of optimization of these types of corrective filters to achieve the minimum probability of error for different types of noises.

The use of equalizers in the General case leads to a narrowing of the bandwidth and the noise reducing price jitter clock or horizontal disclosure Glazkova chart (display) EQ. Using equalizer in the General case leads to an improvement of the signal-to-noise ratio by reducing the high-frequency rise characteristics without reducing the bandwidth. Select equalizer can reduce vertical disclosure Glazkova chart equalizer or significantly reduce the amplitude. The channel equalizers type = 1 and = 2 are identical from the point of view Glazkova, charts, both types of channels have a relatively broad disclosure Glazkova, the indicator diagram.

The preferred width of the channel strip EQ for codes with d>0 is not necessarily dependent on the minimum duration of the recorded pulses Tg, as you might expect, but on the contrary, depends on the duration of the clock element TM. This is because the schema data recovery in General should distinguish between pulses of different duration one is ecstasy the maximum number of continuously following items without reverse magnetization require nominal bandwidth BWnom=1/Tm=fcto eliminate interference in the center and on the edges of each clock element, provided that the intersymbol interference at the boundaries of the clock element is missing.

For codes with d>0 interference can be effectively eliminated at the edges of the clock elements with reduced bandwidth BW=1/(2.Tm)=fc/2. In this case, the pulse reading all clocked elements have unit amplitude of the magnetization switching and rear edges of the pulses of the read cross the zero transitions of the magnetic flux. A narrower band width BW leads to the intersections of the zero output signal at the point where there is no interference, excluding centers clocked elements, but the decrease in bandwidth is usually obtained from the increase in ambiguity detection in the presence of channel distortion. The narrower the bandwidth BW may also lead to a decrease in the slope of the signal of zero-crossings, resulting in the potential to increase the detection sensitivity to noise, change speed drive, neodenticula analog channels or to improper frequency correction. For example, the channel correction with half bandwidth = 2, the code modulation frequency (1, k)2/3 can gain between zero crossings. Bandwidth less than the bandwidth for the modulation of no return to zero", although in this case is written to more information than by modulation of no return to zero" (for example, the bandwidth of 0.75 and a repetition rate of bits equal to 1.33 in relation to modulation of no return to zero"). This reduced band width reimburses frequency code modulation.

Equalizers recovery waveform type = 1 and can provide the appearance of zero-crossings in moments, equivalent to the fronts of the input pulses. Detection of data in this case can be achieved through hard limit adjusted signal, which leads in General to the output signal, reconstructs the original signal playback. However, this result can be obtained only if the response of the equalizer comes to the constant component, which usually does not occur for a magneto-optical channel. Birefringence for a disk in the magneto-optical channel causes drift up and down relative to the reference level of the DC component, which leads to a lengthening or shortening of the output clock elements, respectively, the degree of amplitude offset in the detector of zero-crossings. This problem monoimage low-frequency response of the equalizer recovery waveform, low-frequency signals may require significant gain that can seriously degrade the signal-to-noise under certain conditions. If low-frequency noise has a significant level, methods of correction when the form is reset signal may not be satisfactory, unless you use code modulation without DC component or low content or restoration schemes constant component.

In a preferred embodiment, the cascade correction 6-206 may contain a programmable filter and equalizer 6-207 (Fig.79A) chip. Such chips are being manufactured at present by many companies. Filter and equalizer 6-207 may have a uniform pulsations and to have a relatively constant group delay up to a frequency approximately equal to twice the cutoff frequency. The characteristic frequency response of the cascade correction 6-206 shown in Fig.80V, as an example of the output signal shown in Fig.S.

After the signal is processed by the cascade correction 6-206, signal peaks, as shown in Fig.S contain accurate information about the position of the read data. The signal peaks can then the ü unwanted jitter signal. The preferred embodiment of the invention described herein provides an accurate means of detecting signal peaks without taking the second derivative, by using partial integration and the new scheme of data generation.

After the signal has been processed by the cascade correction 6-206, he served on the partial cascade integrator 6-208 for further conversion of the waveform. As shown in Fig.79A, the partial cascade integrator 6-208 may contain amplification cascade 6-229, the cascade of bandpass filter 6-230, cascade integrator and low pass 6-232 and cascade vicites and LPF 6-234. Amplification cascade 6-229 receives the output signal of the cascade correction 6-206 and transmits a signal to a cascade of bandpass filter 6-230 and cascade integrator and low pass 6-232. Cascade 6-232 preferably weakens the selected range of high-frequency components. Typical frequency response 6-260 cascade integrator and low pass 6-232 and characteristic frequency response 6-261 cascade of bandpass filter 6-230 shown in Fig.80C.

The output signal of the cascade of bandpass filter 6-230 (Fig.79A) is then subtracted from the output signal of the cascade integrator and low pass 6-232 and filtered by a cascade of low-pass filter 6-234. Schedule full frequency response of the AC is rtualnogo integrator 6-208 shown in Fig.84D.

A detailed diagram of an example implementation of a cascade of partial integrator 6-208 shown in Fig.W. As shown, the differential input signal 6-238, 6-239 comes from the cascade correction 6-206. This signal is fed to a differential amplifier 6-240, differential summing the input signals. Differential amplifier 6-240 corresponds to the amplifying cascade 6-229 in Fig.79A.

Output 6-249 differential amplifier 6-240 connected to the current generators 6-241 and 6-242. The first current generator 6-241 contains a resistor R77 decrease under and PNP transistor Q61 (Fig. V). A second current generator 6-242 also contains a resistor R78 and PNP transistor Q11.

The generator output current 6-241 connected to the bandpass filter 6-243, which contains the inductance L3, the capacitor C and a resistor R10 connected in parallel. Band-pass filter 6-243 essentially corresponds to the cascade of bandpass filter 6-230 in Fig.79A. The generator output current 6-242 connected to the integrator 6-244. The integrator 6-244 includes a capacitor C and resistor R66 connected in parallel, as shown in Fig.W.

The output of the integrator 6-244 is connected through a resistor R55 with NPN-transistor Q31 which is executed by the circuit emitter follower, providing isolation relative to the output of the integrator 6-24 is Yunosti L6, the capacitor C and resistor R49. The integrator 6-244, the emitter follower transistor Q31 and LPF 6-245 correspond to the cascade integrator and a low-pass filter according to Fig.79A. Frequency response of the integrator 6-244 corresponds to the frequency response 6-260 (Fig.80C), and the frequency response of the LPF 6-243 - frequency response 6-261.

The output of the LPF 6-245 and the output of the bandpass filter (PF) 6-243 connected with a differential amplifier 6-246 (Fig.V). Differential amplifier 6-246 differential sums the input signals and generates a differential signal is supplied to LPF 6-247. Differential amplifier 6-246 and LPF 6-247 correspond to the cascade vicites and LPF 6-234 in Fig.79A.

Waveforms in the circuit of Fig.V shown in Fig.80G(1)-80G(4). In Fig. 80G(1) shows the first input signal 6-256 differential amplifier 6-240, coming for example from the output of the equalizer 6-206. The signal 6-257 in Fig. 80G(2) corresponds to the output signal PF 6-243 (Fig.V) generated in response to the first input signal 6-256. The signal 6-258 in Fig.80G(3) corresponds to the output signal of the LPF 6-245, formed in response to the input signal 6-256. The signal 6-256 illustrates the result of the operation of the integrator 6-244. Function LPF 6-245 is essentially a software delay to align the output signals PF 6-243 and intercom input of the differential amplifier 6-246 to implement differential summation.

The signal 6-259 in Fig.80G(4) corresponds to the output signal of the second LPF 6-247 after output signals PF 6-243 and LPF 6-245 were combined and filtered. The signal 6-259 detects significantly improved resolution compared to the original playback signal read from the magnetic media.

It should be noted that the functions of partial integration described here with reference to Fig.79A and B, are implemented using a differential amplifier (6-240 and 6-246), while normal rejectee DC component of the input signal 6-238, 6-239. Another feature of the device according to Fig.79A and V is in relatively good characteristics frequency response provided by the cascade of partial integration. In particular, by combining the integrated signal with the filtered high frequency signal (i.e., unit vicites and LPF 6-234 or differential amplifier 6-246) from differentiated and adjusted the playback signal the noise will be removed, while maintaining a relatively fast response, which is partly due to the rise of the frequency response in the high frequencies, provided by PF.

Cos who compete 6-208 is converting a waveform playback 6-220 a certain way to facilitate data recovery. Comparing Fig.A and 84D, you can see that the resulting signal (Fig.84D) is similar to the playback signal 6-220 (Fig. A), from which he received, but differs from it by the fact that high-frequency and low-frequency components are aligned and excluded noise-like characteristics. Schedule full frequency response for the combination of these cascades 6-204, 6-206 and 6-208 shown in Fig.80E. Schedule full group delay for the same elements shown in Fig.80F.

It should be noted that currently exist in the system drives using the frequency correction and integration of the playback signal to facilitate data recovery. To a large extent, these systems do not have problems with the buildup of a permanent component, as they usually use the codes without a DC component. As mentioned above, the codes without constant component have the disadvantage that they provide a relatively low recording density, and therefore ineffective. The present invention in its various embodiments allows the use of more efficient coding system for the use of funds, excluding the impact of the effect of increasing the fixed component without isane 6-208 (Fig.84D) is fed to the cascade generating data 6-210 (Fig.79). The block diagram of the cascade generating data 6-210 shown in Fig.81. Cascade 6-210 contains the detector positive peaks 6) is 300, the detector negative peaks 6-3-2, the voltage divider 6-304, the comparator 6-306 scheme and double fronts 6-308. The operation of the circuit of Fig.81 can be described with reference to Fig.83, where it is assumed that the recorded bit sequence 6-230 read and ultimately must be generated preprocessed signal 6-233 with a cascade of partial integration 6-208. It should be noted that the pre-processed signal 6-322 and various other signals, shown here, represented by idealized for purposes of illustration, but it should be borne in mind that the actual signals may vary in shape and size from those shown in Fig.83, etc.

The pre-processed signal 6-322 is supplied to the detector positive peaks 6) is 300 and the detector negative peaks 6-302, which measure and monitor these signal peaks 6-322. The output signal of positive peaks 6-330 detector 6) is 300 and the output signal of the negative peaks 6-332 detector 6-302 shown in Fig.83. The output signals of the positive and negative peaks 6-330 and 6-332 averaged voltage divider 6-304, consisting of two d which describes a midpoint between the peaks of the pre-processed signal 6-322. The output signal of the divider 6-304 is supplied to the comparator 6-306, which compares the divided voltage with a pre-processed signal 6-322. The comparator changes state when the pre-processed signal 6-322 crosses the threshold signal 6-334, thus indicating a transition in the data read from 1 to 0 or from 0 to 1. The output signal of the comparator 6-362 shown in Fig. 83. As explained below, the output signal 6-362 is supplied to the detector positive peaks 6) is 300 and the detector negative peaks 6-302 to ensure constant envelope tracking component. The output signal of the comparator 6-306 also served on the schema dual fronts 6-308, which generates a unipolar pulse of a fixed duration when the state change of the comparator 6-306.

The output signal of the circuit 6-308 contains a clock and alarm information, from which recovery of the recorded data can be carried out without difficulty. For example, in the method of pulse-width modulation, for example by using the previously described GCR-8/9 code, each pulse output signal data from the schema 6-308 represents the moment of transition in the flow of the magnetization (i.e., the recorded bit is "1"), and the absence of pulse data at a clock intervals before the encoded decoder 6-24 (Fig.75) by known methods to determine the source of data.

For proper tracking of the envelope, due to the constant component of the preprocessed signal 6-322, in the preferred embodiment provides for the submission of information about the duty cycle of the output signal at the peak detectors. Thus, the output signal of the comparator 6-306 is supplied to the detectors of the positive and negative peaks 6) is 300, 6-302. This processing is explained with reference to Fig.82, which shows a more detailed diagram of the cascade generating data 6-210. Here the pre-processed signal 6-322 is supplied to the base of transistors Q2, Q5. Transistor Q2 refers to the detector positive peaks 6) is 300, and the transistor Q5 to the detector negative peaks 6-302. Since these detectors operate in the same manner, the operation using the duty cycle is illustrated for the detector positive peaks 6) is 300, it is clear that the same applies to the detector negative peaks 6-302.

Transistor Q2 charges the capacitor C1, when the amplitude of the pre-processed signal 6=322 exceeds the accumulated voltage on the capacitor C1 (plus the forward bias voltage of the transistor Q2). As shown in Fig.83, the output signal of positive peaks 6-330 quickly charged to the peak value of the signal 6-322.ne signal 6-362 high level and allows the capacitor C1 to discharge, when the signal 6-362 low level. Thus, when the output signal 6-362 high level, the positive charge on the capacitor C1 is supported by a transistor Q1 through a resistor R2. Preferably, the resistors R1, R2 have the same value, so that the charge added to the capacitor through the resistor R2, the same as the discharge through the resistor R1, making the resulting charge on the capacitor C1 is kept constant. If the output signal 6-362 low level, the transistor Q1 is locked and the capacitor discharges through the resistor R1. The values of capacitor C1 and resistor R1 are selected such that the time constant was smaller than expected rise time constant component, allowing the capacitor C1 can track changes in the level of the permanent component.

The output signal of the capacitor C1 is supplied to the base of transistor Q3. The voltage level of the emitter of the transistor Q3 represents a level of a bias voltage higher than the output signal from the capacitor C1. Current flows through resistor R3, which allows the emitter of transistor Q3 to monitor the voltage of the capacitor C1 (shifted by the value of bias voltage emitter-base). Thus, the emitter of the transistor Q3 forms and, and the transistor Q3 is a PNP transistor. This configuration is largely compensates for the negative temperature effects, manifested for transistors Q1, Q2, Q3, and also allows you to compensate for the voltage offset associated with their work.

The detector negative peaks 6-302 is similar to the detector of positive peaks 6) is 300 and therefore does not require detailed consideration. The emitter of transistor Q6 provides an output signal negative peaks 6-332.

As described above, the output signal of positive peaks 6-330 and the output signal of the negative peaks 6-332 averaged voltage divider 6-304 resistors R4 6-341, 6-342, as shown in Fig.81 and 82 for forming the threshold signal 6-334. The threshold signal 6-334 corresponds to approximately the midpoint value between the peaks of the pre-processed signal 6-332 and tracks the envelope of the permanent component of the pre-processed signal 6-322 by compensation due to feedback.

Although feedback using the information about the duty cycle is shown from the output of the comparator 6-306, it should be borne in mind that there may be other feedback circuit, for example, with the output of the circuit dual fronts 6-308, if the trigger INIA duty cycle and adjust the threshold level for envelope tracking constant component.

The preferred method described with reference to Fig.78 and V, includes the operation of differentiation of the playback signal to the partial integration, followed by the tracking operation of the permanent component. The preferred method particularly suitable for systems with playback signal with a relatively low resolution and can be effectively used, for example, when reading data stored in the GCR format. In one aspect of the preferred method of initial operation of differentiation reduces low-frequency components in the incoming signal playback. In another preferred aspect of the method of partial integration allows you to restore or partially restore the playback signal while providing a fast response due to rising frequency response in the high frequencies (for example, cascade FFA). Thus, the preferred method differs from the way in which the integration of the playback signal is initially (i.e. before differentiation), which may lead to an increase in the permanent component and will cause difficulty in tracking constant component.

Should otmt used in the system to read data, stored on magnetic tapes or disks of other types, as well as, more broadly, in any system (not necessarily in the data storage system) for processing electrical signals, for which it is desirable to reduce the impact of the rise of the permanent component.

Memorization of data and other aspects of the search data

According Fig. 85, in write mode, the data source 7-10 transmits the data to the encoder 7-12. Encoder 7-12 converts the binary data in the binary code bits. Code bits are then passed on to the pulse generator 7-14 laser, where the code bits is converted into the excitation pulses to run the laser 7-16 and off. In a preferred embodiment, a code bit "1" pulse indicates the start of the laser within a fixed time regardless of the combination of code bits. Depending on the laser used and the media characteristics can be improved by adjusting the moments of occurrence of the pulses of the start of the laser or by stretching or otherwise convert the pulse duration. The laser output 7-16 heats a localized area on the media 7-18, exhibiting its relation to magnetic flow, which sets the polarity magnitno media. The polarization of the reflected laser beam will depend on the polarity of the magnetized surface of the optical media.

In the reading mode and the reflected laser beam enters the optical reading device 7-20, where the read coded output signal is fed to the signal processor 7-22. Processed read the code then enters the decoder 7-24, where the output can be transmitted to the output port 7-26 data for further transmission.

Fig.86 illustrates the differences between the pulse start of the laser when using formats GCR 8/9 and RLL 2,7-codes. For GCR 8/9 element 7-28 is defined as a code bit. For GCR 8/9 nine elements or code bit is equivalent to eight bits of data. Thus, each of the elements 7-30 - 7-41 corresponds to one clock period 7-42 clock signal 7-45. 3 1/2" optical disk with a rotational speed of 2400 rpm, when the memory capacity of 256 MB, the clock period is 7-42 63 NS or clocked 15,879 MHz. GCR signal 7-47 data is a coded output signal of the encoder 7-12. Typical sequence data shown in Fig.86A. This sequence "010001110101" presented in the GCR data 7-50 - 7-61, the element GCR-data 7-50 ameenah from 7-53 to 7-61. Pulse GCR signal 7-65 represents the output signal of the pulse generator 7-14 laser supplied to the laser 7-16. The invention is used excitation signal without returning to zero for excitation of magnetic recording heads. Thus, the magnetization previously erased optical media reverses polarity when in the presence of an external magnetic field with a polarity opposite to the polarity of the erased media is pulse start laser with sufficient energy to exceed the Curie temperature of the medium. Pulse GCR signal is shown without adjustment for time or duration to improve performance using combinations of data. Pulse GCR signal 7-67 - 7-78 shows no pulse when the corresponding element GCR-7-47 data has a low level, and the presence of a pulse, when such an element 7-47 has a high level. For example, the pulse GCR signal has a pulse, because the data element 7-50 has a low level. Conversely, pulse GCR signal 7-68, 7-69, 7-70 7-71 and illustrates the presence of a pulse, because the data elements 7-51 - 7-54 have a high level, and similarly for pulse GCR signal 7-72 - 7-78. For the shown example, the duration t equal to 28 NS. Each laser pulse, corresponding GCR-pulses 7-65, creates petes record 7-80 on optical media 7-18 corresponding to the pulses 7-68. Pete 7-83 corresponds GCR-momentum 7-69. Similarly, Pitta 7-84 - 7-88 comply with GCR-impulses from 7-70 to 7-77, respectively.

Due to thermal scattering and spot size on the media 7-18, Pitta account 7-80 wider in time than GCR-pulse 7-65. Consistently recorded pita 7-80 merge and create elongated pit entry. Such elongated pit entry has a leading edge corresponding to the first recorded Peet, front and rear, corresponding to the last recorded Peet. For example, Pete created by recording pits 7-82 - 7-85, has been in the forefront from the recorded pit 7-82 front and rear from Pete 7-85. When using GCR 8/9-format leading edge corresponding to the item, 7-47, goes to a high level, and the rear of the front corresponding to the item, 7-47, goes to a low level. Therefore, for the combination of data "10001", shown GCR data 7-51 - 7-55, the leading edge occurs for the first "1" (item 7-47 goes to high level, as shown Pete 7-82, and at the end of the GCR-data element 7-54 falling edge occurs, as shown Pete 7-85, 7-55 low level.

With Abednego front of Pete the playback signal 7-90 will continue to grow and to maintain a high level until it reaches the rear of the front of Pete. The signal will go low and stay there until the next pit. For example, the playback signal 7-91 has a low level, because the data element 7-50 low level has not established a record of Pete. At the time of the leading edge of the recorded pit 7-82 the playback signal 7-90 has a rising edge, as shown for signal playback 7-92. The playback signal 7-90 will then remain unchanged until the trailing edge is recorded in a pita. For example, as recorded pita 7-83 and 7-84 not have the trailing edge, the signals from the playback 7-93 and 7-94 retain a high level. The signal keeps high level during playback signal 7-95 because Pete recorded 7-85. However, since the element 7-55 has a low level, the recorded pit 7-85 creates a falling edge. Thus, the playback signal 7-96 subsides. This signal will decrease to "0" if not prompted Pete records, creating the leading edge. Thus, when Pete 7-86, the corresponding data item 7-56, the playback signal 7-97 increases. Because there is no subsequent pit after 7-86, if the data item 7-57 low level, the playback signal drops. The playback signal 7-99 remains at a low level, so as backgrounds pita 7-87 and 7-88 overlap, forming one elongated pit. Thus, the playback signal 7-100 increases and the playback signal 7-101 remains at a high level. The playback signal 7-102 subsides at the time of the trailing edge Pete's record 7-88, when the element 7-61 has a low level.

Format RLL 2,7 clock element consists of two data bits, which correspond to two clock periods 7-121 clock signal 2F 7-120 (Fig. V). For disk 256 MB RLL 2,7-encoding format will require a duration 7-121 clock pulse 2F equal to 35.4 na, or clock frequency 28,23 MHz. The calculation of these values is not straightforward. To save the same recording density of the disk encoding formats GCR 8/9 and RLL 2,7 must contain the same amount of information on the interval of one and the same recording time. As in the format RLL 2,7 requires two code bits per data bit, it requires a frequency two times higher than for GR 8/9 format. In GCR format is recorded nine bits of the code bits to eight bits of data. Thus, the clock signal for GCR data is 9/8 on the clock period 7-42. Thus, for GCR format with a clock period 7-42, 63 NS duration RLL 2,7 pulse 7-121 should be 35.4 na to save the same. the example element 7-124 RLL 2,7 data corresponds to a combination of "00", and the 7-125 item - combinations of data "10". In this format, data "1" represents a transition in the data. Thus, 7-125 item RLL 2,7 data goes to a high level, when the combination of data you receive a "1". Similarly, the element 7-126 RLL 2,7 data goes to a low level when the combination data you receive a "1". When you receive a "0", the element 7-122 RLL 2,7 data retains the same state. Pulse 2,7-signal 7-137 pulse corresponds to the start of laser 7-16 for the data item 7-122. Thus, for an element 7-125 and 7-126, during the period when the signal has a high level, the pulse 2,7-signal 7-140 and 7-141 has a high level.

Due to thermal expansion Pete, pulse 2,7-signal 7-141 go low before element 7-126 RLL 2,7 data. For longer combinations "0" pulse will start to act. For example, for a combination of "10001", as shown for elements 7-128 and 7-129, pulse 2,7-signal 7-143 and 7-144 remains at a high level longer than the pulse 2,7-signal 7-140 and 7-141. For combinations of data from consecutive "0" pulse 2,7-signal 7-137 may be formed as separate pulses. For example, for the combination of data "10 7-147, 7-148 and 7-149.

As in the case of GCR 8/9-format, recorded pita 7-160 show thermal elongation. For example, the recorded pit 7-162 longer in time than the pulse generated from the pulse 2,7-signal 7-140 and 7-141; a similar result can be seen for Pete recorded 7-163. And again, the playback signal 7-167, depicted as a playback signal 7-168 - 7-174, goes to a high level in the moments of the front fronts recorded pits 7-160, falls in moments back edge of the pit 7-160 and keeps a constant level in the presence or absence of the pit.

Pulse GCR code can be improved through corrective shifts the projected position. In Fig.87 shows a time chart for compensation write pulse generator 7-14. Experimental verification showed that the record before the laser 7-16 disabled for two bits or more, improves the characteristics. The clock signal 7-176 used for clocking data 7-177, 7-203 and 7-229 that illustrates the combination of data for the worst case when the compensation.

Other combinations can be adjusted with the deterioration, however, the amplitude of the signal. Data 7-180 - 7-184 correspond to a sequence of "10100". The uncorrected and the pulse signals 7-189 and 7-191 occur in the second half of the clock period. After payment records the output signal of the pulse generator 7-14 laser corresponds to the compensated pulse signal 7-195, where the compensated pulse signals 7-197 and 7-198 remain unchanged, and shortened the period for compensated pulse signal 7-199 provides the formation of a compensated pulse signal 7-200. During the compensated pulse 7-201 laser 7-16 remains disabled for a longer period of time than for the uncorrected pulse 7-192. Similarly, for data 7-206 - 7-209 corresponding to a combination of "11000", uncompensated pulse signal 7-211 will be disabled for uncompensated pulse signal 7-213, followed by two pulse: uncompensated pulse signals 7-214 and 7-216. And again, the compensation scheme accounts adjusts the compensated pulse signal 7-220 so that the compensated pulse signal will appear closer in time to the offset of the pulse signal 7-233, so that the compensated pulse signal 7-224 shorter than the uncorrected pulse signal 7-215. Finally, the data 7-231 - 7-235, the appropriate combination of data "00100", are not compensated pulse sincerelady pulse signal 7-243 closer in time to the offset of the pulse signal 7-246.

In Fig. 88 shows the block diagram of the compensation scheme record containing the control unit combinations data 7-248, the detector combinations compensation account 7-249 and a delay circuit 7-269. The control unit combinations data 7-248 is a serial shift register that sequentially tectorum encoded data from the encoder 7-12. The last five bits of data are transmitted to the detector combinations compensation account 7-249, where they are analyzed to determine whether to perform pulse start laser earlier than usual.

The control unit combinations 7-248 consists of a sequence of D-flip-flops 7-250 - 7-256. The coded data are fed to the D-input of D-flip-flop 7-250 sequence data signal WD1 with Q-output of which is input to the D-input of D-flip-flop 7-251. This clocking continues for the entire sequence of the D flipflops 7-252 - 7-256. The output signal WD7 with Q-output of D-flip-flop 7-256 is a sequence of data, detained for seven clock periods relative to this sequence at the input of the control unit combinations data 7-248. Output signals WD1, WD2, WD3, WD4, WD5 with the Q-outputs of the D flipflops 7-250 - 7-254 respectively represent the last five of the placenta is ü combinations compensation account 7-249, where they are compared with certain combinations of data, and, if they match, then the signal recording resolution is given to the delay circuit 7-269, thus indicating that the laser pulse should be initiated earlier than usual.

The first combination data is found by inverting the data from the Q-output WD1, WD2, WD4, WD5 D-flip-flops 7-250, 7-251, 7-253, 7-254 respectively through inverters 7-260, 7-261, 7-262, 7-263, respectively. Output signals of these inverters are combined under the scheme And with the release of D-flip-flop 7-252 in the scheme And 264. Thus, when there is a sequence of "00100", the output signal of the circuit And 7-264 goes to a high level indicating that there was a discovery of this combination. Similarly, the second combination data is found by inverting the signals from the Q outputs WD1, WD2, WD4 D-flip-flops 7-250, 7-251, 7-253, respectively inverters 7-282, 7-283 and 7-284 respectively, and the inverted output signals are combined by the circuit And output signals WD3 and WD5 D-flip-flops 7-252 and 7-254 in the scheme And 7-286. Thus, the combination of "10100" will ensure the transition to the high level at the output of the circuit And 7-286, thus indicating the fact of detection. The third sequence of data detected by inverting signalisierung output signals with output signals WD3, WD4 D-flip-flops 7-252 and 7-253 respectively in the scheme And 7-289. Thus, the combination of data "1100" is to generate a detection signal on the circuit output And 7-289, thus indicating the presence of this combination. The output signals of the detection with schemes And 7-264, 7-286, 7-289 unite under the scheme OR the scheme OR 7-266, the output of which goes to high level when the detected one of these three combinations. The output signal of the detection combinations it is in D-trigger recording resolution 7-268, the signal of the Q output of which, which is the signal recording resolution is transmitted to the delay unit 7-269.

The delay circuit 7-269 takes testirovanie output signal WD4 D-flip-flop 7-253 and at the same time causes a delay circuit 7-276 and in the scheme And 7-274 select no delay. The delayed output signal of the delay circuit 7-276 is introduced into the scheme And 7-272 selection delay. The enable signal recording detector 7-249 combination of compensation will unlock either the schema And 7-272 selection delay or scheme And 7-274 select no delay. If the enable signal has the low level, which corresponds to the absence of one of the three combinations of data, it is inverted by the inverter 7-270. This allows you to actinovate delayed data from the schema detention combinations of data the scheme And 7-274 select no delay enables the transfer of data from the D-flip-flop 7-253 without delay. The outputs of circuits And 7-272 and schemes And 7-274 unite under the scheme OR the scheme OR 7-278 and output from the delay unit 7-269. Although in the previous description of the compensation scheme burn, or sync it was shown that for the three combinations of data pulse recording should appear in 10 NS before, in the actual embodiment, the data was delayed by 10 NS, the data was delayed by 10 NS for all combinations of data, in addition to these three combinations. The delay in the delay circuit 7-276 set from 7 to 12 NS for the frequency of the preferred option run.

When recording data patterns with a lower frequency of the resulting magneto-optical signal has a rise time longer than the fall time. This means that the resulting output signal from the signal processor 7-22 would have worsened the amplitude of the positive peaks that can be adjusted by recording with higher effective capacity for the front of combinations of data. In a preferred embodiment, the combination of data "000111" will dictate the start signal wide record for the second single" half is 2">

As shown in Fig.89, the clock signal 7-301 tectorum the data signal 7-303 using a pulse generator 7-14 laser in accordance with the combination data "000111". As shown the data 7-305-7-310, the pulse generator 7-14 laser generates a pulse signal 7-312 with pulses 7-314, 7-315 and 7-316, when the signal 7-303 corresponds to "1". During the second, single, half this combination of data pulse generator 7-14 laser will be run in accordance with the signal increased capacity 7-318 and generate momentum 7-320. The output pulse signal 7-322 laser is formed as a result of a combination of pulse 7-312 and signal 7-318 increased capacity, due to which generated laser pulses 7-323, 7-324 and 7-325. In normal mode the laser pulse 7-324 must be turned off during the first half of the clock period. In the case of this particular combination of data, however, maintaining the laser is enabled for pulse 7-323 and 7-324 effectively increases the capacity by 50% during this time period.

According Fig. 90, the correction pattern asymmetry amplitude 7-291 generates a pulse wide records 7-292 (corresponds to the signal increased capacity 7-318 in Fig.89), which is combined by the scheme OR with the laser output pulse is armywide output laser pulse 7-322. The control unit combinations data 7-248 works, as shown in Fig.88. Output signals WD2, WD3, WD4, WD5, WD6, WD7 D-flip-flops 7-251 - 7-256 respectively fed to the correction pattern asymmetry amplitude 7-291, where the signals WD5, DW6, WD7 D-flip-flops 7-254, 7-255 and 7-256 are inverted by inverters data 7-293, 7-294 and 7-295, respectively. The output signals of the inverters and D-flip-flops 7-251, 7-252 and 7-253 join the scheme And 7-296 detection of combinations of data. The output signal of the circuit And 7-296 indicates the detection of a combination of "000111", which it is with the D-flip-wide account the next clock signal 7-301.

The output signal of the optical reader 7-20 will deteriorate as a function of frequency and combination of data. The amplitude and synchronization can be improved by signal processing processor 7-22 conversion waveforms. The asymmetry of the rise of the decline of individual pulse can be improved by summing the adjusted differentiated signal with its derivative. In Fig.91 it is shown that the magneto-optical signal 7-331 is differentiated by the differential amplifier 7-329. Differentiated signal is fed to the equalizer 7-331, where it is adjusted preferably to 5 dB, and the amplitude of viravnivaet which is adjusted by the signal in the adder 7-335. The output of the adder 7-335 is a signal read 7-337.

In Fig. 92 presents a time chart of the circuit operation of the dynamic threshold according to Fig.93. The signal read 7-337 will contain the emissions caused by the narrowing of the pulses. Because these emissions are projected, the threshold for diagrams reading can be increased during the positive peaks 7-339, 7-340, 7-341 and 7-342 and during the negative peaks 7-343, 7-344 and 7-345 signal read 7-337. The threshold signal 7-348 switches to a high level for positive peaks 7-339, 7-340 and 7-341 respectively. Threshold signals 7-352, 7-353 and 7-354 have a low level at the negative peaks 7-343, 7-344 and 7-345, respectively. Each peak positive or negative signal read 7-337 generates a signal peak 7-356, represent short clock pulse which occurs immediately after the peaks 7-337 signal reading. Peaks 7-339, 7-343, 7-340, 7-344, 7-341, 7-345 and 7-342 signal read 7-337 form of signal peaks 7-358 - 7-364 respectively.

As shown in Fig.93, the threshold signal 7-348 served on the D-input of D-flip-flop 7-366. Signal peak 7-356 tectorum threshold signal 7-348 using a trigger 7-366. The delayed threshold signal 7-368 Q-output of the trigger 7-366 combined at the th frequency relative to the initial threshold signal 7-348. EXOR signal 7-372 arrives at the D-input of the trigger 7-374 where it it is a clock signal reading 7-375. The signal F1 7-376 represents the signal at the Q output trigger 7-374. The clock signal reading 7-375 has been in the forefront during the high level pulses 7-372, except when the signal 7-372 has a low level for more than one clock signal reading 7-375. Thus, the signal F1 7-376 has a high level, with the exception of the time interval between the first clock signal reading 7-375 after EXOR signal 7-372 has a low level for more than one clock signal reading 7-375, and the next pulse EXOR signal 7-372.

The signal F1 7-376 is combined with the signal 7-372 in the scheme OR 7-378 of the envelope. The output signal of the circuit OR 7-378 has a high level except for the time from the first clock signal reading 7-375 after the signal 7-372 has a low level for more than one clock period, and up until the signal 7-372 not go again to a high level. The output signal of the circuit OR 7-378 it on the D-input of the trigger 7-379, clocked by the clock signal reading 7-375. The signal on the Q output trigger 7-379 represents the signal F2 7-381, which has a high level, excluding the ka next clock signal reading 7-375 will not cause a transition to the high level of the EXOR signal 7-372. The signal F2 7-381 is inverted by inverter 7-383 and combined signal 7-372 in the scheme OR NOT 7-385 dynamic threshold for signal dynamic threshold 7-387, which has a high level whenever the signal 7-372 low, except when the signal F2 7-381 has a low level. Thus, the signal 7-387 dynamic threshold is the turn-on time less than half the period of a clock signal reading 7-375, except when the signal 7-372 has a low level for the next period of the clock signal reading 7-375. For this case, the signal dynamic threshold 7-387 remains at a high level from the end of the signal 7-372 to the second pulse of the clock signal reading 7-375.

Dynamic threshold signal 7-387 is used to move forward or backward diode 7-389. When the dynamic threshold 7-387 high level, bias diode 7-389 is back biased, and Vice versa, when the dynamic threshold 7-387 low level, the diode 7-389 shifted forward.

When the dynamic threshold signal 7-387 slips forward diode 7-389 (i.e. has a low level), the potential of the filtered signal bias 7-390 increased by the voltage bias diode 7-389. This potential is 0.6 for stannage signal 7-390, as the voltage on the charging condenser 7-394 is the difference between the filtered signal bias 7-390 and earth. Charging the capacitor 7-394 charged to this potential, which is also the base voltage of the transistor 7-395. As a result, the transistor 7-395 unlocked, and the voltage at the emitter of transistor 7-395 becomes equal to 1.4 Century since the emitters of transistors 7-395 and 7-396 connected, the emitter voltage of the transistor 7-396 less than the base voltage of 2.5 V transistor 7-396. Accordingly, the transistor 7-396 locked, so that the collector voltage on the resistor 7-397 creates high threshold signal 7-399 equal to 0 V (ground). This increased threshold voltage 7-399 is a signal that increases the threshold for the signal read 7-377 during intervals of emissions.

When the dynamic threshold signal 7-397 has a high level, bias diode 7-389 shifted in the opposite direction, thereby no longer hold the base of transistor 7-395 at the level of the 6th Century, When the dynamic threshold signal 7-387 goes to a high level, the charging capacitor 7-394 starts to charge, creating the potential on the base of the transistor 7-395, which will grow exponentially to the voltage feed is and 7-395 increases and simultaneously increases the voltage at the emitter of transistor 7-396. When the emitter voltage exceeds the voltage based on the magnitude of the potential between the emitter and base of transistor 7-396, the latter is unlocked. Unlocking transistor 7-396 causes an increase in the threshold signal 7-399 to a high level.

During normal operation, the dynamic threshold signal 7-387 is formed, as described above. For normal signals read dynamic threshold 7-387 included for the period equivalent to the period of the clock enable signal read 7-375. The charging time for the voltage on the charging condenser 7-394 exceeded the voltage on the base 2.5 In, longer than this period of time equal to the half period of the clock signal. Thus, under normal conditions, the increased threshold signal remains at a low level. During the interval of the emission, however, the dynamic threshold signal 7-399 on for a longer time, thereby allowing the capacitor 7-394 be charged to a voltage greater than 2.5 V, with increased threshold signal 7-399 goes to a high level.

According Fig. 94, main computer 7-410, which serves as a source and user of digital data associated electronic interface 7-412 bus is by means of an electronic interface 7-412 communicating with the data bus 7-414. Data bus 7-414 connected to the encoder input record 7-416 and encoder input record 7-418. Preferably, the encoder records 7-416 encodes the data from the bus 7-414 in the format of low areal density (i.e., ANSI); and an encoder recording 7-418 encodes the data from the data bus 7-414 in the format of high density recording. The ANSI format is described, for example, the Draft proposals for cassettes 90 mm rewritable optical discs from January 1, 1991. The outputs of the encoders record 7-416 and 7-418 serially connected through the switch 7-422 to the input of the magneto-optical recording head of the read/write 7-420. The output of the read head 7-420 is connected through switch 7-424 alternately to the inputs of the decoder read 7-426 and decoder read 7-428. The decoder reads 7-426 decodes the data in the same format, i.e., ANSI, as the encoder records 7-416; and the decoder read 7-428 decodes data in the same format as the encoder records 7-418. Preferably, the methods of encoding and decoding, disclosed above, are used to implement the encoder records 7-418 and decoder read 7-428. The outputs of the decoders 7-426 and 7-428 connected to the data bus 7-414.

In response to the select signal mode electronic controls 7-430 switch set switches odskodneni between the data bus 7-414 and head of the read/write 7-420. In the second mode, the encoder records 7-416 and decoder read 7-426 connected between the data bus 7-414 and head of the read/write 7-420. The head of the read/write 7-420 reads the coded data from 90 mm optical disk and writes the coded data on the disk is entered using the drive 7-432, which is controlled by electronic means 7-434 drive control. The head of the read/write 7-420 is translated radially relative to the disk surface by electronic means 7-436 control positioning.

When 90 mm disk with a high recording density is introduced through the drive 7-432, the signal mode selection sets the system in the first mode. As a result, data from the host computer 7-410, which must be recorded on the disc, are ordered electronically interface 7-412 and encoded by the encoder records 7-418. The data read from the disk, decoded by the decoder read 7-428, are rearranged electronically interface 7-412 and transmitted to the host computer 7-410 for processing.

When 90 mm disc with a low density recording ANSI format accepted by the drive 7-432, the signal mode selection sets the system in the second mode. As a result, data from the host computer 7-410 that the recording 7-416. The data read from the disk, decoded by the decoder read 7-426, are rearranged electronically interface 7-412 and transmitted to the host computer 7-410 for processing.

Preferably, regardless of the format used for data storage, signal mode selection is written to each disk in the same format, ANSI low-density recording, and the system is installed by default into the appropriate mode, i.e. in the second mode. Signal mode selection may be recorded in the control area of the track in ANSI format. When the disk is installed in the drive 7-432, electronic drive 7-434 original electronically controlled positioning 7-436 to read the disk area where the recorded signal mode selection. The decoder reads 7-426 sounds the alarm mode selector, which is applied to electronic means 7-430 control switch. If the installed disk uses the ANSI low-density recording, the system remains in the second

mode, when the read signal of the mode selection. If the installed disc uses a format high-density recording, the system switches to the first mode, when the read signal selection mode.

In the testing modes can be used in different frequency laser or different lens focus. In this case, the select signal also is fed to the write head the read/7-420 to control the transition between frequencies or systems focusing lens. It is preferable to arrange the stored data in both formats so that they have the same number of bytes per sector, for example in the case of ANSI 512 bytes. In this case, the same electronic interface 7-412 can be used to organize memory or read from the disk data in both formats.

In accordance with the invention, the same head read/write 7-420, electronic controls positioning 7-436, drive 7-432, electronic drive 7-434, electronic interface 7-412 and data bus 7-414 can be used for recording and reading data from optical discs in different formats. The result is the format compatibility of high density recording, perfects the modern level of technology, ANSI industrial standards, using the same equipment.

With reference to Fig.95, 96, 98 will be described the preferred format for high-density recording optical disk. There are ten thousand paths from 0 to 9999, uparw, increasing to the periphery of the disc. The frequency of the data recorded in each zone, different and increases as one moves to the periphery of the disk (see Fig.95 and 98 with a description of the number of tracks in each zone, the number of sectors in each zone and the write frequency for each zone).

Unlike disks with a low density recording label format recorded with the ability to erase the disk using the same notation that is used for recording data, preferably mo. Such labels include formatting field sectors, header fields for each sector and track record management data. Unlike the header fields and the data fields of the sectors for all zones recorded on the same frequency. Description of the preferred option formatting sector are outlined below.

Formatting sector

The sector contains the label of the sector header and record fields, which can be written in 512 bytes of user data. Record fields can be blank or recorded by the user. The total length of the sector is 721 bytes (one byte is equivalent to nine channel bits) header and record fields with a frequency that varies from zone to zone, plus 80 Cana is received in the buffer, for example, in the last field of the sector. The length field of the header is 48 bytes. The length of the field entries equal 673 bytes.

Label sector (SM). Label sector consists of a combination that is not found in the data and is intended to provide a drive is able to identify the beginning of the sector without returning to fasolada chain. Tags sectors recorded with a fixed frequency of 11.6 MHz for all zones. The length of the label sector is 80 channel bits. The following diagram shows the specific combination in the format without returning to zero.

1111 1111 1100 0000

1111 1100 0000 0000

0000 1111 1100 0000

1111 1100 0000 1111

1111 1100 1001 0010

VFO fields

There are four fields marked VFO1, two VFO2, VFO3, intended for delivery controlled by the voltage generator fasolada circuit of the channel of the read signal sync phase. Information in the fields VFO1 and VFO3 identical in the combinations used and has the same length of 108 bits. Two fields marked VFO2 each have a length of 72 bits.

The label addresses (AM)

Address label consists of a combination not found in the data. This is a field for issuing a drive byte synchronization for subsequent identification field (ID). Its length is 9 bits and the R track and sector number for this sector, and the byte control cyclic redundancy code (CRC bytes). Each field consists of five bytes with the following contents:

1st byte byte the most significant bit of the track

2nd byte byte the low-order track

3rd byte bit 7 and 6

00 - ID field 0

01 - ID field 1

10 - ID field 2

11 - not assigned

bit 5 is zero

bit 4 to bit 0 - binary number of the sector of the 4th and 5th bytes CRC field.

The CRC bytes contain control information about a cyclic redundancy code calculated by the first three bytes according to equations 1, 2 and 3 presented in the table in Fig. 99. It is clear that 16 control bits of the ID field CRC should be calculated in the first three bytes of this field. The polynomial generator shown in equation (1) in Fig.99. The polynomial difference defined in equation (2), where bi denotes the bits of the first three bytes

and bi - inverted bits. The bit with index 23 is a bit of a higher order of the first byte. The contents of the 16 check bits ck of the CRC is determined by equation (3) in Fig.99, and C15 recorded for higher order bits of the fourth byte in the ID field.

Conclusion (RA)

Fields of imprisonment equal in length, both have 9 bits. There is a conclusion that follows ID3, and the conclusion that follows is based (RA) have 9 bits in the following combinations: 10 00100 01

Gaps (GAPs)

GAP1 is a field with a nominal length of 9 channel bits, GAP2 contains 54 channel bits. GAP1 should be zero, and GAP2 is not defined. GAP2 is the first field record field, it provides to drive a certain amount of time for processing after he had finished the reading of the header, and before you start recording or reading VFO3 field.

Synchronization

Field synchronization ensures your ability to get the byte synchronization for subsequent data fields. It has a length of 27 bits and recorded in the following combination of bits:

101000111 11010001 111000111

Data field

The data field is used to record user data. It has a length of 639 bytes (one byte=(channel bits) and contains:

512 bytes of user data;

4 bytes, the content of which is not defined in this standard and will be ignored when communicating;

4 bytes of parity, CRC;

80 byte parity code with error correction (ECC);

39 bytes for resynchronization.

Bytes of user data

Bytes of user data are available to the user for recording information.

The CRC bytes and ECC

Bytes control zicarelli for recovery of erroneous data. Code ECC is a reed-Solomon code 16 degrees.

Bytes Retiming

Bytes Retiming allow the drive to re-implement the byte synchronization after a significant defect in the data field. They have a length of 9 bits using the following combination

100010001

Their content and location in the data field are defined as follows. Field Retiming inserted between bytes Up and Up+1, where n is greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to 39.

The buffer field

The buffer field has a length of 108 channel bits.

Bytes of 8 bits in the three address fields and a data field, excluding bytes Retiming, is converted into channel bits according to Fig.100A and 100B. All other fields in the sector defined above, in the elements of the channel bits. Code entries used to record all data areas on the disk, is a Group Code (GCR 8/9).

According Fig.97, the recorded data are decoded RLL 2,7 encoder/decoder (codec) 7-502 in the low 128-Mbyte mode (low-density recording). GCR-codec 7-504 is used in a high performance 256-Mbyte mode (high-density recording). General to 8.5 mW from the inner to the outer zones in low-productivity mode. In high-performance mode, the pulse generator write 7-5-7 reduces the pulse duration of up to 28 NS, but the recording power is increased up to a level varying from 9.0 to 10.0 mW mW from internal zone to external. Scheme selection 7-509 alternately connects the pulse generator 7-506 or 7-507 with exciter laser diode magneto-optical head read/write, depending on the state of the attached bit NA control high-performance mode. Control bit NA is equal to zero in the low-performance mode and is equal to the unit in high-performance mode. A corresponding output signal is selected to control the exciter laser diode. The clock signal recording is generated by a frequency synthesizer in the data delimiter 7-508. The frequency is set by 11.6 MHz for low-performance mode and 10,59 to 15,95 MHz from internal to external zones for high-performance mode.

When playing pre-amplifier 7-510, powered by photodiodes in a magneto-optical head of the read/write head, can be installed optionally in the total mode (a+b) or in differential mode (a-b). In the case of total mode preamplifier 7-510 reads changes reflectors for safe d the identify label sector field VFO and data sector of a track record. There are 512 bytes of user data that is recorded in each pre-formatted sector. There are only 10,000 tracks, divided into 25 segments, which generally contain 128 MB of data for low-performance mode. In high-performance mode the drive is formatted using GCR-code. Has 40 sectors in the inner zone (i.e. zone 1), and the number of zones increases gradually up to 60 sectors in the outer zone (i.e. zone 21). And again, 512 bytes of user data are recorded in each sector, only 256 MB of data.

Write data to RLL 2,7-mode is also a record with the formation of pits. When these pittas are read in a differential mode (a-b), the signal appearing at the output of the pre-amplifier, identical pre-formatted peetam when read in total mode (a+b). This signal is only necessary to differentiate amplifier 7-512. Momentum corresponding to approximately the center of each pit is generated by converting into digital form the nominal output signal (VNOM P, VNOM N) with programmable filter. The filter cutoff frequency is set at 5.4 MHz for low-registersa through logic 7-518 rejectee impulse noise. The resulting signal, defined as HYSTOUT (Hysteresis), is fed to the separator data 7-508. The signal is also supplied to the system controller to detect the section labels. The results of the scan control bits NS divider parametron frequency synthesizer in the data delimiter 7-508 is set to 3, and the synthesizer is set by 11.6 MHz. Data synchronization is identical to the original data encoded RLL-codec 7-502. They are served on RLL codec 7-502 to decode and then used the data bus.

In high-performance mode is selected differential mode preamplifier 7-510. The playback signal appearing at the output of the pre-amplifier is a signal of no return to zero and requires detection of both fronts. This is done by double differentiation with differential amplifier and differentiator in the chip 7-514 programmable filter after passing the signal through the amplifier with AGC 7-516. The differentiator, the cutoff in the high-pass filter EQ on the chip 7-514 activated control bit NA. The cutoff of the filter is adjusted depending on the bits of the identification zone, apply the e). The output signal (VDIFF P, VDIFF N) with chips 7-514 converted into digital form and cleared surge in the logic circuit suppression of impulse noise 7-518. This scheme ensures noise reduction in low level signals. The threshold level is set as a control signal HYST applied to the logic circuit suppression of impulse noise 7-518. The output DATA signal P is supplied to the data delimiter. The results of the scan control bits NS divider parametron is set to 2, and the synthesizer is set to the appropriate frequency, as defined by the corresponding bit zone number, received from the system controller. The cutoff frequency of the programmable filter also depends on the bits of the zone, but only in high-performance mode. Synchrodyne identical to the original data encoded GCR code. They are served on GCR codec 7-504 for decoding and then to transfer used in the data bus. In General, the function reads the split between low and high modes.

RLL 2,7-codec 7-502 and the pulse generator write 7-506 presented by the encoder records 7-416 and decoder read 7-426 in Fig.94. GCR-codec 7-504 and the pulse generator write 7-507 before the -422 Fig.94. Internal management tool codecs 7-502 and 7-504, which alternately activates them depending on the scan control bits NS, represented by switch 7-424 in Fig.94. The preamplifier 7-510, power 7-512, amplifier with AGC 7-516, chip 7-514, the logic circuitry suppression of impulse noise 7-518 and data delimiter 7-508 used in both modes, as in low-productivity and high-performance. Thus, they are presented partly as a decoder reading 7-426 and decoder read 7-428.

Means mechanical junction

In Fig.120 and 121 presents two variants means of mechanical decoupling 9-10 and 9-12, respectively, made in accordance with the invention. Means of mechanical decoupling 9-10 and 9-12 are perfectly suited for use in optical drive for CD-ROMs, laser disks or devices magneto-optical recording and playback. Means of mechanical decoupling 9-10 and 9-12 can be used in any such system. The first of them - 9-10 shown in Fig.120, and the second - 9-12 - Fig.121. A means for mechanical decoupling 9-12 contains ribs compression 9-14. Their function is the absorption of the compressive forces. Tools 9-10, 9-12 may be you who of movement of the optical carriage hit solid metal. Block 9-20 fit the end of the pole piece 9-16 and provides isolation from vibration and compensation of thermal expansion.

Means of mechanical decoupling 9-10 and 9-12 should be made of material with minimal creep. Can be used in silicone rubber, polyurethane, plastic, obtained by injection molding. In this case, the material has been used brand MS40G14H-4RED.

Specialists in the art it should be clear that the means for mechanical decoupling 9-10 and 9-12 are variants suitable for use in specific systems, and each of them in General includes first means of reducing the undesirable effects of mechanical forces on the movable component of the drive, and second means for maintaining a first means between the component and the source of undesirable mechanical forces, and this provides mechanical isolation of this component. In each of the funds junction 9-10, 9-12 the first tool designed as a impact absorber or brake emphasis 9-18 and may include at least one edge compression 9-14. The set of edges of the compression 9-14, shown in Fig.121, provide absorption of compressive forces. Vtoro the form of end of unit pole pieces 9-16. The first tool is made of material with minimal creep, preferably selected from the group consisting of silicone rubber, polyurethane and plastics, produced by molding under pressure. The first tool in the tools mechanical decoupling 9-10 and 9-12 provides an impact energy absorption and mechanical isolation and made in the form of a braking stop 9-18, preventing the strike movable carriage on a hard surface.

Firmware

Appendix a to this manual contains a description of the hexadecimal code used in these tools. The following sections contain detailed functional and structural determination hexadecimal code are described in Appendix A. As described below, the software product S interacts with the small computer system interface (SCSI interface) to access the main computer. The software contains the necessary code to initiate and perform read, write, and search through the interface using a digital data processor, and it also contains the commands module drive, which interacts directly with many of learie receive SCSI commands from the host computer. For functions that do not require access to the media module SCSI control tasks or performs functions, or controls the module lower level to perform these functions. For all other functions, the module SCSI control sends a request for execution of a function at task level the drive to run and waits for a response from the task level drive display perform the specified function.

The task level of the drive, in turn, controls the various modules to perform the requested functions. These modules include the commands module drive module interrupt drive m formatter. These modules interact with each other, with the module Troubleshooting module functioning in exceptional situations and with a digital signal processor to perform these functions.

Module command drive sends commands to the digital signal processor or the hardware elements to control the movement of items of hardware. The formatter sends the command module commands the drive to format media. Any defects in the media, found in this procedure, are stored in the module eliminate Neispravna signal processor and hardware elements is in the form of signals completion of instruction execution and interrupt held in the module interrupts the drive. In addition, the module interrupts the drive provides registration interrupt other modules, so that when an interrupt occurs, the registration module receives a notification of the interruption.

When the interruption of the drive indicates a fault or exception, the module interrupt causes of the module commands the drive information relating to the status of the media and the drive, and the module is functioning in exceptional situations uses this information, trying to restore a healthy state. Without missing status of a fault on the task level of drive and SCSI interface with the main computer module functioning in exceptional situations can pass the command module commands the drive or formatter, trying to restore function. Module interrupt drive may make several attempts before you finally remove the function and give the status of a fault on the task level of the drive. This procedure in exceptional cases may be used for any of the functions of the drive, for example, to search, the pushing out disk, magnetic offset and temsamani, which precisely defines the problem, allowing the SCSI interface to determine this information to the host computer. It is clear that the module is functioning in an exceptional situation can be contained in the module interrupts the drive.

When enabled, the magnetic bias turns on the magnet, and the generated offset is controlled via a serial digital to analogue Converter (ADC). This control is performed to achieve the desired range or until 5 MS, in the latter case, on the objective level, the drive is transmitted to the status of the fault.

Is the temperature control of the main Board. The characteristics of the media may change with increasing temperature. At high density information recording beam recording with a constant intensity can cause overlapping of the information recorded temperature changes and corresponding changes in the characteristics of the media. Therefore, by controlling the ambient temperature in the enclosure, the software may adjust the power of the writing beam, taking into account temperature-sensitive characteristics of the media, or may carry out re-calibration.

Furthermore, the characteristics of the recording beam and the read beam is changed with regard to the media. Various media produced by different manufacturers may have different optical characteristics. When the media is 'desired speed of rotation, with the read identification code. Information about optical characteristics related to the media that is loaded into non-volatile NVR (EZWPW) in the manufacture of the disk, and information corresponding to a specific media that is loaded into the digital signal processor when reading the identification code. If the identification code is not read, the power of the reading beam is set to a lower value slowly increases until, until you read the identification code.

When control and power change of the read beam or the recording beam is used many digital and more DACS.

The present invention also provides a method of changing the rotation speed of the carrier from the initial speed to the desired speed, with lower and upper limits. This method includes the steps of application of force to the carrier to change the speed of rotation of the carrier from the initial speed to the first lower limit value established between the source rotational speed and the desired speed of rotation, when the application of force generation of the first signal when the rotation speed of the medium exceeds the first upper limit value, and when the operation of application of force and after generation of the first signal to generate a second signal when the rotation speed of the carrier exceeds the lower limit, and after such termination of application of force to the media. In a particular embodiment, this method of operation termination of application of force may include the installation operation of the second upper limit on the tolerable upper limit of the desired speed of rotation, setting the lower limit value to the lower acceptable limit of the desired speed of rotation and stopping of the application is thinned to the desired speed, preferably more than the lower limit of the desired speed of rotation. In addition, the upper limit allowed by half a percentage point higher than the required rotational speed and the lower limit by half a percentage point lower than the desired speed of rotation.

Another way that matches the present invention involves changing the speed of rotation of the carrier from the initial speed to the desired speed of rotation, having a first limit and the second limit. This method includes the following operations: application of force to the carrier to change the speed of rotation of the carrier from the initial speed to the first intermediate limit set between the initial speed and the desired speed of rotation, when the application of force generation of the first signal when the rotation speed of the carrier passes through the first intermediate limit value, when the application of force and after generation of the first signal to generate the second signal when the rotation speed of the carrier passes through the first limit, and then stopping the application of force to the media. In a specific exemplary embodiment of the method of operation pretrial desired speed of rotation, installation of the second working limit on the second allowable limit of the desired speed of rotation and terminating the application of force to the carrier, when the rotation speed of the carrier is between the working limits. The difference between the first operating limit and the required rotation speed is preferably equal to half of the percentage required speed, and the difference between the second operating limit and the desired speed is also preferably equal to half of the percentage required speed.

When the motor spindle is driven from a state of rest or state of rotation at a slower speed, the module commands the drive writes the digital signal processor of the upper limit value for the speed of rotation. This upper limit is lower than the desired speed. When the spindle reaches this upper limit value, the digital signal processor generates an interrupt. At this point, the speed of the spindle motor can be reduced. The module then commands the drive writes another upper limit value in the digital signal processor. This new upper limit is the lower acceptable limit for normal aboutsa in a digital signal processor. These final limits determine the operating range of spindle speed, which may be a deviation of the order of 1%.

The algorithm of promotion or inhibition of the spindle motor, although disclosed here is applied to a magneto-optical drive, equally applicable to optical drives, without any restrictions, such as disk drives with ROM on the CD-ROM, floppy disk drives, CD-discs, mini-discs, the discs are write-once and repeated reading, VCD, audio-CD. In addition, this algorithm is applicable to drives on magnetic media, as fixed disks and removable disks.

During rotation of the carrier initially rotates at the low speed to ensure normal drive operation, as described above. At this moment read the identification code. If it is not read, the media is driven with the next highest speed for normal operation, and try re-reading the identification code. This procedure is repeated up until the identification code or will not be read at high speed for normal operation, in this case forms the different types of media in the drive. First, this may include electrically erasable flash EPROM, for example, 256 Kbytes. Secondly, it can be static NVR, for example, 256 Kbytes. And finally, it can be nonvolatile NVR, for example, 2 Kbytes.

Some of the information provided in the following sections, including such as SCSI software drive, exceptions cache with advance read and architecture software drive accompanied by a definition of "TBD" ("TBD"), which shows that the actual implementation of the modules still has not been determined that some of the parameters associated with the optimization environment, but are not critical to the function or operation, has not yet been agreed or that some modules have become unnecessary due to the execution of other modules, as shown in the executed code in Appendix a and as described in subsequent sections of the description. Each of the objects with the sign "TBD" associated with certain conditions of design, which should not affect a person skilled in the field of technology in the implementation of the present invention in the form as it is here disclosed. Modules whose implementation is not yet defined, can be implemented as follows.

Fashion is th table of fault on the part of the media. When pre-formatted media is inserted in the drive module Troubleshooting will read the Troubleshooting table from the media and load it into memory. Module Troubleshooting can then refer to the Troubleshooting table to ensure that the digital signal processor or hardware elements will not attempt to gain access to the defective part of the media. Team SEEC_COMP_ON and SEEC_ COMP_ OFF respectively activate and deaktiviert algorithm, which optimizes the time search for the corresponding point on the media. Commands can activate the algorithm directly, you can set a flag indicating another module activation algorithm, or can generate an interrupt that causes another module to activate the algorithm. In addition, other embodiments of may be obvious to a person skilled in the art.

Team NORMAL_PLL_BWIDTH, HGH_PLL_BWIDTH, VHGH_PLL_BWIDTH can read values from memory and saved to the memory for reading the chip.

Power calibration Records for 2 and a Power Calibration Records for 4 can be carried out in a similar manner. In the manufacture of the value of the DAC control mo the DAC, and values identification can be determined. These values identification can be stored in the memory of the drive. When you use the drive value from the DAC control power account for the source of radiant energy and the corresponding values can be measured. These values are up compared with the memorized similar values as long as they will not be equalized within acceptable limits. In addition, according to this procedure, it is possible to calibrate the recording power in accordance with the temperature, as described above. Re-calibration is performed, as described above, based on temperature, media type, and other factors. In addition, re-calibration of tracking systems can be performed by transmission of commands to the digital signal processor to install a tracking system in accordance with certain variables.

Manufacturing specifications require that the information described above, which is determined during manufacture of the drive, was recorded and stored in the memory of the drive.

Entered from the front panel Request function Eject Tapes generates an interrupt drive. It can determine the status of the drive and, based on this information, Libi software are optimization issues. In particular, the displacement of the block carriage requires the power consumption. Power requirements associated with the moving speed of the carriage, and the heat is determined by the required capacity. The software aims to minimize the velocity of the block carriage, without affecting the access time for the specified command.

If the command is placed on the queue in the software, the modules in the software determine the initial radial position of the carriage relative to the carrier, the initial position around the circumference of the block carriage relative to the carrier and the initial circumferential velocity of the media. The software modules also determine the final radial position of the carriage relative to the carrier and end position on the circumference of the block carriage relative to the carrier. The software then calculates the trajectory velocity for the block carriage. The trajectory velocity is associated with the initial radial position, the initial position on the circumference, the final radial position, the end position of the circle and initial peripheral speed. The trajectory speed is calculated so that when the move is retki moved along the radius and circumference end position essentially at the same time.

The software provides a moving block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the obtained trajectory speed. The block carriage can start moving from the initial position to the end position at a given speed, before the software will calculate the desired trajectory speed. Instead of computing the trajectory velocity relative to the initial radial position and position on the circumference, the trajectory velocity can be calculated from the intermediate radial position and the intermediate position along the circle. Intermediate position along the radius and circumference correspond to the position on the radius and the circumference of the block carriage when the software finishes the calculation of the trajectory speed.

In addition, the software can detect the target circumferential velocity of the media. In this case, the trajectory velocity is additionally linked with the destination peripheral speed. The block carriage is moved from the initial position to a final position on the merits in accordance with the trajectory, speed, and the rotational speed of the carrier is changed from the initial district / min net the USU, and on a circle, essentially for the same time. The media can reach the destination peripheral speed as before, and at the same time, or after the arrival of the block carriage is in its end position.

The optimization algorithm characteristics of the software, while disclosed here is applied to a magneto-optical drive, equally applicable to optical drives, without any restrictions, such as disk drives with ROM on the CD-ROM, floppy disk drives, CD-discs, mini-discs, the discs are write-once and repeated reading, VCD, audio-CD. In addition, this algorithm is applicable to drives on magnetic media, as fixed disks and removable disks.

SCSI command Eject a Cartridge can be cancelled using the select button. It can be made in the form of a DIP switch.

Test the External Codec and Test Connecting the Logic Circuits are executed as part of the self-Calibration At Power-up, provide for reading and writing information under certain conditions in order to ensure the proper functioning of the External Codec and Connecting Logic Circuits.

SCSI software drive

The following sections will describe the functional characteristics of SCSI software to drive Jupiter-1 for magneto-optical disk 5,25 inch. SCSI software tools are part of the controller code that is executed by the CPU S. This discussion is not intended to describe the functional characteristics of the controller code that is executed by the digital signal processor.

Requirements to the software that were used in the development of this aspect of the present invention, is included in this discussion and are contained in the section entitled A. Requirements to the software. For reference here can be given the following documents: 1) Cirrus Logic CL-SM330, Optical Disk ENDEC/ECC, April 1991, 2) Cirrus Logic CL-SM331, SCSI Optical Disc Controller, April 1991, 3) MOST MANUFACTURING,Inc., 1,7 ENDEC/FORMATTER, August 2, 1994, 4) MOST Manufacturing, Inc., Jupiter -1 Product Specification, September 15, 1994, 5) MOST Manufacturing, Inc., 80C1 what provisions Jupiter, shown in tables 1-5 below. In addition to the transfer of supported commands table 1-5 identifies commands that are not valid when granting them to the drive, if you set the media type 1x, CCW,-ROM, P-ROM. The column for P-ROM shows the commands issued by the blocks that are in the group to read-only media on the P-ROM.

A full description of a set of SCSI commands that must be supported, contained in the technical specifications on the product Jupiter-1, section 9, Support SCSI commands. It is important to note that commands the Record Selection and the Choice of Identification will not be supported programmatically Jupiter-1.

SCSI message: SCSI messages that will be supported by the software Jupiter-1, shown below in table 6.

It is important to note that the message to Finish the I/o is not supported.

Pages SCSI modes: mode Pages, which will be supported by the software Jupiter below in table 7.

Saved pages will not be supported by the software Jupiter. It is important to note that the mode pages 20h and 21h will not be supported.

Reset: the reset will be executed by the drive in response to the SCSI command, the Bus Reset, the Reset bargain, described below in their respective sections.

SCSI Bus Reset: When the signal is given SCSI Bus Reset, it generates an interrupt INT3, issued on S. Use INT3 provides the drive responsiveness to reset, how to Hard or Programmable Reset. However, the use INT3 assumes that the interrupt vector for INT3 still correct. If the software inadvertently overwrite the item in the Table of Interrupt Vectors (IVT), the reset will not restore the drive. The only option, the user will be power off the drive and start again.

Routine Maintenance Interrupt (ISR) INT3 must be identified using the buttons select whether Hard or Programmable Reset. If Hard Reset is blocked, it will be Programmable Reset.

Hard (SCSI) Reset: When the drive is detected command is a SCSI Bus Reset and the select button Hard Reset enabled (shows Hard Reset), drive 1) will not attempt to process any commands, ongoing, 2) does not record any data that can be buffered in NVR (i.e. in the Cache and all pending commands, 5) to perform the operations described in the next section. Sequence Power on, Hard Reset, 6) will be set for each page of the modes to their default values, 7) will set the condition interrupt block.

Without the use of hardware line reset to reset the various chips on the Board, the software must use software reset chips that have such means. Software must initialize the registers, as described on page 36 of the manual Cirrus Logic SM330 and on page 47 of the manual Cirrus Logic SM331 taking into account differences between hard and programmable reset ICS.

Programmable SCSI Reset: When the drive has detected a SCSI command, the Bus Reset and the select button Hard Reset blocked (shows Programmable Reset), drive 1) will not attempt to process any commands, ongoing, 2) does not record any data that can be buffered in NVR (i.e., in the Write Cache) media, 3) will not save any SCSI components, 4) will remove from the queue all pending commands, 5) will perform operet set for each page of the modes to their default values, 7) will establish the terms of the interrupt block.

Reset Player-machine: If the Player machine issued the Reset command Player-machine during the sequence of power on the drive and should ignore the command to Eject the disc, b) must wait until the Reset command of the Player, the machine will be cancelled before executing SCSI initialization. Player-the machine can issue the Reset command at any time to change the SCSI ID (identifier) of the drive.

Power failure 12: If the 12V power supply falls below a certain value (TBD), generates a software reset, passed on S, SM330, SM331, RLL(1,7) external codec. Once the codec is installed in its original state, he will manage the reset tracking systems in their initialized state, which is established and, in turn, will reset the digital signal processor, and tracking systems.

Conditions cannot be installed in its original state: When the drive is detected unrecoverable error (see table 8), is formed by a message on the conditions of the impossibility of the installation to its original state. This condition forces the drive to respond to the Command Opesn the additional classifier error code recognition, specific errors. SCSI command Transmission Diagnosis can eliminate the source of the error and hardware to resolve the condition of impossibility of installation to its original state. If the command Transmission Diagnosis did not lead to success in Troubleshooting hardware, you will need a SCSI Bus Reset to clear this condition. SCSI Bus Reset adopted if the drive conditions of the impossibility of the installation to its original state, causing the drive to perform a Hard Reset and perform full diagnostics. Thus, any serious error, when performing the operation will be first to interrupt the current operation and then to prevent the drive to change the state of the media in subsequent operations.

Support multi-initiator: Support for multiple initiators will be provided by the software Jupiter. All incoming requests will be maintained software to streamline requests from multiple initiators for teams of separation. Tagged ordered all teams initially will not be supported, however, the building software does not preclude the ability to add tools such poldom disconnected access command to the media, software should ensure the maintenance of the new commands while maintaining the connection. The exact way to ensure this opportunity is not yet defined. Teams that will be maintained without separation below in table 9.

SCSI response REQUEST/CONFIRMATION: Chip Cirrus SM331 takes the first six bytes of Block Descriptor SCSI command and generates an interrupt. The software should then use Programmed I/O to transfer any remaining bytes. If the program has been delayed, will halt commands between the sixth and seventh bytes. The waiting time for the drive to respond to the interrupt Cirrus SCSI should be within the following range: 20 ISS - acceptable value, 40 ISS - poor value 150 μs is unacceptable value.

SCSI command request: the Drive will respond to a SCSI inquiry command to return to the level of revision software for SCSI software and software digital signal processor (DSP), the checksum for SCSI software flash EPROM and EPROM LTP and a bit indicating the supported currently function Zhestkov what Bodom, is implemented with the self-calibration At Power-up, in response to SCSI command Transmission Diagnosis or when the drive detects cable connection the serial interface diagnostics.

Self-calibration At Power-up: When performing this procedure, the drive will perform the checks listed below. A detailed description of each test is listed below in the section titled:

C. Definition Of Self-Calibration At Power-Up. These tests include the following: 1) check registers and flags block S, 2)check NVR CPU, 3) checking the interrupt vector block S, 4) test ROM checksum, 5) inspection of registers SM331, 6) controller test sequence SM331, 7) checking the codec SM330, 8) checking the external codec, 9) check the connecting logic (CRL), 10) check the buffer NVR, 11) self-calibration at power-LTP, 12) test magnet offset.

If, during the verification buffer NVR is determined that any of the buffer NVR is defective, the drive is recognized unusable. The drive will respond to SCSI commands, but will only generate error messages hardware. Check buffer Zo of time the drive will respond with a busy signal on the SCSI commands. After initialization, drive the rest of the buffer NVR will be checked in the background (see Sequence Power-up). If the background check has detected that any of the buffer NVR is defective, the drive will generate a message about the condition of the impossibility of the installation to its original state.

Command Transmission Diagnosis: When the drive receives a SCSI command Transmission Diagnostics, the drive will perform the following diagnostics: 1) test ROM checksum, 2) controller test sequence SM331, 3) Checking SCSI interface SM331, 4) checking the codec SM330, 5) checking the external codec, 6) checking the CRL, 7) check the buffer NVR, 8) verification of the magnet displacement. Inspections by the command Transmission Diagnostics, will be the same as that performed by the drive when performing the self-Calibration At Power-up, as described above.

The Serial interface Diagnostics: When the power drive is enabled, it will run diagnostics on items 1-4, as described in the self-Calibration at Power-up, and then carry out the test for determining the presence of the connected interface cable amid Power (SPIT). If the cable is detected, the drive will abort SPIT and prepare for the reception of the diagnostic commands through the serial interface diagnostics. The diagnostic commands and their format are not the subject of this discussion.

Initialize chipset: Initialization SM330: this section describes the initialization block Cirrus Logic SM330. Mnemonics used for registers SM330 in table 31 in section C. Registers SM330. The operations performed during initialization Cirrus Logic SM330, are listed below:

1) is the current value of the register output General purpose (EDC_GPO).

2) the Chip is set to the initial state by setting fields EDC_CHIP_RESET, EDC_OPER_HALT, EDC_ERROR_RESET in EDC_CFG_REG1.

3) Field EDC_ VU_PTR_SRC_MODE, SDC_130MM_MODE, EDC_1_SPEED_TOL installed in EDC_CFG REG2.

4) Register of EDC+SPT is set to the default number of sectors per track, SECT_PER_TRK_RLL_1X_512_1.

5) Field EDC_SM_WIN_POS, DC_SMM (shifted to the left by 3), EDC_SMS are set in the register EDC_SMC.

6) Register EDC_RMC is set to the default value of 2.

7) Register EDC_ID_FLD_SYN_CTL set to default values 2 of 3 ID and 9 out of 12 Marks Data Synchronization.

8) Register EDC_WIN_CTL mandatory UN paid what.

10) the Saved values from the register EDC_GPO recorded in the register.

11) Register EDC_CFG_REG3 initialized in h.

12) All interrupts are cleared by writing 0xFF to the registers EDC_INT_ STAT, EDC_MED_ERR_STAT.

13) All of the interrupt circuits are blocked by recording h registers EDC_INT_EN_REG, EDC_MED_ERREN.

14) Count byte synchronization sequence controller is initialized by writing 40 in the case EF_SYNC_BYTE_CNT_LMT.

15) a pointer to the Address of the Buffer memory Data is initialized to zero (registers EDC_DAT_BUF_ADR_L, EDC_DAT_BUF_ADR_M, EDC_DAT_BUF_ADR_H).

16) Register EDC_TOF_WIN_CTL cleared in h.

17) Register EDC_SM_ALPC_LEN cleared in h.

18) Register EDC_PLL_LOCK_CTL initialized in he.

19) Register EDC_PLL_RELOCK_CTL cleared in h.

20) Register EDC_LFLD_WIN_CTL cleared in h.

21) Cells NVR Offset-correcting Code errors h and h are set to zero.

22) Cells NVR Offset-correcting Code errors 0x0F and h are set to zero.

23) Cells NVR Offset-correcting Code error 0x20 and h are set to zero.

24) the Threshold NVR Corrector Code error correction for sector correction is initialized to 0x0F.

25) the Threshold NVR Correct The O is initialized by setting to its original state bits DSP_DIR_, BIAS_EN_, BIAS_E_W_, SCLK, SDO, MIRROR_TX_.

27) Led drive off.

Initialization SM331: This section describes the initialization Cirrus Logic SM331. Mnemonics used for registers SM331 presented in table 32 in section D. Registers SM331.

Initialization SM331 includes reading the States of the buttons and initializing means SCSI, Administrator of the Buffer memory, the Sequence Controller chip. To read the state of the buttons with three States in the SCSI bus software performs the following operations:

1) SM331 is set to the initial state by setting BM_SW_RESET in the register BM_MODE_CTL.

2)SM331 derived from the initial condition by cleaning BM_SW_RE-SET from the register BM_MODE_CTL.

3) Field SF_LOCAL_HINT_EN, SF_LOCAL_DINT_EN, SF_SCSI_IO_40_47H are set in the register SF_MODE_CTL.

4) Bit BM_MOE_DISABLE is set in the register BM_MODE_CTL.

5) Register BM_SCHED_DATA is read twice. (First reading initiates the actual data transfer from the buffer memory, from which it is possible to sample at the second reading.)

6) Read value is stored as a value corresponding to the selection buttons.

7) Bits BM_MOE_DISABLE cleared in reg the BR> 1) the SCSI ID is read with a 20-pin connector through the case GLIC_JB_ INP_REG and is placed in the variable target_id.

2) the Operation Permission Control for SCSI parity is read from the 20-pin connector through the case GLIC_JB_INP_REG.

3)Register SCSI_MODE_CTL determined by SCSI ID and Permissions parity SCSI, set field CLK_PRESCA-LE.

4) Register phase control SCSI_PHA_CTL cleared in h.

5) Register control synchronization SCSI_SYNC_CTL is initialized with the value (0x0F).0x10.

6) Stack the Administrator of the Buffer memory is cleared by writing h in case BM_STAT_CTL.

7) Field BM_SCSI_DATA_2T, BM_DRAM_BURST_EN are set in the register BM_ STAT_CTL Administrator Control Buffer memory.

8) Register BM_XFER_CTL control Transfer Administrator Buffer memory is initialized in h.

9) Register SCSI_SEL_REG ID re-select the SCSI set to the value of the ID of the SCSI drive.

10) Bits SCSI_RESET, SCSI_ATTN, SCSI_OFST_OVERRUN, SCSI_BUS_FREE, SCSI_ BFR_ PTY_ERR, SCSI_BUS_PTY_ERR are set in the status register SCSI SCSI_ STAT_1.

11) Register SCSI_STAT_2 is initialized to 0xFF.

12) SCSI Interrupts are blocked by recording h in case SCSI_NT_EN_ 2.

Operations M_SCSI_DATA-2T, BM_DRAM_BURST_EN are set in the register BM_ TAT_TL Administrator Control Buffer memory.

2) Register BM_EFER_CTL Transfer control Administrator Buffer memory is initialized in h.

3) Field BM_DRAM, BM_256K_RAM, BM_PTY_EN, BM_NO_WS are set in the register BM_MODE_CTL Control Modes Administrator Buffer memory.

4) Sync Dynamic SUPPV is initialized registers BM_TIME_CTL, BM_DRAM_REF_PER.

5) the Size of the Buffer NVR is encoded in the register BM_BUFF_SIZE.

6) a pointer to the Address of the Disk is initialized in h in registers BM_DAPL, BM_DAPM, BM_DAPH.

7) a pointer to the Address of the Main computer is initialized in h in registers BM_HAPL, BM_HAPM, VMAN.

8) a pointer to the Address of the Stop is initialized in h in registers BM_SAPL, BM_SAPM, BM_SAPH.

The operations performed during initialization of the Controller Sequence comprising SM331, are as follows:

1) the Controller Sequence is stopped by writing 0x1F (address stop) in the case SF_SEQ_STRT_ADR address stop Controller Sequence.

2) the default sector size of 512 bytes is set in the register SF_SECT_SIZE sector size by writing h.

3) the Count byte is eracy is initialized by setting the field SF_DATA_BR_FLD_EN.

5) Register SF_BRANCH_ADR address branching is initialized in h.

6) Interrupt Controller sequences are blocked by recording h in case SF_INT_EN.

7) Set the default memory management record is loaded into the Controller Sequence Format.

Initialize External RLL(1,7) Codec: (TBD)

Initializing the Connecting Logic Circuits (PCA): Initialization of the PCA includes the steps: 1) setup bits Override the Commit Gating the Read register CLIC_JB_CTRL_REG and 2) enable all interrupts in the register GLIC_INT_EN_REG.

Initializing SCSI: Software initialization SCSI will use the 20-pin connector as the source of the SCSI ID and Permissions parity SCSI drive. If the cable is connected, the signals will be excited by the drive. If the cable is not connected, then the same pins will use the jumpers set to indicate the used SCSI ID and parity SCSI.

Load SCSI bus in the drive will be selected with the select button. Does not require interaction with the software to support the load SCSI.

Follow the Uchenie power. Columns Power Programmable Reset, Hard Reset identify which operations are performed in a state of power-on, Hard or Programmable Reset. If the condition cannot be installed in their original state when the received reset signal, which must generate Programmable Reset, the reset will in such circumstances be as Hard Reset, forcing the drive to complete the diagnostic procedure.

At the moment the block S checks whether to perform a Hard Reset or to exercise an option called software-hardware (Firm) Reset. The latter will not reset the DSP. This method saves time, without requiring a download code LTP or reinitialization milestones tracking circuits LTP. Hardware Reset will check the correctness of the signature NVR (TBD) in the CPU memory unit S, making sure that there is no condition that cannot be installed in its original state and that GCHQ is able to adequately respond to commands to Get Status. If any of these conditions is not met, then the drive will perform a Hard Reset. The continuation of the description in table 11.

Interrupting the Drive is generated either by the hardware, associated with the CRL, or GCHQ. Interrupts are passed through the LTP SLS for forming a combined source of the interrupt (INT2) to block S. The following sections describe the interrupts that are generated by the LTP. In section Interrupts the CRL describes the interrupts that are generated by other hardware interconnected with SLS. The software can determine the source of the interrupt by examining the state of the Status Register Interrupt SAS (Base Address+0.5 h).

The DSP interrupt: interrupt Sources LTP can be divided into two categories, which include interrupt premature termination and termination, do not lead to premature termination. Interrupt premature termination is generated by the DSP, when there is a catastrophic event that requires immediate blocking of funds accounts of the drive. When the DSP generates an interrupt premature termination, hardware drive cancel Strobe Read, turn off the laser and generate an Interrupt Drive unit S. If the drive generates an interrupt, not leading to premature termination, for a block C Interrupt is generated only Drive the of in the DSP interrupt premature termination, presented in table 12.

The Focus error is generated in the DSP when the signal of the focus error exceeds a programmable threshold unit S. The Tracking error is generated in the DSP when the signal of the tracking error exceeds a programmable threshold unit S. Error Management Capacity of the Read Laser is formed in the DSP when the laser output can no longer be controlled by the DSP within the thresholds established by the unit S. Error setting the Spindle Speed is generated in the DSP when the spindle speed drops below the minimum number of rpm installed unit S, or rises above the maximum number of rpm installed unit S.

Interrupts that do Not lead To Premature Termination formed GCHQ: the Conditions that cause the formation through the LTP data interrupt is presented in table 13.

Interruption of form 10-sec Interval Timer is generated in the DSP in response to a signal that his internal clock counted out 10 seconds. Block S maintains the countdown clock, powered in hour minute intervals. Each interrupt type 10-sec Interval Timer moves forward given hour is Olney sum command is not consistent with the contents of the byte checksum in the team, received from block S. The message Unknown Command is generated in the DSP when the contents of the command byte is received from block S, is not a valid command for the LTP.

The message Is Defective seek Error is generated in the DSP when a) the first element in the Table, the Search Speed is empty, or (b) Chain Focus is not closed (this can occur if the search command is issued as the first command to initialize the LTP). Installation errors will be shown as Error Tracking. The LTP will block Error Tracking (TBD) MS after closure Servo Circuit to prevent false Error Tracking during installation. Error message Ejection of the Cassette is formed in the DSP when the signal Limits the Buoyancy is not found in the LTP within (TBD) ISS.

Interrupt CRL: CRL provide an interface to various input and output signals that must process block S. Input signals that are identified as forming interrupts SLS presented in table 14.

Interrupt type Reset Player-machine is formed by the CRL when it encounters the rising edge of the input signal Reset Player-and is seen by the CRL when it detects a rising edge of the input Request signal Lower Power Player box 20-pin connector of the drive. Interrupt type ejection of the Cassette from the Player of the machine is formed by the CRL when it encounters the rising edge of the input signal to Eject a Cartridge from the Player box 20-pin connector of the drive. Interrupt type ejection of the Cassette from the Front Panel is formed by the CRL when it detects a rising edge of the signal from the switch Eject a Cartridge on the Front Panel. Interrupt types the Introduction Cassette (cassette found in the mouth of a drive) is formed by SLS upon detection of rising or falling edge of the signal from the Switch Introducing the Cartridge. This interrupt can be generated by the hardware CRL, however, currently there is no real switch for the formation of such termination. There are currently no software support for this regime. Interruption of the Presence of the Cassette (the cassette is mounted on the sleeve drive) is formed by the CRL when it detects the leading or trailing edge of the signal from the Switch Installation Tape.

Restore Interrupts Drive: Interrupt Code of the Drive must serve all Interrupts Drive and return the Program Interrupt Service (POP) and the Processing Program. Program Interrupt service Drive should be run as the highest priority and may suspend Program Servicing Interrupts SCSI and/or Disk and block any operations causing the drive in a safe known state. As soon as the operation is blocked, Program Servicing Interrupts SCSI or Disk can continue and exit. Part of the Processing Program can then be freely performed, and try to get the drive in a known state. Often there may be multiple Interrupt the Drive, when the drive goes through a number of defect States, which leads to samoopredeleniyu Program Processing.

When the DSP detects Interruption of the Drive, the corresponding interrupt status will be formed by SLS (INT2), passed in block S. If the interrupt is an interrupt premature termination, the CRL also cancels the Recording and turns off the laser. Program Interrupt Service Drive will stop any ongoing operation of the Drive by stopping the Controller Sequence Formatting SM331, SM330 and external codec. Incremental microprocessor can be predusmotritelnyh information.

Program Interrupt Drive provides identification of the causes of interruption of the Drive, clean the source of the interrupt, the start of the recovery procedures to bring the drive to a known state and verify that the error condition is cleared. The source of the Interruption of the Drive is determined by the analysis of the Status Register Interrupt SAS (Base Address+0.5 h) and may request the current state of the LTP. The relative priorities of possible errors discussed in the next section. If the LTP is the source of the interrupt, the Interrupt handler of the Drive transmits the command to the DSP reset conditions interrupt and to clear the status bits. The recovery procedure errors for each of the different error conditions described below.

The priorities of the Error Interrupt Drive: this section lists the various error conditions Interruption of the Drive recognized by the drive Jupiter, as well as the relative priorities for each type of error. Table 15 presents the Priorities of the Interrupt Drive to the relative ranking of each of these errors.

Restore Error Interrupt Drive: this section describes the various error conditions Interrupt Discofamily error conditions and the pseudo-code for handling error conditions.

Presents the pseudo-code is developed on the basis of Program Interrupt Drive, currently used in conjunction with the product RMD-5300, and is intended for use as recommended. The real code uses a lot of flags to further Refine priorities Interrupt the Drive.

Variables SuggSenseKey, SuggSenseCode, SuggSenseCodeQ presented in pseudocode that represent Data fields Up SCSI accordingly, the Key Recognition, Error Code and Additional Qualifier Code Recognition. Variable unclr_cond_flag is used to specify when in Drive there is a fatal condition. This condition causes the drive to respond to a Command Identifying a Query Key Recognition Hardware Error (HARDWARE ERROR), Error Code Internal Error Controller (INTERNAL CONTROLLER ERROR) and an Additional Qualifier Code Recognition (ASCQ) the current value in the variable uncler_cond_flag. Reset or command Send Diagnostic SCSI can clear a fatal condition, forcing the drive to perform a full diagnostic procedure. In this way, any serious error detected during operation, will not change the state of the media in the disco who, The optical Status of the Drive, D - Status CPF, G - Status Interrupt SLS. The standard Status and Optical Status are modified status codes for ESDI drive. In the following section, the Command Status of the Drive provides information for ESDI Status. At the beginning of each subsection lists the status bits that are used to determine that there is a specific error condition. Given then the pseudocode describes how you handled such a condition.

Defect Commands (see Diagram 1 at the end of the description).

Defect command occurs when the detected defective checksum command in the LTP or LTP adopted the wrong team. None of these errors will not occur in the final product, obtained in accordance with this invention. So, if this happens, then these errors will be likely to be an indication of the error of another kind, for example, a defect of memory, which will be detected in the process of being reset required to clear an unrecoverable state.

The deviation of the disk (see diagram 2 at the end of the description).

Error Variances of the Disk will be formed if the LTP will not be able to close the servo circuit focusyou">

The LTP will control the sequence of ejection of the cassette and generate an interrupt if the Limitation signal Push is not issued within three seconds. The recovery procedure consists of three attempts to eject a cartridge. If the error continues to persist, then the defect is sent to the message signal ERROR respectively SCSI 20-pin connector of the player-machine.

The request for Expulsion (see Diagram 4 in the end of the description).

Request to Eject a Cartridge can act as Player-machine, and the Front Panel. If the cartridge is present, the spindle stops and the signal of Player-machine CART_LOADED cancelled (active low). After a timeout to stop the spindle (as defined in section Stop Spindle) the cassette is ejected.

Change Media (see figure 5 at the end of the description).

This condition exists when the cassette is in the sleeve and closes the switch Installing the Cartridge. Given the signal of Player-machine CART_LOADED (active low).

Defect Spindle Speed (see Diagram 6 in the end of the description).

The LTP will control the speed of Spidey defined for the LTP block S. If the spindle speed is defined as lying outside a certain range, the DSP will generate an interrupt.

Error power dasera (see figure 7 at the end of the description).

If the threshold Power of the Read Laser is exceeded, and this is detected by the DSP will generate an interrupt premature termination. Message is composed of an unrecoverable position, issued, if the laser is not installed in the desired state after a re-calibration.

The defect of focus (see figure 8 at the end of the description).

The threshold for Errors Defocus programmable block S. If the focus signal exceeds the threshold, the DSP will generate an interrupt premature termination, for S.

The defect record (see chart 9 in the end of the description).

If the message is Defective Search LTP is formed, the Program Interrupt Drive must request the status from the DSP to determine whether the error generated by the search, or lacked the table Speed. If bit Defective Status, and bit status "Chain Focus is Not Closed, then this means that a lookup table is not initialized proper education is the Interrupt Reset" on the LTP, indicating that the bit status of the Defective Search should be cleaned. You will then need code search from S to start with the registration point of interruption of the Drive.

The threshold for Error Tracking programmable block S. Thresholds can be set separately for reads and for the record, if the read should be more limited.

When the detected Tracking Error, the LTP will use "special" interrupt for the completion of the operations of the drive. The Interrupt handler will issue the message "Interrupt Reset" on the LTP.

A special question. The recovery mechanism is to allow the software to issue another command search (thereby allowing GCHQ to search and then go to the support). An alternative approach is to break the Chain of Tracking and then issuing commands to the DSP to re-navigate to the tracking. This approach, however, does not work for the defective mode when the search is not installed and the head "slides" on the disk. Therefore, the best recovery mechanism is to try the search again. A special code will need to handle if the last POIs.

Defect Magnet Bias (see figure 10 at the end of the description).

The spiral Mode: If any error conditions are eliminated, the Program Interrupt Drive should return the drive to its original state for the implementation of the spiral mode (known as tracking track record consistently or blocking of transitions). This is done by saving the initial state when the input and the implementation presented in figure 11 (see end of description) code after exit.

Notification Interrupt Drive: Message Interrupt Drive form the interrupt Program Interrupt Drive, which puts the drive in a known state. The Interrupt handler then provides notification software responsible for managing current operations, what was the condition of the interrupt and what was done to clear this condition. To notify the software uses two mechanisms. They include messages and direct notification.

If the task is initiated operation and waits for the SCSI Service Program Interrupt or Program Interrupt Service Drive will give boobsunderage Drive. The task, which is responsible for the current operation, is stored in the variable routing. If a piece of software does what could form at any time to Interrupt the Drive (for example, the code search), continuously adjusts the task queue for messages that might be too much overhead processing. The second mechanism messages Interrupt the Drive mode uses the "long jump" to transfer execution back to the place where the software knows how to re-run the algorithm or try to make a second attempt. The process of identifying where to make a "long jump", is called a combination. Can run multiple layers of overlapping, each new level stores the information of the previous alignment in its local stack. If the key code is registered (combined) independently, then the code can thus identify a routine that can cause a Program Interrupt Service Drive to perform context-sensitive premature termination.

Media sizes: Defining media types: media Type will be identified with ISOE is udaetsya power.

in Block S issues a command to bring in the rotation for the 4-speed on the motor spindle.

(C) Block C issues a command to the DSP notify me if the speed in rpm is greater than 60 rpm

d) When the DSP generates an interrupt when the number of revolutions larger 60 rpm, the unit S issues a command to DSP to notify when the rpm is greater than 4 (four) the minimum number of rpm

e) Then block S issues a command to DSP to initialize:

1) LTP slowly finds internal braking stop.

2) LTP searches to the external diameter of the corresponding (TBD) track record.

3) the default Mode corresponds to the fact that you may switch back and indication corresponds to 4.

4) If the DSP detects an error in the initial search, it will be an error message for S, which will reset the DSP and then re-initialize.

f) Block S attempts to read an ID for a particular zone (D) to 4 respectively (TBD) pathways from the inner diameter.

g) If no ID can be read, then the block S attempts to read an ID, using frequencies from adjacent zones plus/minus (TBD) number of zones.

the I.

i) Block S issues a command to DSP to notify when the rpm is greater than 2x minimum.

j) If the LTP provides an interrupt when the rpm is greater than 2x minimum, the unit S issues an initialization command to the DSP, then attempts to read an ID in the area (TBD) corresponding to (TBD) tracks.

k) If the ID cannot be read, then the block S attempts to read an ID using frequencies of adjacent areas within plus/minus (TBD) zones.

l) If the ID cannot be read, then the steps (h) through(k) are repeated for 1x speed.

m) If the ID cannot be read, then the block S 2 issues a command to the motor spindle.

n) Block S issues a command LTP notify when the rpm is less than 2x maximum.

o) If the LTP provides an interrupt when the rpm is less than 2x the maximum, the unit S attempts to read an ID, try to execute the swing frequency. The law of the swing are as follows: the default zone, zone -1 zone +1, zone -2, area +2 and so on until you have used all frequencies.

p) If the ID cannot be read, then the block S issues a command 4 speed on the motor spindle.

q) Block S issues a command LTP notify me when chise, than 4x maximum, the unit S attempts to read an ID by performing the swing frequency. The oscillation law the following: the default zone, zone -1 zone +1, zone -2, zone +2, etc. until all frequencies will not be tested.

WHEN READING ID:

s) Unit S issues a search command position in the field of SFP&.

t) Block S attempts to read SFP-cottage for 512-byte sectors. If the read is unsuccessful, then S attempts to read SFP-data for 1024-byte sectors.

and Unit S initializes the parameters of the media drive type media and SFP information. The flag of the pre-recording is set to indicate the need to perform pre-recording before recording media.

v) Unit C starts initializing tapes (i.e., reads the defect Management Area, builds group tables, and so on). If any Defective areas of Management must be overwritten in order to make it relevant to other areas, the drive should first check whether the first test appointment.

Support media type W (psudo-WORM - write once, read multiple cartridge 1x or 2x. Field DMP will not be used. Test function Space External Codec will be used to test not recorded whether the cartridge 4. Field DNP will not be used.

After the introduction of the cassette CCW in the drive it automatically blocks the Write Cache and clears the field WCE (release Write Cache) Page Modes 08h, caching Options. All proponents will be notified about the change using the following command from each initiator by issuing the VALIDATION STATE. The combination of the Key identification/ID recognition returned in response to a Command Identifying a Query would be to INTERRUPT BLOCK/CHANGE PARAMETERS SELECT MODE (06h/29h).

Support media type EPROM: Special issue. For carriers such as EPROM signal PREFMT must be installed when the head is above or within three tracks of the ROM area on the cartridge. The search algorithm should take into account, where the area of the EPROM are on cassette, and should provide a passage through them. From GCHQ may have to search in the field EPROM after its initialization. This initial search should be performed with a low speed to minimize changes in the state of the Tracking Error.

If a media error or correction will exceed the current threshold, or found some other threshold specified above, the drive will attempt to repeat this operation as described in this section. Retries are performed, unless a serious error has not resulted in SOSTOYaNIE attempts to access data. In addition, no retry attempts, if you set the internal debug flag - Blocking Repeated Attempts To Drive (drvRetryDisable), which is set or cleared by ESDI SCSI commands read/write (E7h).

When the drive performs the read operation, it will provide the maximum number of retries as specified in the Page Modes 01h, Recovery Options Error Read/Write, Count Retry the Read (byte 3). When the drive performs Erasure or recording, it will carry the maximum number of retries as specified in the Page Modes 01h, Recovery Options Error Read/Write, Count of Retries Write (byte 8). When the drive performs an operation verification, it will carry the maximum number of retries as specified in the Page Modes 07h, Recovery Options, Error Verification, Count Retry Verification (byte 3).

If a sector cannot be read within the current threshold, the drive may attempt to recover the sector with the use of special tools, as described below in the section Special Recovery Strategy. If the sector recovered, he moldovanism Code Bug Fix: Check for errors in the read or verification is performed by the hardware in Cirrus Logic SM330. Vector pack for the correction of any bytes in the error generated by SM330 and transferred to SM331 through a dedicated serial link between two ICS. Codes Cyclic redundancy Check Code (CRC) and Verification with Error Correction (ECC) for read operations are formed using SM330.

The correction is not applicable to the sector for read operations, if the Lock bit Correction (DCR) is selected in the Page Modes 01h, Recovery Options Error Read/Write. Correcting code ECC is also not applicable to the sector for read operations, if the bit Resolution of Early Correction (EEC) is not set in the Page Modes 01h, Recovery Options Error of the Read/Write: If after repeated attempts, except one, was unsuccessful, and bit ECC is not installed, the drive will automatically apply the correction at the last attempt, if the bit DCR is not installed. It is important to note that when the bit is set DCR error correction code ECC detected but not corrected.

Special Recovery Strategy: the Term Special Recovery mode is used to describe procedures for the use of all possible means for the program ultimately correct data. Absolute criteria to determine that you have restored the sector are, can be adjusted within the maximum specified thresholds hardware correction. To minimize failure correction thresholds carriers is reduced in a gradual sequence (TBD).

Special Recovery Strategy is initialized, if a sector cannot be read within the current thresholds and bit Transfer Block (TB) or bit Resolution Automatic Reallocation Read (ARRE) is selected in the Page Modes 01h, Recovery Options Read/Write. If the data sector is fully restored and Automatic Redistribution of Reading is enabled, the sector can be reallocated as described in the section below, the Strategy of Redistribution.

The drive parameters that can be changed when you try to restore data, are the following: 1) band width fasolada chain (normal, high, very high), 2) frequency area (projected area -1, the expected area +1), 3) pseudolite sector, 4) pseudogene sync, 5) fixing the first Retiming (sector not acceptable for redistribution, it may only be predelenia data of the logical sector to a new physical sector. The reallocated sector 1) in response to a request from the host computer (the CSI Team reassignment Block 07h), 2) when sector cannot be read within the current thresholds, the sector was fully restored, and when the bit is set ARRE, 3) sector cannot be erased or written using the current thresholds and bit Resolution Automatic Reallocation Account (AWRE) is selected in the Page Modes Olh, Recovery Options Error Read/Write, 4) sector could not be verified within the current thresholds as part of the SCSI Write Commands and Verification.

Write reallocation: When the data sector, which exceeded the thresholds read, fully restored and ARRE bit is set, the drive will first try to overwrite the data in the same physical sector, if the threshold was associated with the error Data Synchronization, Resynchronization or ECC correction. If data for the same sector can now be verified within the thresholds defined in the Page Modes 07h, Recovery Options, Error Verification, the sector will not be redistributed. Sector, which resulted in errors, due to errors in the fields label sector or ID, or s is If for redistribution logical sector requires a new physical sector, the drive will write the data (using thresholds record) in the backup sector and to verify this sector (using thresholds verification). If the sector cannot be recorded or confirmed using the current thresholds, another physical sector will be listed as the backup, and the procedure is repeated. Can be used a maximum of three backup sector in the attempt to redistribute one logical sector.

Write reallocation Sector, which does not meet the threshold label sector or the threshold number of correct IDs sectors, as defined in Page Modes 01h, Recovery Options, Read/Write, will be reallocated, if bit resolution automatic reallocation account (AWRE).

If the new physical sector is required to redistribute logical sector, the drive will write the data (using a threshold entry in the backup sector and then to verify this sector (using thresholds verification). If the entry sector or verification cannot be performed using the current thresholds, another physical sector will be identifica when trying to reallocate one logical sector.

Verification after transfers account: a Sector that does not meet the thresholds verification, as defined in Page Modes 07h, the Parameters of the verification data recovery, as part of a SCSI write commands and verification, will be redistributed. Bits ARRE and AWRE not affect the decision to reallocate the sector that cannot be verified within the current thresholds as part of the SCSI write commands and verification.

If the new physical sector is required to redistribute logical sector, the drive will write the data (using a threshold entry in the backup sector and then to verify this sector (using thresholds verification). If the sector cannot be recorded or verified using the current thresholds, another physical sector is identified as a backup, and the procedure is repeated. Will be used a maximum of three backup sector when trying to reallocate one logical sector.

Response SCSI error codes: the following sections describe SCSI combination Key Up/Code Recognition/Additional Qualifier Code Recognition (ASCQ) for each of the above conditions, the Dec drive and SCSI combination Key up/Code Recognition/'ASCQ, sent back to the host computer, are listed below in table 17 - Page Modes 01h, Recovery Options Error.

Errors redistribution: When you try redistributing the logical sector to a new physical sector, the drive will generate reports of combinations of identification, are shown in table 18, if the specified error condition.

Automatic redistribution is considered failed if the error is hardware or other serious error prevents the drive redistribution. When performing redistribution drive will only make three attempts to have a logical sector in the new physical sector. If required more than three attempts, the drive concludes that there is a hardware error. This approach limits the number of attempts at redistribution sector and thereby minimizes the time required for redistribution, and minimizes the possibility of using all available reserves. If the drive can write and perform verification of the only defect Management Area (DMA) on the disk, it will generate an Error of the list of Defects.

Error codes Oia status to the host computer when performing read operations. Will there be actually transmitted status message depends on issued if the host computer SCSI Command Recognition Request.

These conditions can be divided into five main categories, which include the following: 1) attempt to locate the desired sector, 2) attempt to read the sector, 3) attempt to restore the sector with the use of special strategies, 4) attempt to reallocate the sector, 5) Interrupt Drive and other serious errors. Table 18 presents the combination of the identification, which form the message when the failure of redistribution, while table 8 presents the combination of the identification, the messages that are generated when a serious error.

When trying to locate the sector reports of the combinations presented in table 19 will be formed by the drive when the occurrence of the specified error type.

When trying to read the sector, the drive will generate reports of the combinations shown in table 20, if we detect these types of errors, bit ARRE is not set and the data cannot be recovered within thresholds when performing a retry. If all retry ice the MS bit of TV. The data will then return to the main computer, regardless of whether the data has been fully restored. If they are fully restored, the data will not be redistributed in a new sector.

When trying to read the sector, the drive will generate reports of combinations of identification, are shown in table 21, under specified conditions, if the bit DCR is set and the data can be restored within thresholds when performing a retry or special recovery strategy. If the data cannot be recovered using special recovery strategy, the return error codes match those presented in table 20. If the data is completely restored and ARRE bit is set, the drive will attempt to reallocate the logical sector to a new physical sector.

When trying to read the sector drive will be formed messages combinations of recognition, presented in table 22 for the specified conditions, if the bit DCR is not selected and the data can be restored within thresholds when performing a retry or a special strategy. If the data cannot be recovered using special strategies, the sublime and bit ARRE, the drive will attempt to reallocate the logical sector to a new physical sector.

Error message reads: this section describes the logic used by the software to determine when to set a specific combination of the identification, when forming the error message through Test Conditions and when to make a return of the data (see figure 12 at the end of the description).

Error codes Verification: this section presents the conditions that cause the drive return the status message to the host computer when the operation of verification in response to the SCSI Command Verification. Will there be really a status message is sent depends on issued if the host computer SCSI Command Request Recognition.

Conditions can be divided into five main categories, which include the following: 1) attempts to locate the sector, 2) attempts to verify the sector, 3) Interruption of the Drive and other serious errors. Table 8 provides descriptions of Serious Errors and combination identification generated for these errors.

When trying to locate s is royenii error of the specified type. When attempting verification sector drive will be formed messages combinations of identification listed in table 20, when the detection of these types of errors. When the operation of verification, however, real data will not be returned to the host computer. By definition, a special strategy data recovery is never used in the verification. The goal is to verify that the data can be read using (potentially) more stringent thresholds mode Page 07h, Parameters Verification Recovery Errors. In response to the impossibility of verifying sector at current thresholds will not run automatic reallocation sectors. (Note: Automatic redistribution may be performed during verification after write operations, which is initialized using a completely different SCSI commands).

Error messages Verification: this section describes the logic used by the software to determine when you need to install a specific combination of the identification, when forming the error messages through the Validation criteria and when to make a return of the data (see figure 13 in the end of the description).

the presentations on the status, which may be transmitted to the host computer when the recording operation. Will the real status message is sent depends on issued if the host computer SCSI command Recognition Request.

Conditions can be divided into four main categories, which include the following: 1) attempts to locate the desired sector, 2) attempts to write to the sector, 3) attempts to reallocate the sector, 4) Interrupt Drive and other serious errors. Table 18 presents the Error Codes when trying to redistribution sector and combinations up messages which are generated when a serious error.

When trying to locate sector combinations up previously listed in table 19 will be formed by the drive when it detects these types of errors. When trying write sector combinations up shown below in table 23 will be formed by the drive when it detects these types of errors.

Error messages Records: this section describes the logic used by the software to determine when to set a specific combination of the identification, when the form soia).

Error codes Verify-After-Write: this section presents the conditions that ensure formation in the drive status messages that can be transmitted to the host computer when performing verification after write operations. Will there be actually transmitted status message depends on issued if the host computer SCSI Command Recognition Request.

Conditions can be divided into four main categories, which include the following: 1) attempts to locate the desired sector, 2) attempt to verify this sector, 3) attempts to reallocate the sector, 4) Interrupt Drive and other serious errors. Table 18 that contains Error Codes for redistribution sector, represents a combination of the identification, messages which are generated when a failure of redistribution, and table 8 contains a combination of up to serious errors.

When trying to locate the sector, the drive will be to ensure the formation of combinations of identification listed in table 19, when the detection of these types of errors. When attempting verification sector, the drive will generate a combination of identification listed in the tables is the first section describes the logic, which uses software to determine when you need to install a certain combination of recognition, when to generate an error message by the audit and when to make a return of the data (see figure 15 in the end of the description).

Defective Management: This section is TBD. Further comments and questions that need to be considered when determining this topic. The read defect Management Areas (DMA): What thresholds should be used when designing. How many retries you want to use. Compare/Update DMA. What number must be conditioned. When overwrite them. Notice of the approaching end-of-life and end-of-life. Each of these issues is solved in the design and will not affect professionals in the exercise in practice of the present invention in the form as it is here disclosed. Data structures, forming DMA for support include Narrowing the Sector, Linear Replacement.

Table View for a Variety of Media: the Software will load in the DSP appropriate table speeds for the type novtel shall be used until while not defined media type.

INTERFACE COMMANDS DRIVE: Interface Commands the Drive is a software interface that provides access to platform hardware of the drive. Access to the SCSI interface to the Controller Sequence Format, Codec and an External Codec is provided as direct access to these components, and not through the Interface Commands to the Drive. Access to all other components is provided using Interface Commands the Drive defined in the next section.

Command Drive Command Drive, the Software uses Jupiter, are listed in table 24 below. The column "type" defines whether the Command Drive command immediate action (I), the command executed by the block S (188), or the command executed in the LTP (LTP). Team Instant Action uses a flag or bit set and does not require CPU time to process or control operations. Team Instant Action indicates that the command is executed immediately in full. Under the Commands of the Drive presents additional information on this issue. Command type 188 indicates that you want top be required to confirm what hardware has reached the desired state. The team is reported as completed, if the treatment or the control is completed. Command type the LTP specifies that the command should be sent to GCHQ to meet the requirements of the Team Drive. The command is specified as completed when the LTP returns a message about the status of his team.

Team Drive are a team of one or two words that request to a particular feature was implemented by the block S or skipped on the LTP. Command code of the Drive maintains the interaction Protocol LTP and determining when the command is finished. In some cases, when the unit C performs a specific function, the team immediately identified as incomplete. In other cases, the required delay time setting hardware (for example, in the case of activation of the magnet displacement). When the block S transmits a command to perform functions on the DSP, block C must wait until the LTP will indicate the completion of the command. Detailed information about the commands, see the applicable section below Commands the Drive. The upper word in teams of two words placed in premeu esdi_cmd. These variables are global variables and should be set before calling the function Drive_cmd.

Commands description Drive: the following sections contain detailed descriptions of the Commands of the Drive.

SET_EE_ADDR: setting Command Address of the EEPROM is used to identify the address for the next operation using non-volatile NVR. First, you set the address, then the command should READ_EEPRO or WRITE_ EEPROM, as described below.

READ_ EEPROM: read Command from EEPROM allows read data stored at present in the non-volatile NVR, from a cell that was previously defined using the command SET_EE_ADDR.

Set_ methods JUMP_ BACK_ IN: setup Command transitions to the inner diameter defines for the LTP is that the medium is a spiral to the inner diameter and therefore the transition should search for one track in the direction of inner diameter. The transition occurs once per revolution to maintain the optical system over the same physical path.

SET_JUMP_BACK_OUT: install Command transitions to the outer diameter determines the LTP is that the medium is a spiral to the outer diameter and therefore go to the one turnover to maintain the optical system over the same physical path.

JUMP_BACK_ENABLE: Command permissions transitions informs the LTP that transitions should be performed to maintain the current position of the optical head over the media.

JUMP_ BACK_ DISABLE: Team ban crossings shall inform the LTP that transitions should not be performed and that the optical head must track in a spiral position of the media.

DISABLE_EEWR: This section is currently not defined.

REQ_STATUS: query Command status requests the current status from the LTP.

Set_ methods LASER_ THOLD: threshold reading of the laser determines the allowable range of the signal power of the reading laser. If the power reading will exceed the threshold, the DSP generates an interrupt premature termination.

Set_ methods FOCUS_ THOLD: threshold setup focus sets the allowable range of the error signal focus. If the error signal, the focus will exceed the threshold, the DSP generates an interrupt premature termination.

SET_TRACK_HOLD: establish threshold tracking sets the allowable range of the error signal tracking. If the signal of the tracking error exceeds the threshold, the DSP generates an interrupt premature termination.

SET_SEEK_THOLD: This section is Ekiti, the data to be recorded on the media and could later be reproduced. Spindle speed is controlled with the LTP subject to the minimum and maximum rpm, according to this command. If the spindle speed drops below the minimum or exceeds the maximum, then the DSP generates an interrupt premature termination.

The control feature allows the interface Commands the Drive to detect when the tape cartridge shown in rotation with the required speed, and when the cassette is not able to maintain the correct speed. By setting the minimum number of rpm to 0 and the maximum to a lower value rpm for a nominal range of media, the DSP will generate an interrupt to block S, when the tape is really reaches the set speed. After this block S issues on the LTP is a new range defines the minimum and maximum rpm for a nominal range of media. The minimum number of rpm of 0 indicates that the minimum value is not required to perform validation.

BIAS_ TEST: Command offset check requires verification of the magnet displacement. Real operations when testing, described below in section C. Definition of validation is enabled potaninia requires level review software from GCHQ.

WRITE_ EEPROM: Write Command In EEPROM writes a byte of data in the nonvolatile NVR in the cell, predefined, using commands SET_EE_ADDR, as described above.

REQ_ STD_ STAT: query Command standard status requests standard ESDI status. The standard status includes the status of the drive and the status for the LTP.

REC_OPT_STAT: query Command optical status queries optical ESDI status. This status includes the status of the drive and the status for the LTP.

Set_ methods MAG_ READ: setting Command magnet for reading prepares the drive for read operations. Command offset is described below in the section of the Magnetic Bias, Laser Power, Frequency Control Fasolada Chain.

Set_ methods MAG_ ERASE: Command install magnet to erase prepares the drive for the erasing process. Command offset is described below in the section of the Magnetic Bias, Laser Power, Frequency Control Fasolada Chain.

Set_ methods MAG_ WRITE: Command install magnet to record prepares the drive for write operations. Command offset is described below in the section of the Magnetic Bias, Laser Power, Frequency Control Fasolada Chain.

RESET_ ATTN: Team SBR is the second error, who formed the Interruption of the Drive unit S.

RECAL_DRIVE This section is currently not defined.

STOP_ SRINDLE: the Command to stop the spindle opens servo circuit and slows the rotation of the cartridge. Command code Drive first specifies the DSP to the necessity of interrupting the witness chains of laser systems for focusing and tracking. The number of rpm of the spindle is set to zero and applied the brake. After a few seconds (TBD) the inhibition is removed and the software checks to ensure that the number of rpm spindle decreased to a certain value (TBD). After that, the software re-applies the braking survive in several MS (TBD) to the stop cassette. The waiting time from the initial speed to its slow and the waiting time until the complete stop of the spindle will depend on the material of the cartridge is plastic or glass. The software will control the time before the unwinding of the tape to determine the type of media. Team set_ methods SPIN_THOLD will be used to control the speed of rotation of the spindle.

START_SPINDLE: start Command spindle provides the unwinding of the tape, the evidence that the role of the number of rpm of the spindle is performed using commands SET_SPIN_THOLD, as specified above.

The unwinding is carried out in two stages: 1) Set the threshold of the spindle to control the number of rpm up until the cartridge reaches the minimum number of rpm for a specific media, 2) the Threshold of the spindle is set to control the number of rpm in accordance with the nominal range for media. If the unwinding of the tape is too long, the software must stop the rotation of the cassette and generate an error code (TBD). The drive should not push the cartridge.

To measure the time required until the carrier four times the default number of rpm should be used the timer. The time required to unwind the tape will indicate the material of the carrier - plastic or glass. After identification team STOP_SPINDLE will use appropriate lock time, based on the cartridge type.

After the cassette is installed in the number of rpm software will generate LTP command initialization. At this point, the LTP will be snapping their witness chains.

LOCK_CART: Team grip tape sets the flag that PR is Denia cassette removes the flag and provides that that subsequent requests to eject a cartridge will be ignored.

EJECT_CART: the Command to eject the tape slows down the tape, if it is still in the rotation to eject the cassette. Operations to slow down the tape, the same that performed in the event of a STOP_ SPINDLE, as described above. After the slowdown of the software issues a command to eject a cartridge on the LTP.

SEEK_COMP_OFF: This section is currently not defined.

SEEK_COMP_ON: This section is currently not defined.

SLCT_ GCR_FRQ_SET: Command selecting a set of frequencies defines a set of frequencies. Every media format requires a different set of frequencies for recording on the media. Team magnet offset, see below, is used to select a frequency from the set identified by this command.

ALLOW_ATTN_CLEAR: This section is currently not defined.

READ_DRV_RAM: This section is currently not defined.

NORMAL_PLL_BWIDTH: This section is currently not defined.

HGH_PLL_BWIDTH: This section is currently not defined.

VHGH_PLL_BWIDTH: This section is currently not defined.

Set_ methods LWP_ RAM: setup Command monostate command allows the drive in the diagnosis enchant power records which should be used in the following operations erase or write performed in certain areas of power.

SEEK_BACKWARD: the Format for the Command Search in the Reverse Direction are presented in the section below the Search Command.

SEEK_FORWARD: the Format for the Command Search in the forward direction are presented in the section below the Search Command.

Search command: Format for the command search of two words presented below in table 25.

For Search Commands "OD" is defined as the direction to the outer diameter or from the spindle, a "ID" as a direction to the inner diameter or to the spindle. Thresholds for LTP is intended for use in the search, must be installed separately prior to issuing the command search. The thresholds of the search are set using the command SET_SEEK_THOLD.

Team Magnetic Bias, Laser Power and Frequency Fasolada chain: Command Offset provides the hardware installation, enable the drive to read, erase or write in a specific position on the media. The format for the Command Displacement of a single word is presented in Table 26 below.

For read, erase or write to a specific location on novtel the bearers), the frequency fasolada chains and LTP thresholds for focusing and tracking. When the team is in preparation for the operation of the erase or write Command code Drive should also check that the magnetic offset generates a current within specified value (TBD) for a certain period of time (TBD). Serial ADC should be used for sampling current, which is generated by the magnet displacement. The LTP thresholds for focusing and tracking, which should be used when reading, erasing or writing, must be installed separately before performing these operations. To determine these thresholds used commands SET_FOCUS_THOLD and SET_TRACK_THOLD.

There is only one frequency band for carriers such as 1x and no Zone of Laser Power for Recording, since the Recording is not supported for media type 1x. The number of Zones of Laser Power for Recording media of the type 2 is equal to the number of bands (i.e., 16 zones). The number of Zones of Laser Power for Recording media type 4 is equal to the number of bands (i.e., 30 bands for media that are formatted with 512 byte sectors, and 34 of the strip of media formatted with sectors of 1024 bytes).

The status Command Drive Status, provided with a USB interface is 5000. Status bits reflect the actual state of the hardware error conditions with the LTP or state managed by the software. The status is available in two 16-bit words, usually defined as the Standard Status and Optical Status. Definition of the word status and source of status are presented in table 27 - Standard ESDI Status and table 28 - Optical Status.

Serial Interface Control disk Drive: Interface Commands the Drive provides a General mechanism for programming various serial devices in the hardware Jupiter. The serial device is selected to control the spindle motor, ADC, channel components of reading non-volatile NVR (EZWPW). The serial interface is transparent to software. Software Commands the Drive provides a definition of how to interact with each such device to start the spindle, a read bias current to the ADC, to read or write data in a particular cell EZWPW, etc. it is Important that the software Commands the Drive cancels all your choices for sequential circuits to interrupt any interrupt should be blocked, if sequential access. Lock interrupt should be provided at an interval from 100 μs to 1 MS.

The Data Exchange interface S/DSP: Commands for GCHQ and their functions are defined in the document DSP-COMM.DOC, 80C188/TMS320C5X, Rev XGH-August 25, 1994. For convenience commands are listed in table 29 Command LTP.

Status determination LTP: table 30 presents the definitions of the bits of the bytes of the status of the LTP. Table 30 also shows how each bit is transferred in bit Standard ESDI Status or Optical ESDI Status.

The Commands Drive: Phase command and status in the Team Drive is separated to provide software S the flexibility to continue processing when performing the LTP team. After this software IS can wait until the command completes. Usually you only need to two consecutive commands did not cause overflow. Therefore, at the beginning of each Command Drive software must verify that the previous command has been completed, and if not, then wait a certain period of time (TBD) before timeout.

Commands for the LTP are divided into different categories that will require different locks on BP is SC - for 100 MS. Initializing the DSPS must require up to 2 sec.

Software Commands the Drive must also control time block for hardware, i.e., it directly provides control components such as the magnet offset and Channel components of Reading. Magnet offset may require up to 4.5 MS to achieve the required field strength. The delay in establishing the Channel Reading can be (TBD) ISS.

SUPPORT 20-PIN CONNECTOR floppy DRIVE: this section describes the steps taken by the drive Jupiter in response to various signals with 20-pin connector of the drive. There are no tests in the software to determine whether connection of the drive cable. All signals should be granted and revoked at the interface of the drive regardless of whether you are connected to cable or not.

Ejection of the Cassette Player-machine: When given the signal AC_ EJECT on the 20-pin connector, the drive will abort any current operation and transfer all the data in the write cache to the media. If the cartridge is rotated, the software will prompt you for a Command Drive deceleration of the rotation of the cartridge. Pildistavad will form the Team the Drive to eject the cartridge.

Reset with Player-machine: (Question to decide) When the signal AC_RESET issued on the 20-pin connector, the drive will no longer issue new commands. Those commands that are ordered in the queue will be serviced to completion. Any data in the write cache will be suppressed. As soon as the drive will complete the above function, it will wait for the cancellation of the reset signal from the player-the machine before completing initialization SCSI, as described above.

The cartridge is in the Drive Signal CART_IN_DRIVE 20-pin connector will be maintained in the unconfirmed state, regardless of whether the cartridge is in the drive. This signal is not provided support software. The interrupt may be received from an External Codec. However, there is no sensor for generating a signal of the presence of the cassette in the throat of the drive.

The cartridge is Loaded: Signal CART_LOADED 20-pin connector will be issued when the cassette is mounted on the sleeve rotates and the LTP has completed its initialization (including the focusing and tracking).

Error: the ERROR Signal on the 20-pin connector will be issued if there is a sequence error eject a cartridge. Currently is without the use of an appropriate sensor determine the location of the cassette in the neck.

The channel LEDs: Signal LED_PIPE 20-pin connector will be issued whenever there is a led light.

Request Reduction of Power: When the issued signal PWRDNREQ 20-pin connector, the drive will terminate any write command, are in the process of execution, and then transfer the data stored in the write cache/write buffer, to the media.

Confirmation of the Reduction of Power: When the write cache is suppressed in response to a request signal of Lower Power, the drive will issue a signal PWRDNACK (confirmation) on 20-pin connector.

Offline/Player-machine: the Drive can determine whether attached 20-pin connector, through the perception of the level of this signal on the drive's interface. If the signal has a high level, the drive is in the offline mode, if the signal has a low level, the 20-pin connector is connected to the drive.

The OPERATION of the DRIVE: EZWPW: drive Jupiter will be used EZWPW. Some parameters of the drive (for example, laser power and information from the manufacturer's original equipment will be registered and stored in EZWPW. If you later EZWPW th power failure 5 V or 12 V will generate a hardware reset, passed to block S.

Calibration Offset Focus for media types 1x and 2x: LTP will calibrate the focus for media 1x and 2x, optimizing the best radial bipolar (RPP) signal.

Calibration Offset Focus for media type 4: This section will further define. Below are the comments and questions that should be considered when determining this topic. Calibration of focus for media 4 is performed in two stages. The first calibration step is performed GCHQ, optimising the best RPP signal, as in the calibration of the focus for media 1x and 2x. The second stage of the calibration focus for media 4 will optimize the best signal-to-noise ratio. This requires that the unit IS recorded and read the combination of data, choosing the best offset and submit it to the LTP.

Block S will issue commands in the DSP to use a particular shift focus and then write 2T-a combination of data in the sector. The sector is read, and approximately 100 μs serial ADC must provide a value for the "sample and hold". This procedure is repeated for different shifts focus to determine Optimedia is then transmitted to the DSP.

Power calibration records for the media type 2: This section is subject to additional definition. Below are the comments and questions that must be considered in the subsequent definition of this section. Block S will perform the power calibration records using a specific algorithm (TBD).

Power calibration Records for media 4 (Check appointment): This section will define later. Below are the comments and questions that need to be taken into account. You need to determine when to perform the testing appointment: 1) temperature is installed, check all zones, 2) the temperature is set, unless the area is then used, 3) each time when you write a new area, 4) any other algorithm. In addition, track appointment must have titles. Each of these issues is a factor in design and will not prevent the specialists in the practical implementation of the invention in the form as it is here disclosed.

The calibration procedure capacity recording media type 4 is similar to the procedure for determining shifts focus to media 4. Block S Osia necessary to skip one or two sectors when you run setup for the next entry. After the used range of values, the block S reads the same sector and uses a serial ADC for digitizing the read signal. Based on a certain algorithm (TBD), can be obtained optimum level of recording power.

It is important to note that this sequence must be interrupted and restored. If a new SCSI command received during the implementation of the algorithm, the drive shall respond to the command and return to the test with a preliminary account in the subsequent time.

If the drive checks with prior record, and the new SCSI write command, the drive should 1) stop scanning with advanced write and execute the write command with the recording levels, or 2) the test to continue with the preliminary record to determine new levels of recording power, thereby increasing overhead on execution of this command. Each of these possible variants is a design factors and will not interfere with the specialists to carry out the invention as it is disclosed here.

Re-calibration: Day: when to re-calibrate, what to do in this case, temperature control, how often, what should be the temperature rise to cause a need for re-calibration. What is calibration and re-calibration. When the drive must be calibrated again. Whether the calibration and re-calibration of the same process. Whether to perform re-calibration when the current change of the operating parameters of the laser. Each of these issues is a factor in design and will not prevent the specialists in the practical implementation of the invention in the form as it is here disclosed.

Calibration of the LTP includes the installation of displacement of the Focusing and displacement of the RPE. There are two calibration algorithm focus. Which one to use, you need to specify this. Re-calibration should be performed in a function of temperature or as a recovery procedures error. With each increase in temperature by 5-10 degrees will calibrate the offset of the Focus offset of the RPE and the power of the Recording Laser. This re-calibration should be performed when there is nothing in the current processing. The implementation of re-calibration should be interrupted with the advent of SCSI commands. If the AC should have priority. Re-calibration should not be performed at every power change of the reading laser.

Support flash - EEPROM: SCSI Command to the Write Buffer will be used to download new software SCSI drive. The drive will not remain in a healthy state when resetting or Cycling power, which can occur when data is updated flash - EEPROM. It is important to bring this fact to the information of the end user that will try to upgrade the software: it is impossible to make Cycling the power or reset during the boot procedure. If this happens, the drive will need to be returned to the factory for repair.

Requirements of the manufacturer: This section is subject to additional definition. Below are the questions and comments that should be considered

with this definition. Support Buffer memory traces (as RMD-5300 is a factor design).

Readahead cache: This section should specify this. Below are the questions and comments that need to be defined. The amount of memory that is intended for use in parts for sapl should be defined additionally. Below are the questions and comments that need to be considered. The amount of memory that is intended for use in parts for recording and for reading the cache will be installed in the pages of the Modes. It must be supported by timely suppression. Immediate notification. Reordering The Entries. Each of these issues is a factor in design and will not prevent the specialists in the practical implementation of the invention as it is disclosed here.

Execute SCSI commands: This section must be determined. Below are the questions and comments that should be considered. The Union of the set of SCSI commands in a single request for the media. Division search on preliminary and final. Algorithms employment tires: the Coefficient of Unemployment for the Buffer Memory while recording. The coefficient of Fullness of the Buffer memory when reading. These are factors design.

Hours of Power: the Number of hours included food drive will be stored in EZWPW. Accumulation countdown clock power LTP will be interrupted for S every 10 seconds

19 - 19

(220 ISS). Block S will update the clock enable 220 ISS and remember polyine 19 bits are used and will be added to the clock enable, giving a relative time stamp for error events. Note: 1) the Time elapsed during initialization to reset-off with the LTP is not included. This time may be added each time to the time of the power drive. 2) the Time remaining until the next 10-second interval (approximately 5 seconds) may be added to each time you power on the drive.

Cleaning lenses: once it is determined that the lens should be cleaned, the next time the drive will eject the cartridge, the actuator will be installed in the correct position, and the ejection of the cartridge will cause the brush to go around the lens. When the cartridge is out of the neckline, the actuator will move to the appropriate position. We have to solve the following questions: 1) What if the cartridge will remain in the neck, 2) When the most reliably move the actuator to its original state, 3) whether the lens is damaged, if the actuator moves in the incorrect position during this procedure. Each of these issues is a factor in design and will not prevent the specialists in the implementation of the present invention as optional. Below are the questions and comments that should be considered when determining. To identify the minimum number of sectors for a specific number of revolutions per minute of the media. To use this strategy for a variety of sectors per interrupt. To identify critical areas Program Servicing Interrupts.

Request to Eject a Cartridge from the Front Panel: This section must be determined. Below are the comments and questions that need to be taken into account in this definition. Whether it is to abort the current command. Whether the contents of the cache first to sign up for the media. Each of these issues is a factor in design and will not prevent the specialists in the practical implementation of the invention as it is disclosed here.

SCSI Command Eject a Cartridge: This section must be determined. Below are the comments and questions that must be considered in the following definition. Should be ensured always pushing, even if the Switch of the presence of the Cartridge indicates that the cartridge is missing. Whether it is block by the corresponding selection button. In drive, it may be desirable, is such a possibility. Each of these issues is a factor in design and should not hinder the specialists to carry out the invention in the form as it is described here.

Select button: This section must be determined. Below are the questions and comments that should be considered when deciding. Resolution/Lock hard reset signal to reset the SCSI Bus. (Must be sent to reset the hardware if it's allowed). Allow/Block SCSI termination. Allow/Block automatic verification after recording. Allow/Block programming "flash" memory to update the SCSI software. Resolution/Lock eject a cartridge for the SCSI command. Redundancy (number TBD).

A. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: this section contains requirements for software used to generate the Functional Characteristics of the Software.

1.Diagnostics

1) Support serial communication for diagnostics.

2) Support serial communication to provide access to new hardware.

3) Razrabotki, EZWPW, Channel, reading, motor spindle, serial ADC, parallel DAC.

4) the spindle Speed of the drive must be changed by the SCSI command.

2. Building software

1) Support flash - EEPROM for SCSI software.

2) New software (SCSI and/or LTP) should be downloadable via SCSI.

3) the load Operation software must be restored.

3. Support the LTP

1) Must be capable of downloading DSP code with EEPROM SCSI.

2) Must be capable of supporting the Data Exchange Interface for the exchange of commands, status, data.

3) Must be capable of supporting the LTP is based ROM.

4) Must be supported different table speeds for different media formats.

4. 20-pin connector

1) the Software must provide the ability to detect the fact of accession 20-pin connector.

2) the Software must provide the ability to read the fixed values for the following signals 20-pin connector: Reset with Programmata, the SCSI ID, Permission checking SCSI parity.

3) the Software must provide the ability to read the current state Reset with Player-machine (not fixed).

4) the Software must take an interrupt command when issuing 20-pin connector the following signals: Reset with Player-machine, the Request for Power Reduction, the Ejection of the Cassette Player-machine.

5) the Software must provide the ability to issue/cancel the following signals 20-pin connector: CART_IN_DRIVE, CART_LOADED, ERROR, PWRDNACK (Confirmation of Capacity Reduction).

6) When issuing a 20-pin connector signal PWRDNREQ 1) write cache is suppressed and (2) command is issued to the PWRDNACK.

5. SCSI initialization

1) Software SCSI initialization must use a 20-pin connector as the source of the SCSI ID of the drive. When the cable is connected, the signals will be controlled by the drive when the cable is not connected, the same pin will have a jumper installed to indicate the used SCSI ID.

2) Software SCSI initialization should use the on signal will be controlled by the drive. When the cable is not attached, the same pin will have the jumper set to indicate whether to be resolved SCSI checking parity.

3) the Drive must support your choice of termination.

6. Reset

1) If issued by a Reset signal of the SCSI Bus, it will be formed for INT3 S.

2) If issued by a Reset signal from the Player-machine, it generates an interrupt to block S.

3) If issued by a Reset signal from the Player-machine Maintenance Program Interrupt INT3 should be determined by the condition selection buttons whether hard or programmable reset. If you must run programmable reset the maintenance Program interrupt INT3 notifies the Task Monitor that has been reset and that the contents of the cache entry should be suppressed.

4) If the Player machine has issued a Reset command during a sequence of power on the drive and should ignore the command eject cassette Player-machine and should be expected to cancel the Reset with a Player of the machine before performing SCSI initialization.

5) Players-the machine must vydauschihsya

1) the Software must set the Channel readout for the current type read operations.

8. Support Channel Recording

1) the Software must initiate the process for sampling the signals from Channel readout for the sectors that were used to test preliminary entry.

2) the Software must determine the optimum Power Level records for the current frequency zone and the current temperature of the drive.

3) the Software must send a command to Shift the Focus on DSP for media type 4x.

9. Support Teams Drive

1) Interface Commands the Drive should be based on the interface used with NS.

2) definition of the status code of the Command, the Drive must be identical to the words of status, used with CF.

3) the Back should be allowed/blocked by register CRL read through the LTP.

4) the Direction of go Back must be determined through the LTP.

5) Software Commands the Drive must set the spindle speed for a particular media type.

6) Software note.

7) Software Commands the Drive must be able to produce a sample for determining the temperature of the drive.

8) the Reset Command Interface must issue the RESET TRACKING SYSTEMS for 1 MS and then to undo this command.

9) Search Command must ensure that the range of physical paths corresponding to the logical paths in the range from -3366 to +76724.

10) Software Commands the Drive must unlock/lock the magnet and to select the polarity of the magnet.

11) Command Frequency/Laser power/Offset must provide the setup for the 34 zones frequency and laser power.

12) Software Commands the Drive should form the message GCHQ about the ejection of the cassette.

13) Software Commands the Drive should allow the perception that when the tape cartridge is write-protected.

14) the Software must control the chip select for serial interface.

15) the Software must use EZWPW for registered events and other persistent parameters of the drive (for example, the level is of rivani Drive should detect when the cassette is introduced and installed on the sleeve. Then the cassette can be brought into rotation.

2) After the cartridge is entered, uploaded and promoted, as well as the LTP is "synchronized", should be issued the command CART_LOADED.

3) If the issued command Eject Cassette Player-machine or pressed switch Push from the Front Panel, drive a) passes all installed in all write operations to the media (write cache is suppressed), C) slows down the rotation of the cassette,) ejects the cartridge.

4) When the tape is stopped, the command CART_LOADED should be abolished.

5) during the sequence unload issued the error signal Player-machine, if the LTP reports that had the error eject a cartridge.

6) the Interrupt handler needs to process and clear the following types of errors: Search Error, Bias Error, Defect Magnet Offset Error of the Laser, Error Loading/unloading Error Spindle Speed, the Write Error.

11. Required enhanced functionality

1) Add support for commands that are not associated with access to the media when the drive satisfies the access to the media, but when the it team to support different sets of commands. (TBD - HP, IBM, DEC, Apple, Fujitsu and so on).

3) Add support for new instruction sets (TBD).

4) Add support for Vendor Unique Combinations of Identification Data and Key/Code Recognition (TBD).

5) Add support for EPROM.

6) Add support for media CCW (pseudo-WORM).

7) Add the cache with advance read.

8) Add cache entries, including the suppression of the buffer after a user-selectable delay interval.

12. Performance requirements

1) Program interrupt service must provide the service with the minimum of time on the sector: 1x at 3600 rpm - 538 ISS 2 at 3320 rpm - 368 ISS 4 at 1900 rpm 272 ISS.

13. Other requirements

1) the Software must issue/cancel led indication on the front panel.

2) the Software must support autoproclames hours of power.

3) the Software must support autoproclames the cartridge is loaded.

4) In case of failure of power supply 5V or 12V drive must provide additional measures (TBD).

14. The interrupt sources

1) Sources of the drug, 4) INT3 Reset SCSI bus.

2) interrupt Sources LTP are the following: 1) the interruption, not leading to premature termination. Incorrect Error Search, a 10-second interval timer. Checksum Incorrect Command Unknown Command Error Eject a Cartridge, 2) Interrupt, leading to premature Termination, Error Focus Error Tracking. Error Control Laser Power, Error Spindle Speed.

3) interrupt Sources SLS are the following: Reset with Player-machine, a Request to Reduce Power Player-machine ejection of the cassette Player-machine ejection of the cassette from the Front Panel, Cassette Introduced (in the neck). The cassette is Installed (on the plug).

4) Put the cartridge will not be supported by the software.

15. Error recovery

1) Special Recovery Strategy for individual sectors will be used after a user-defined repeated number of attempts and the use of user-defined thresholds.

2) Error Recovery should include recovery using the following recovery modes: (TBD).

When I self-calibration at power-up.

1. Check Registers and flags S.

Flags of the LTP is to indicate the sign, checking parity, carry and zero are checked to ensure that they are correctly set and then reset. The test is conducted in two stages. First set HS in an a register and then stored in the flags by using the SAHF. The flags are checked on their status reset (JNS, JNP, JNC, JNZ). Secondly, the value is complemented and stored in the flags. The flags are checked in their installed state (JS, JP, JC, JZ). Any flag not in proper condition fails the test and results in the drive using the LEDs for signalling an error in the LTP.

The check register is a test passage providing for the transmission 0xFFFF through all registers (AX, BX, ES, CX, DS, DX, SS, BP, SI, DI, SP). Then the value h passed through the same registers. If the desired value is not present in the last register of the sequence, then the check is recognized as erroneous and the drive is formed corresponding led indication error LTP.

2) Check NVR LTP

When checking NVR LTP recorded combination of bytes increments in the up combination for the first block has the form h, H, h,..., 0xFE, 0xFF. The combination for the next block has the form h, h, h,..., 0xFF, h. When the second pass combination is inverted. If any of the cells static NVR does not contain correct value when read at the end of each pass, the test is recognized as erroneous and is formed in the drive led indication error NVR.

3. Checking the Interrupt Vector S

Test vector interrupt uses interrupt software test scheduling block S. Element table Interrupt Vector (IVT) is initialized to point to the test Program Interrupt Service. Register AH is initialized on h. The interrupt is coordinated using the instructions INT, register AH is given a negative increment is carried out and the Program exits the Interrupt Service. After returning from the interrupt value and AH is checked. If the value does not match with 0xFFFF, then the check is recognized as erroneous and slot led indication for alarm errors LTP.

4. The Checksum ROM

Test ROM Checksum checks the contents of the flash - ROM with basic polynomial popping 16 led indication error ROM.

For each 16-bit words in the EEPROM of the lower byte is entered on a "EXCLUSIVE OR" in the case of high voltage and I is multiplied by two. If the flag is set after transfer of multiplication (shift), the polynomial chsv introduced under the scheme of "EXCLUSIVE OR" in REF. The upper byte of the EPROM is inserted under the scheme of "EXCLUSIVE OR" in the case of high voltage and I is multiplied by two. If the flag is set after transfer of multiplication (shift), the polynomial chsv introduced under the scheme of "EXCLUSIVE OR" I.

5. Check Registers SM331

Check Registers Cirrus Logic CL-SM331 resets SM331 and checks the registers after reset to appropriate values. If any of the registers does not pass verification, the drive reports about the condition cannot be reset to its original state and uses led indication error (TBD).

Specific steps are as follows: 1) to give a reset signal chip SM331, 2) to cancel the reset signal SM331, 3) clear the pointer disk access, 4) register h (BM_DAPL) to 0x5F are checked for zero state, 5) register h (SCSI_SEL_REG) is checked for zero, 6) register h (SCSI_SYNC_ CTL) to h are checked for zero, 7) register h (SCSI_STAT_2) to h checked for null, 8) register h (BM_SCHED_DATA) to h are checked for zero.

6. Check Cohn is a certain combination in the Memory Management Record for the controller and checked the recorded combination. If any part of the test is wrong, the drive generates the error condition cannot be installed in the initial state and uses led indication for alarm errors.

The following specific operations:

1) the Controller sequence stops (initial address value is written 0xIF).

2) the Combination of increments is recorded in each of the 31 memory management reading for the fields Following the Address, Control, Count and Branching.

3) Combination with the increment is checked.

4) Combination with a negative increment is recorded in each of the 31 memory management entry fields the Following Address, Control, Count and Branching.

5) combination with a negative increment is checked.

7. Check CODEC SM330

Check Cirrus Logic CL-SM330 CODEC resets SM330, clears the register output General purpose cleans NVR Corrector checks NVR Corrector and generates an interrupt Count Transfer of Sector 0.

If any part of the test is incorrect, then the drive generates the error condition cannot be installed in the initial state and uses udaetsya the reset signal chip SM330.

2) Cancels the reset signal chip SM330.

3) is Formed by a delay of at least 10 µs to ensure that the chip has completed the reset.

4) Register Output General Purpose initialized in h.

5) Cell NVR Corrector h and h are set to zero.

6) Cell NVR Offset 0x0F to 0h16 are set to zero.

7) Cell NVR Offset 0x20 to h are set to zero.

8) Cell NVR Corrector h and h checked for zero.

9) Cell NVR Offset 0x0F to 0h16 checked for zero.

10) Cell NVR Offset 0x20 to h checked for zero.

11) Is the standard initialization of the chip, as described above.

12) the interrupt Vector for SM330 is initialized to point to the maintenance program test interrupts.

13) Interruption Count Transfer of Sector Zero" is determined by recording zero as the reference transfer in the case of the Reference Transfer Sector.

14) the Software expects the maximum count 0xFFFF interrupt for negative increment respondents register.

8. Checking the External CODEC (TBD).

9. Checking Connecting the tsya address combination with increments in all cells in the buffer NVR and then the combination is checked. Used in combination with the increment is: h, h, h,..., 0xFF. Then when the check is written inverted address the combination of all the cells in the buffer NVR, and then the combination is checked. Used the inverse of the combination is: h, 0xFF, 0xFE,..., h. And, finally, recorded h all cell buffer NVR. If any of the cells NVR encountered an error, the drive generates a message about the condition of the impossibility of the establishment in the source state, but does not signal the error by an led.

11. Self-calibration At Power-LTP.

The basic functionality of the LTP are confirmed using block S by issuing commands revision code read by the DSP. This command will check the interface between the block S and GCHQ, the access to the memory cells LTP, as well as the possibility to return the correct status.

12. Check Magnet Offset.

When checking magnet bias magnet offset is enabled for the function entry. (To prevent accidental data loss, DAC power of the recording laser will be maintained at a power level reading). Code Commands the Drive enables the magnet, the installation capacity of the Drive will wait a few (TBD) MS, before to read the reference ADC. If the current is not within the specified range (TBD), then the drive generates the error condition cannot be installed in its original state, but does not generate an alarm error using the LEDs.

C. REGISTERS SM330: This section describes the registers Cirrus Logic SM330, CODEC ECC Optical Disk, as shown below in table 31.

D. REGISTERS SM331: this section describes the registers SM331, Controller, Optical SCSI Drive, as presented below in table 32.

That is, the REGISTERS CRL: This section contains a description of registers the connecting logic circuits (MOST Manufacturing, Inc.), as presented below in table 33.

Exceptional status drive Status and Error Handling

The table below 33-43 contain General information about the processing in the "Exceptional conditions" relating to the software corresponding to the present invention, and to the specific issues associated with it.

Discusses the skip or change objects, risk of data integrity, as well as clarification that perform specific functions in the drive (including logic, cost, human intervention).

The observation of endoscope is selected States of the drive.

2) At the time of filing this application, disclosing the best mode of carrying out the invention, there are various aspects of power control, the feedback from the laser, the acceptable thresholds of damage when reading from media. With this in mind, in the following description assumes a reliable source operating status of the drive when the level of reading and focusing on the inner radius of the disk during initialization of the drive (power reading and the focus should not be installed in the data area).

3) the recovery Partition refers to the shutdown of drive and non-volatile registration errors caused by the failure recovery. These errors are identified and logged, but the user may attempt to execute the command again. This leads to an increased risk to the integrity of user data with some compensation, provide non-volatile error logging.

4) it is Assumed that more than one initiator is available on the SCSI bus.

5) error Detection must not be blocked (although interrupts may be masked).

6) priorities for the handling of exceptional conditions: 1) the integrity on the specifics of the design of the drive, to some extent, are a function of the market. For the external environment, characterized by high pollution or high vibration level will be differences in performance compared with specific variants of implementation.

8) the LTP should not have additional options when it checks reset, in addition to the currently supported test conditions for data exchange and descriptive status error.

9) Bits 2 and 5 of the register Output General Purpose must be checked for proper polarity power supply. Additional Exceptional Conditions not contained in the Tables:

1) "power", "Hard Reset" and "Soft Reset" discussed above.

2) Processing for Exceptional Conditions "Invalid SCSI command" and "Improper SCSI command discussed in connection with the Processing of SCSI.

3) "power Failure" (5 V and 12 V) currently runs the reset power-up described above. However, currently there is a discussion about what the power failures should be handled differently (interrupt 12 for LTP and no 5 are factors In design). By the time of the filing of this application, this question was still open. However, such a detailed review of etoy, as it is described here.

4) "Error Recording Power of the Laser is related to the control power levels of the recording laser as the Exceptional Conditions are not being implemented and was not considered as the objectives of the study.

5) Condition internal to the block 188 "Defective Entry" indicates improper recording conditions and starts the rotation error. Previously, this Condition was triggered from the actual current measurement. The real measurement of the bias current is now a matter for future consideration. The labels of the items included in the table indicate the design factors that will not interfere with the specialist in the practical implementation of the invention in the form as it is here disclosed.

Readahead cache

This section describes the operation of the Cache read ahead for your RMD-5200-SD. You will first give a General description of the cache, and then will describe its components. This section also describes how to verify for verifying operations of Cache Read-Ahead.

Code 256 cache was developed based on code 128 cache. There are only two distinctive features (in addition to call specific functions nositec detainees errors. (Detainees errors are media errors that are detected before complete correction of the previous sector.) The second difference is that the 256 does not diagnose an error, the Controller Sequence is Stopped". These differences are not critical to the operation of the cache. In this discussion, therefore, no distinction is made between 256 and 128 casinomania.

Code cache readahead itself known. In the present invention are modifications of the source code. These changes were made to improve data integrity and to provide higher functionality. This discussion does not address the questions, what are the characteristics were changed. On the contrary, describes the properties of the best modern mode code.

General information about the cache: Permit Conditions Caching: Caching will be discharged unless all of the following applicable conditions: 1) bit RCD Page Mode 8 set to zero, 2) the Current SCSI command is Read_6 or Read_ 10 in LBA mode addressing, 3) current SCSI read command completed without errors. This includes phase status Test Conditions and redistribution. Caching is not performed if any of pererabotki Cache: prefetch Operation starts at logical block, directly after the last logical block of the previous command read. Errors that occur during the operation of prefetch are not reported to the initiator, unless the recipient may not, in error result correctly to execute subsequent commands. An error will be reported in a subsequent command.

Completion caching: Caching will fail if any of the following events: 1) the last to be cached LBA read, 2) there is an unrecoverable error and retries used, 3) has been Reset Component Tyres, 4) adopted conflicting SCSI command (Conflicting SCSI command is a command that requires the drive to search, access to the buffer, change the drive parameters (spindle speed, status alerts removal of the media, and so on), as discussed below, 5) occurred Interrupt the Drive.

Components Cache: Page 3 Modes: Page 8 Modes defines the parameters that affect the operation of the cache read ahead. However, only bit RCD (bit 0 or bit 2) is having a real impact on the readahead cache in RMD-5200-SD&. This bit is a bit Undo Cache Read (RCD). As this epizoan and cannot be changed relative to their default values.

Cache settings Structure: Drive cache Settings, which indicate the status of the cache read ahead, stored in the structure of the drive drv_ cfg:

1) cache_ctrl (UNIT)

Individual bits describe the current state of the cache:

0x0001: CACHE_ENABLED (REPRESENATATIVE)

Installation page 8 modes allows the user to work with the cache, and the last READ command from the host computer is a Read_6 or Read_10 in LBA mode, and there are blocks that can be cached.

H: CACH_IN_PROG (CACHING)

Indicates that the hardware executes the read caching. Set when the read cache is reset, and is reset when the Program interrupt Service cache sets tcs in the cache queue.

H: CACHE_STOP (STOP CACHING)

Set the task of Controlling the Cache to notify the Program interrupt Service cache on completion of caching.

H: CACHE_TCS_ON_Q

Shows that tcs from the Program interrupt Service is in the queue Control Cache. This function tcs must be serviced before the next reset of the read cache.

H: CACHE_START_SCSI_XFER

Set function the quarrels reading can start SCSI transfer immediately.

H: CACHE_ABORT_REDT_TASK

Set the control of the Cache to indicate that control should return to the SCSI Task Control.

H: CACHE_MORM_IN_PROG

Indicates that the current read operation is performed for the requested data.

2) cache_start_lba (ULONG)

Cached first LBA.

3) cache_cur_lba (ULONG)

Cached LBA, following last cached LBA.

4) cache_buff_addr (ULONG)

The buffer address corresponding to cache_start_lba.

5) cache_xfer_len (UINT)

The number of blocks reserved for caching.

6) cache_blks_rd (UINT)

The number of cached blocks

7) cache_free_space (UINT)

The free space provided for the cached data

8) cache_free_space_predict (UINT)

The expected free space for the cached data.

Cache function: the Function requested by the resolution caching will be described approximately in the order in which they are invoked when a simple sequence caching.

Checking the Queue Routing: (Old Task, New Task):

As the task of the SCSI Control and Task Control Cache can handle TCS from SCSI select the Program Interrupt Service. Only one of these two tasks will be to perform the cha should take any of the following SCSI selection of TCS. Checking the Queue Routing will assign scsi_mon_task=Nowaday. Additionally, the Old Task is filtered. Any TCS with Program Interrupt Service Drive, or a SCSI selection Program Servicing Interrupts are transferred to the queue a New Task. Old TCS exempt.

Checking the Queue Routing is invoked as a SCSI Task control and Task Control cache when control SCSI switches between them.

Comute_cache_rng(): This function is a program broadcast called before starting normal read operations, if the caching can be done later. Its aim is the calculation of the first LBA to be cached, and the maximum number of blocks that can be cached (cache_xfer_len). The length of the cache is truncated by the maximum number of available free space and maximum LBA. Function compute_cache_rng() also initializes drv_cfg.cache_blks_rd=0. If the length of the transfer is correct, then the bit is set CACHE_ENABLED in function drv_cfg. cache_ctrl.

Prep_Cache(): This function is a program broadcast, the purpose of which is to determine whether completed normal reading, and if so, initialize the trail of the NGOs, if the cache can be reset, otherwise it generates FALSE.

Program Interrupt Service Cache (RA_cache_isr or gcrRAC_isr): Program Interrupt Service Cache is a simplified version of the normal Program Interrupt Service read, except that it is simplified in the following areas: 1) when the scan completes, the ESS Program Interrupt Service only checks for free space, and the completion of the package. Unlike normal read cache is not associated with a SCSI port, so that it does not require checking SCSI notification criteria, 2) except error stop controller sequence. Program Interrupt Service Cache does not distinguish between types of errors. Caching does not change the thresholds of errors in repeated attempts, so there is no need to determine the specific type of error, 3) Program Interrupt Service Cache checks bit CACHE_STOP in function drv_cfg.cache_ctrl for each test completes, ECC. If the installation Program Interrupt Service terminates subsequent caching.

Due to its simplified nature of the Program Interrupt Service Cache responds only to the three States of the cache: 1) RA_SFER_ the Oia, 2) RA_RD_ERROR generated when any of the error, unless it was caused by the stop Controller Sequence, 3) RA_SEQ_STOPPED. This error is handled separately due to the fact that the required corrective action to restart the controller sequence.

REQUEST_TASK (New Task): Request_task (task request) sets the state of the calling task in standby mode when activating Novoed. Task request also stores the value of the command pointer in the calling function. The new Task will begin execution at the point where the last time she had encountered a Task Request (indicated by the stored pointer commands).

The task of Controlling Cache: Activation Control problems Cache: Cache Control is activated by the Problem after Reading the last data transfer back to the host computer. After activating it handles TCS from selecting SCSI Programs Servicing interrupts, Software Interrupt Service Drive and Cache.

The task of controlling the Cache is not the true objective in the sense that it is not activated simply by setting TCS in turn. On the contrary, it is called by the Task of Reading through a call to the imposition of the most remote installation in the standby mode. The task of Controlling the Cache returns control to the Task, read on the next call to the Task Request.

It is important to note that at the time when the Task of Controlling the Cache is valid, there is one TCS used by the Task of Reading, which has not yet been returned to the system. The task of Controlling SCSI still waiting for this specific TCS, when control returns to the Task of Controlling SCSI.

Control functions SCSI:

Partly the role of the Task Control Cache is the treatment of TCS SCSI select the Program Interrupt Service. The task of Controlling the Cache starts to get TCS from SCSI select Programs Servicing Interrupts when a Task SCSI control receives the READ command and Page Modes 3 not blocked caching. At this point, the Task SCSI control their routes TCS by calling the Validate Queue Routing (SCSI_MONITOR_TASK, CACHE_MONITOR_TASK).

The task of Monitoring Cache groups SCSI commands into three categories, which include the following: 1) Conflicting Commands, 2) coincides Team, 3) Continuous Commands. Depending on the category team the Task of Controlling the Cache will cancel caching, to run or stop and resume caching.

Conflictos, access to the clipboard, change the drive parameters (spindle speed, status alerts removal of the media, and so on) After receiving conflicting SCSI command Task Control Cache will disconnect and abort caching. The task of the SCSI control will be re-started. The following commands are defined as conflicting: to Reset the Unit, to Prevent/allow removal of the carrier. To Format Sapis, To Reallocate The Block, Poisk, Sternie, Sternie, Sapis, Entry/Verification, Poisk 6, Verification, Selection Mode, The Reading Of The Defective Data Reserve Unit, Write The Buffer To Free The Buffer Reading Unit, The Perception Mode, Read Long, Start/Stop, Record Long Pass Diagnostics, All Unique Provider Command.

The same Time Team: the same time commands are commands that can be performed without deterioration of the cache. The following commands are defined as the same time team: the Validation Block is Ready, the request, the Request identification. The capacity of the reader.

Continuous Commands: Continuous Commands are commands read that can request the cached data and reset Topol.

Processing TCS Program Servicing Interrupts Cache: Cache Control TCS receives from the Program Interrupt Service Cache, then calls the function Ra_CacheIsrProc() to handle TCS.

Task cancellation of Cache Control: Control is returned to the Task of Reading if comes SCSI command READ (read), which requested uncached data. Control returns to the Task of Controlling SCSI if caching is finished due to the appearance of the SCSI reset, Reset Components Tires, conflicting SCSI commands or Interrupts the Drive.

When the Task of Controlling the Cache is canceled, the control returns to the Task of Reading, which can then return control to the Task of Controlling SCSI. The flow of control is determined by the state of the caching task set Task Control Cache. Task status cached assessed through Tasks of Reading, when it re-set by calling ZADACHI REQUEST. The following describes the three task state caching: 1) RAC_TERM: This state indicates that the cache is stopped. The task of Reading will be returned to the Control of SCSI, which immediately returns READ_TCS and performs Wyborcha, because the status and completion teams have already submitted as part of the transition to the Task of Controlling Caching. 2) RAC_CONT: This state indicates that it has received a new READ command and all or part of the requested data is already cached. The task of Controlling Caching dropped SCSI transfer and the CPU is Reading requires waiting for the arrival SCSI TCS. 3) RAC_NEW_REQ: This state indicates that a new READ command is received and none of the requested data is not cached. The processor Reading requires reset "normal" reading and then wait TCS with Program Servicing Interrupts READ.

RaCacheIsrProc(): This Program is called by a Task Control Caching, and its purpose is to act as the task of Reading regarding the transfer from disk. It handles TCS with Program Servicing Interrupts Cache, updates the corresponding parameters in the structure of the drive and resets the additional read operations if necessary.

StopCacheinProg(): This program is called by a Task Control Caching when it takes continuous READ command. The purpose of this program is to complete the installation to its original state current caching process. It checks the bit CACHE_IN_PROG, opreanu Interrupt Caching on the completion of caching. After 5 MS to ensure complete caching bit CACHE_IN_PROG checked again, to make sure that the Program is Servicing Interrupts disabled caching. If the bit is not cleared, it is assumed that caching is terminated by some other means. In this case, bits CACHE_STOP and CACHE_IN_PROG cleared.

RdDataInCache(): This program is called by a Task Control Caching, when she starts the processing of the continuous READ command. Its purpose is to determine whether there is a successful appeal to the cache when a new read request. If this effective treatment is available, then the bit is set CACHE_ START_ SCSI_ XFER team drv_cfg.cache_ctrl. The program RdDataInCache also modifies the command drf_cfg.rw_scsi_blks to reflect how much of the requested blocks cached.

If there is a successful appeal to the cache, but not all the requested data is cached, the program RdDataInCache modifies the structural data of the drive to indicate how many blocks are read, how much is left to count, and where the reading must be renewed.

Performance verification Caching to the advance Reading: Task Description: the program was designed to test the cache designation is slightly modified to obtain STT.With. The CTT program. EXE was used for the verification of cache read-ahead RMD-5200-SD.

The CTT program explores the cache on the first 64 To LBA. The combination is recorded in each of these LBA. Combination consists of all OHA, with the first four bytes are overwritten by the hexadecimal address LBA of the block (except for LBA, 0, whose first four bytes set to 0xFF). The CTT program first checks LBA 0, and if the expected combination is not present, then CTT initializes the disk. If LBA 0 is consistent, then the disk is initialized.

After the disk is initialized, the CTT program performs multiple passes sequential reads 64 To the blocks. The same length of transfer used in the passage. The length of the transfer is then doubled for the next pass. The maximum length of the transfer is 64 block, due to the limited buffer sizes of the adapter of the host computer. Comparison of data for each read to verify the integrity of data.

Verification: the results of the Registration File (Option Line commands: the User can define the log file by executing the command line With: > CTT-fo= filename.ext. If the file registracii.

ID recipient: Program CTT can check different ID recipients, although she can't do it in the same run.

Number of iterations: the User can determine the original length of the transfer. With successive passes of the length of the transfer is doubled, while the length of transfer will not exceed 64 block.

Pause Between Readings: CTT Program will implement the aisles without a pause between readings. Alternatively, however, the CTT program will also pass with pauses between readings. This option ensures that the drive has the time to implement full or partial caching, depending on the delay. Partial caching was checked to ensure that the drive stops caching, when the buffer is full.

The length of the Pause: If you select pause, the user will be prompted about the time delay for pause in MS.

Stop error: CTT Program also queries whether to stop the test if it has detected an error condition (for example, the mismatch of the data or the status of the test conditions). The stop is useful if the user does not log the results to a file, for example, when checking casehistory changes required for the implementation of the Jupiter-1 Kit Controller chip Optical Disk Cirrus Logic and software RMD-5200-SD as the basis.

The architecture of the Jupiter-1 will reduce the number of tasks required in the system. The task of Controlling SCSI (called Task Control) will control all functions of the drive. The task of the reader and writer Task will be to unite the Drive. The functionality of the Task Control Cache with the advance reading will be divided: duplication of control functions will be excluded and the caching feature will move the Drive. Specific changes in (SCSI) the Monitoring Task and the Task of the Drive described above.

Interrupt: Drive Jupiter-1 has four categories of interrupts. They include a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI), SCSI interrupt, interrupt the Drive of the two types.

Nonmaskable interrupts are generated when issued the RESET signal of the SCSI bus, when issued signal ACRESENT 20-pin connector, or when issued the command PWRDNREQ (query lowering power player-machine).

The SCSI interrupt is generated when the first six bytes of the command is accepted when issued the Interrupt signal of the SCSI Bus, the complete transfer of SCSI.

The interruption of the drive (the first type) is generated from three chips: SM331, SM330 and external CODEC. Interrupt with a scheme SM331 are formed when the controller sequence is stopped or when the detected error checking parity vector correction ECC. Scheme SM330 performs interrupt mode 1x or 2x, when read correct ID and there is a media error, the ECC error is detected erroneous sector, the register Count Transfer of Sectors reached zero reference or when an interrupt is generated to Complete the Operation. Scheme SM330 performs interrupt in mode 4, when an error occurs, the ECC is generated or when the interruption Operation is Completed. External CODEC performs interrupt in mode 4, when reading the correct ID occurs a media error is detected erroneous sector. Register Count Transfer of Sectors formed a zero count when there is an abnormal end of the erase or write or is formed when the momentum of the pointer.

The interruption of the Drive (the second type) is generated by the DSP or SLS. The DSP will generate an Interrupt Drive when he can't properly initialized when an error occurs search, found the conditions the constituent values. SLS will generate Prekrivanja Drive, when issued the command Eject cassette Player-machine, pressed the eject button on

front panel issued a limitation signal to push the sensor signal cassette in one of two stable States or when the sensor signal install the cassette is in one of two stable States.

Multitasking Kernel: identification of the Types of Messages: Modern architecture provides a means of identification of type-specific message is received. Currently, the source of the message is aborted and the status message is sometimes used as a type. Integer variables for TCS ID, TCS Source ID, TCS Destination ID is converted into a byte variables. New byte variables for message type is added, maintaining extra bytes as a backup in the header of the TCS. Variable message type will function as a field flag in variant record.

The same time processing: Matching time processing is required for the Jupiter-1 for CD, to: 1) comply with the ordering of the commands in the queue, 2) to react in an environment with multiple initiators on the team, not related to access cadaco Control SCSI block the execution of the block until while the task of the Reader or writer Task finishes processing the current request.

The same time processing in Jupiter-1 will be 1) not allowing the Task Control block after the request is sent to the Task Drive, 2) ensuring all tasks involved in cyclic planning through collaborative use of resources DSPS, 3) allowing the Monitoring Task to implement preemption of Tasks Drive or Low-Level Tasks when receiving Nerzheveyuschey team. To fulfill the conditions (1) the Objective of Control is to use the new service kernel to send a request to the Task Drive. Modern method, consisting in the fact that the case of tasks that should receive the message when an Interrupt occurs the Drive will need to be changed. Routing messages when the Interruption of the Drive will be discussed in detail below. Condition (2) cyclic planning will be implemented as described in the next section. Condition (3) preemption will be implemented as described in the next section. It should be noted that if preemption is not implemented, to control the SCSI interface will need to install semaphore (synchrocity semaphore SCSI in_use.

Round-Robin scheduling: For each task were "equal" access to the resources of the DSP, each task must have recourse to the LTP with periodic time intervals. This has to some extent provided when the task is blocked when it is waiting for the next message, which should arrive in turn. Taking into account the requirements of the matching processing time waiting time from run-time Control Tasks and the time during which the Task of the Drive leaves the LTP should be minimized. Question time-out is discussed in the next section when considering preemption.

If preemption is not required, then the LTP will be arbitrarily divided between tasks. The kernel can expect when the following message will cause the blocking of the current task, while the kernel searches for ready tasks. Planning time-out when the core of such a search will be minimized by 1) reducing the number of tasks that must be checked, 2) by reducing the possible States that can be task. The number of tasks is reduced by eliminating Control Tasks Ahead Is to consolidate the tasks described below in more detail.

The set of possible States for a task currently includes the state of "waiting for a specific message". If you require the same processing time this condition will be invalid and therefore can be eliminated from the system. There would be only three possible States: active, message waiting and standby mode. Check engine code for the task of standby mode and check for tasks waiting for messages that have already been optimized to a high degree. List Reading task, ready to resume, will not add substantial increase performance requirements. The kernel will require an additional 11 to test two additional tasks before returning to the verification of the original problem.

Preemption: the architecture of the Jupiter-1 requires preemption to the extent that nereshaemaya team adopted during command requiring access to the media, could result in preemption of the Task Control Task Drive or Low-Level Tasks. There is no requirement as to the tasks of the Drive to implement preemption Control problems or the Low-Level Tasks. There is evidence that it is better to make the Task Drive presuppostion to identify parts of the code in the Problem Drive and the Task is Low (in particular, special recovery procedures, which require a restart processing for this part, if the task was priorite interrupted. The goal of the Drive, and the Problem of the Low Level should be recorded at the beginning of such parts of the code to identify where to perform the restart. This is similar to the check Interrupt the Drive. If the goal of the Drive, or the Problem of Low level of an active task, but not registered, the task priority will be completely interrupted. I.e., the task can be interrupted and then resumed from the same point without any negative consequences.

If the new command is accepted by the maintainer of the SCSI Interrupt, call the new kernel will be placed on Program exit Interrupt Service to determine whether preemption, and if Yes, to coordinate. If the Task Control was the current task before you run the Program Servicing Interrupts SCSI, do not require preemption. If the goal of the Drive, or the Problem of the Low Level was the current task, it will be a priority interrupted.

If the new nereshaemaya team adopted a Maintenance Programme the mA Service Interrupt is output to cause a new maintenance program kernel for the detection task registration. If it is not registered, it will be interrupted by a Task Control and will be resumed at the point where it was interrupted when the resumption of cyclic planning. If the task is registered, the kernel is 1) turn off the drive, 2) output drive of the Spiral Mode (Command Drive to GCHQ), 3) to trace the Problem with the Drive or the Task of Low Level to restart at the registered address, 4) migrate the Task of Control. Once the Task Control processed a new team, it will cause the kernel to wait for the next message. The kernel will then enter a Loop Waiting for a ready task. The problem with the Drive or the Problem of the Low Level is ready, the kernel will coordinate and its execution will be resumed with a registered address with the value in AH the pointer that was restarted.

Any access to the media, where GCHQ monitors in real time some aspect of the disk (for example, expects label sector), will be terminated, if the Task Control led to the preemption. These parts of the code will require management by registering to restart when preemption.

Once the target Drive or Task Low Orowth package to complete and send a message to a task to indicate that the package is completed. The task then provides output from the queue and reset the next service. Preemption after hardware reset, will not create any problems with the drive control.

During a subsequent search of the media access code search cancels the SCSI interrupt, try to read the ID and expects to 16 MS Program Servicing Interrupts for SCSI read ID, which was fixed. For these 16 MS Program Servicing Interrupts SCSI cannot be executed, which means that the SCSI bus is potentially retained in the middle Phase of the Command (after the first six bytes read SM331). If the search is successful, SCSI interrupts will be blocked from when the code is run a search for reading the ID to return the code to the code setup (for example, gcr_StartRdVfy), after all registers are installed and after the controller sequence is started. In order to better handle this condition, the new architecture will allow the Monitoring Task priority to interrupt the search. This will be done by combining code search for preemption and permission SCSI interrupt. If the SCSI interrupt (requiring priority interrupt) occurs is. (This assumes that the LTP will install all command to Block the Spiral at the end of the search). If the SCSI interrupt (requiring priority interrupt) occurs after the search is completed, but before the hardware reset, the code must recycle at its registered address, and ultimately to re-search. If a SCSI interrupt occurs after hardware reset, the media access priority is completely interrupted and therefore does not require alignment.

The size of the stack: the stack Size for each task is currently set as 512 bytes. With increasing modularity, Oevenum for Jupiter-1, and additional levels required for control commands, ordered in all, caching and so on, you may need to increase the stack size to 1024 bytes. When the number of tasks up to three memory allocated for the stack decreases.

The structure configuration of the drive: Identification Media Type: you will Need to software defined media type, put in drive, to coordinate their respective programs for each media type. Individual bits in a variable Config Drive: When the requirement coincides processing, as described above, the Task of Monitoring should ensure the determination of the current status of the drive and issue the appropriate message according to a newly created event. This will be done by introducing a new variable "state of the drive", which will only manage the Task of Controlling. In table 44 below is a list of possible States of the drive.

The task of the Drive can change the status from "Read" to "Reading without separation" or "Read with a separation".

Self-calibration at power-up: Checksum ROM: When checking the ROM currently calculates a checksum for a single EPROM. For dual design Jupiter-1 range for the ROM checksum must include the address area for both circuits. Address area for both chips looks HS to 0xFFFFF.

Diagnostics buffer NVR: Diagnostics buffer NVR will be significantly longer for the 4 MB buffer NVR. Jupiter-1 must ensure that the treatment of choice SCSI after 250 MS. The software currently has a two-stage initialization. Phase 1 Initialization, when the choice is not allowed, the drive performs its diagnosis (at present the result in step 2 Initialization where it can handle the selection and to respond only to commands from the Unit for Inspection, and Request. In stage 2, the drive reads the EEPROM initializing Query Data, Data mode Pages and various other data structures. It is at stage 2 Initialization should be checking 4 MB buffer NVR Jupiter-1.

Diagnosis NVR: If the diagnostics NVR for both chip static NVR requires a relatively long time, then the test can be divided and the remaining parts to complete phase 2 Initialization as described above for the Buffer NVR.

Reset with Player-Machine: If the drive detects that the Discharge from the Player of the Machine issued, the drive must wait cancel this command before attempting to read the status of the 20-pin connector for SCSI ID and allow checking for SCSI parity. Drive Jupiter-1 can perform the entire phase 1 Initialization when issuing a Reset command from the Player of the machine. When the drive is ready to initialize the SCSI part SM331, it checks the chip CRL to detect the presence of 20-pin connector. If it is not connected, then the SCSI ID and the permission checking SCSI parity is determined by additional jumpers: If 20 is the level of the Reset command from the Player of the machine. If this command is canceled, the signals with 20-pin connector will determine the SCSI ID and the permission checking SCSI parity.

The bootstrapping: the Initialization Code: Code for phase 2 Initialization is contained in the Problem of Bootstrap. The task of Bootstrap initializes, it creates other problems drive and then replaced by the code for Task Control. It takes time for blending Tasks Bootstrap to the Problem of Control. Jupiter-1 will place the code phase 2 Initialization in the program, which will first be performed in the Task Control. After initialization Task Control will jump to the code that it normally performs. Due to the control cycles defined in each task, the task is not out of the loop. The initialization code will be placed before the loop task and will therefore only be executed if the task is initially created by the kernel.

A single Read command and Write. Modern architecture has specific objectives for 1x read 2 read, 1 write and 2 record. More than one type of media at any given point in time cannot be installed in the drive. Only one function, write or read, maybe the cha Read/Write.

The initialization code stage 2 will only create a single task read/write, referred to in this discussion the objective of the Drive. Additional details below.

Initializing Tapes: Initialization of the Cassette is performed when the power is turned on when a cassette is already in the drive, or after power up, when the cassette is introduced. Modern architecture initialize at the time of power-as part of Bootstrap. When the cartridge is entered after power-up, initialization is performed as part of a Program Interrupt Drive, representing the Program Interrupt Service. Due to the new structure of interrupt with CAC and message timeout function to initialize the tape must run as a task, so that she could accept the message in turn. (Only tasks are queued). The initialization code stage 2 will transmit the message to the Task Drive to initialize the tape when the power is turned on and when the cassette is introduced. Initializing tapes is discussed below in more detail.

(SCSI) Task Control: Treatment with Coincidence in Time:

Control and Management Status spisivaut the ratio between received SCSI commands, state drive, different messages used throughout the architecture of the drive. As previously mentioned, table 44 lists the States of the drive.

Commands that are Not Associated with Access to the Media: the Problem of Control will remain responsible for executing commands that do not require access to the media, such as the readiness of the Unit to the Verification Request, the Authentication Mode.

Command Start/Stop Spindle: In modern architecture SCSI Task Control executes the Command Start/Stop the Spindle. To ensure processing by the coincidence in time when the command is executed, this command must be run as a separate task. For Compatibility with the architecture when performing initialization of the cassette has a team of "Slow rotation". As for Low-Level Tasks, see below.

SCSI Scan: the SCSI Command search will now be handled by the Task Drive. This is required to ensure that the Task of Monitoring could support same-time processing new commands when they are taken. The objective of the Control will change the status of the drive to "Search" and send the message to the Task Drive to search. Seduciton.

Team Access to the Media: the Problem of Control will provide a message in the Task Drive for each of the commands read, verify, erase, write, write/verification and formatting. The objective of Control is to set the status of the drive in "Read", "Write", "Formatting" as needed. Task Control will not block its execution while waiting, when the Task Drive will satisfy the request. The task of the Drive will return a status message in the Task Control to indicate that the request is satisfied.

State Reading and Caching: When a read request is accepted from the initiator. The objective of Control is to check allowed if the current Page Modes 08h caching when reading. If it is allowed and no other commands in the queue, the Task Control will transmit the message to the Task Drive to begin processing request reading and after implementation to start readahead Cache. The status of the drive at this point will change to "Read caching". If other commands are in the queue. The task of Monitoring should determine, not does the following command caching. If so, then the Drive GIP Read. The status of the drive at this point is changed to "Read Caching". If other teams were present in the queue, the Task of Monitoring would determine, not does the following command caching. If so, the message is sent to the Drive, should specify that caching was not running and the status of the drive must be set to "Reading without caching".

If read caching was enabled and started and then would be adopted by the other team, the Task Control (running with the coincidence in time) had to determine whether to stop Caching the advance Reading. If the received command was, for example, a write request, the Task Control would send the message to the Task Drive to abort Caching with Leading Read and invalidate data in the cache. If the received command was a query command is read, the Task Control would send the message to the Task Drive to stop Caching Read-Ahead and save the data in the cache. Question message handling Interrupts Drive relating to the above will be discussed below.

The status of this Entry and the Cache is anitsa Modes 08h selective caching. If permission is given and no other commands in the queue, the Task Control will send the message to the Task Drive to process the write request, as necessary. The status of the drive at this point will be changed to a write Request with caching". If other teams were present in the queue. The objective of the Control was determined to be not does the following command caching. If so, the message is passed to the Task Drive should indicate that caching is not suitable and the status of the drive will be set to "write Request without caching".

If write caching was enabled and the other team would be adopted, the Task Control (running simultaneously) would determine whether to stop the write caching. If the received command was, for example, a read request, the Task Control would send the message to the Task Drive to stop the write Caching and reset the data in the cache to the media. If the received command was a write request, the Task Control did not undertake any action in addition to setting commands in the queue for processing after the current request is satisfied. The relevant question message processing Pre is Elena as a SCSI Bus Reset or Query Lowering Power player-machine. When one of these events occurs, the maintenance Program nonmaskable interrupt will be invoked to send the message in the Task Control. Based on the status of the drive, the Task of Control is to take corrective action, as described below.

When you received the message "SCSI Bus Reset", the Objective of Control is to check the current status of the drive. If the drive is in the current state of "Write", then the message "to Suppress the Write Cache will be passed to the Task of the Drive state of the drive will change to "Suppress the Write Cache and then Reset. When the Task returns the message "the Status of Suppression, the Task of Control is to explore the Reset is in bytes 14 Pages of Unique Modes Provider 21h. If configured hard reset, the Task Control sets the state of the drive in the "Hard Reset" and then initiates a hard reset by jumping to the address of the bootstrap (0FFFF0h). If configured programmable reset, the Task Control sets the state of the drive in "Programmable Reset" and then initiates a programmable reset. If the message "SCSI Bus Reset" accepted and the drive is in the current state of "Reading", then the Task of Control is islamy reset, as indicated.

When you received the message "the Request to Decrease Power, the Task of Control is to explore the current state of the Drive. If the drive is in the current state of the Record, the message "to Suppress the Write Cache will be passed to the Task of the Drive state of the drive is changed to Suppress the Write Cache, then the Power decreases". When the Task Drive returns the message "the State of Suppression, the Task of Control is to change the status of the drive to "Decrease power" and to issue the corresponding confirmation signal PWRDNACK 20-pin connector. When you received the message "the Request to decrease the Power and the drive is able to "Read", then the Task of Control is to set the status of the drive in the "Lower Power" and to give the signal PWRDNACK 20-pin connector. Note: Additional actions should be taken after the grant signal PWRDNACK or remaining restrictions.

The ordering of the Commands in the Queue: Tagged or nechirvan ordering in the queue. Each of these issues is a factor in design and should not hinder the practical implementation specialists of the present invention in the form as it is here Runkle media access and caching. You want a single task, because only one type of media access can take place at any given time and only one type of caching is supported at any given time. The objective of Control is to transmit messages to the task Drive to request the appropriate service.

Service SCSI commands: When a Task Drive receives a message requesting service for SCSI commands (search, read/verify, erase/write, format), software Tasks Drive will branch to the appropriate route for reading, writing, formatting, or then for carriers such as 1x, 2x or 4x. The code for each media type will be maintained as a separate set of modules for reasons of maintenance and stability, as before.

Initializing tapes: the initialization Function of the cassette will be the Task of the Drive, if a message was received from the Task Control when the power is turned on. When the cartridge is entered after power-up, the Program Interrupt Drive will send the message "Cartridge empty" Task Control. The objective of the Control will change the status of the drive on "Loading"et to send the message "Request Start/Stop Spindle" in the Task of Low Level, as is described below. As soon as the cassette is loaded successfully and promoted to the desired speed, the Drive will determine the cartridge type and media format to read the defect Management Area, overwrite such areas when necessary to initialize the structure defects. After the initialization process is completed, the Drive will respond with the message "Initialize the status of the Cassette, passed into the Task Control. The state of the drive will then be changed to "Pending".

Reading and Caching the advance Reading: the Code reads in the Problem Drive provides control procedure read Caching with Leading Reading, determining, when there has been an effective treatment in the cache, or making a decision about access to the media. Messages from the Task Control will control the actions of the Drive reading, caching or not caching use.

When the Task of the Drive receives a completion message is read, the message will indicate whether to start caching after the reading is finished. The message "Request read without caching" shows that the Problem Drive is the Task of the Drive should plan to expand the read caching. If any of these messages adopted by the Task Drive, the Task Control will set the state of drive in the appropriate status read.

The task of the Drive may take other messages when performing read without caching to ignore the initial query caching and without extending the reading. If you receive the message "Stop caching when reading" the aim of the Drive is to satisfy only the uncached portion of the reading. If caching has not started yet, the Task of the Drive will not run faster reading. If caching is already started, then read-ahead is disabled and all cached data will be stored. State diagram Read Mode shown in Fig.122. If you receive the message "Interrupt cache read, the Task of the Drive will satisfy only the uncached portion of the reading. If caching is not started, then the Task of the Drive will not run faster reading. If caching is already started, then read-ahead is disabled and all cached data will be invalid.

Readahead cache will buffer sector with the latest LA, AVA or sector "Abort caching when reading", 2) will be satisfied provided the maximum prefetch, 3) does not have enough space in the buffer NVR, 4) sector will not be able to be restored within the current thresholds.

The goal of the Drive, if necessary, should keep the label of the Tracer Interrupt the Drive. If the interruption of the Drive occurs when performing read-ahead, the task of the Drive must determine the conditions of termination, to take appropriate action to reset them and start the restore operation. Manipulation of the tagged Tracer Interrupt the Drive are described below.

Write caching: This discussion will be with reference to Fig.123. Record ID in the Task Drive provides the decision when to access media cache control when writing, time management expectations cache buffer entries and the suppression of the write cache. Message from the Task Control should control the actions of the procedure record.

If the goal of the Drive receives a message about the recording, the message will show whether the data to be cached. The message "write Request with caching" indicates that the Task Drive can casino Account without Caching" indicates the objective of the Drive may not cache data under any circumstances.

The task of the Drive may take other messages when executing a cached entry is to suppress the contents of the Cache Entry. If you receive the message "Stop Write Caching", the Task of the Drive will meet the current write request and then flushing all cached data to the medium. If you receive the message "the Suppression of the Write Cache", then the Task of the Drive will meet the current write request, if he is in the process of execution and then flushing all cached data to the medium, or if there is no current request, then all cached data will be flushed to the media.

Function Write Caching is the advantage of coherence data from multiple SCSI write requests. Sector with many queries, which represent a contiguous region can be combined into a single media access, which ensures less waste during processing. Sector, which are continuous, can be cached. Sector, which occupy several non-contiguous areas, determine that sector located in the cache, will require pain is neither, as defined Maximum Waiting Time buffer in the Page Modes 21h. If the write request is cached, then the Task of the Drive will request that a Maintenance Program Timer conveyed the message after a certain time set by the Timeout Buffer. If the goal of the Drive receives a message about blocking time before the data will be transferred to the medium (due to the non-contiguous nature of sequential requests), then the Task of the Drive will start the data transfer (and all continuous data) to the media. If the data has been transferred to the media sector, representing non-contiguous areas, the Task of the Drive will request that the maintenance programme timer is not conveyed the message time block previously requested.

Requires only one lock at a time at any given point in time to control time-out buffer. The only timeout corresponds to the first write request, which is cached. If the subsequent request is continuous, then the query will be cached with the first and recorded on the data carrier in accordance with the first query, i.e., only when the lock time. If next C is enena and would have requested a new timeout for the next request.

The goal of the Drive, if necessary, can save the label of the Tracer interrupting the Drive. If the interruption of the Drive occurred during the execution of Write Caching, the Task of the Drive must determine the condition of the interrupt, to take appropriate action to reset them and start the restore operation. The manipulation of labels Tracer Interrupt Drive will be described below.

Task Low Level: Low Task Level in the modern design provides processing system requests a read, verify, erase, write, or special recovery strategy sectors. These requests are used when reading the defect Management Areas, in the distribution sector, with automatic reallocation sector, when the error recovery record and recovery errors in the readings. New functions for Low-Level Tasks are processing Requests Run/Stop Spindle and Requests Eject a Cartridge.

If you require the same processing time, the Task of Control is to carry out an orderly survey regarding the events associated with the operations of the spindle or with operations push, when ongo Level. The task of Low Level has its own queue and may be blocked while waiting for the occurrence of various events.

When a Task is Low Level receives a "Request Start/Stop the Spindle, it will issue a Command to the Drive to start or stop the spindle and then to control the timeout. When adopted, the Team Drive start the spindle, the Software Commands the Drive will issue the appropriate command on the speed of the IC chip on the drive control of the spindle. The team will be issued in the DSP to control the speed of the spindle and issuing the interrupt, when the spindle reaches the required minimum speed.

To control the time required for the start function of the spindle, the Task of Low Level will issue a request to the Service Program Timer for receiving messages at a certain time (TBD). The task is Low then will wait for one of two messages. When the LTP is the interrupt for the case of achieving the specified spindle speed is called the Interrupt handler of the Drive. Task Low Level as the registered message listener Interrupts the Drive will receive the message the time the spindle is no longer required and the message "Status Start/Stop Spindle" will be returned in the Task Control. If the message received time block spindle, the spindle has not reached the specified speed. Will be issued to Command the Drive to stop the spindle and the message "Status Start/Stop Spindle will be transmitted to the Monitoring Task. It is currently discussing whether to monitor the function of stopping the spindle.

Program Maintenance Timer Maintenance Timer is a new service provided by the Jupiter-1. Maintenance program Timer provides specialized use Timer 1 and Timer 2. Timer 0 available for use at any time by software. Maintenance program Timer provides a message to the requester after a certain time. If multiple requests are overlapped, the Maintenance Program Timer provides control of individual queries and generates the messages correctly in a certain time.

Program Service Timer will accept two types of queries: Enter the Timer Event to Delete an Event Timer. If accepted, the request to Enter the Timer Event and there are no outstanding requests, the Program Service Timer will start the timer on for arachna event timer and return to the caller to handle the timer event. When the timer interrupt, the Program Service Timer will remove the query from the beginning of the list of timer events and send the message to the requester. When the Program Service Timer receives a request for the timer event, when there are one or more pending requests, the Program Service Timer will put the request in the list of timer events, ranging in accordance with increasing delays. All the timer event in the list will be processed at intervals of Delta time. If you are requesting a new event, which is placed in front of an existing event, then for an existing request and all subsequent events in the list will be re-calculated their new intervals "Delta". If the new request is accepted with less lock time than the current request at the beginning of the queue, the timers will be reprogrammed and new intervals "Delta" will be consistently defined for the entire list.

If accepted, the request to Delete a Timer Event, the Program Service Timer will use the basis obtained from the request to Enter the Timer Event to identify the event timer and remove it from the list of timer events. If the deleted event was natalitia in the list and a new interval "Delta" will be consistently defined for the entire list. If the deleted event was in the middle of the list, the interval "Delta" for remote events is sequentially shifted down the list.

Program servicing interrupts for the case namascusa interrupt: If an event occurs in the Database SCSI Bus or Request a Decrease in Power from the player-machine, it will be caused by a Program Interrupt Service for namascusa interrupt. This Program will query the CRL determination of the source of the interrupt and then send the message to the Monitoring Task. Based on an incoming message, the Task of Control is to take corrective action, as described above.

If the bit is Reset SCSI Bus in register CRL confirmed, Namastasyai Interrupt was due to a command line Reset SCSI Bus and the message "Reset SCSI bus" will be passed to the Task Control. If the bit is Reset Player-machine in the register CRL confirmed, Namastasyai Interrupt was due to a command line Reset Player-machine and the message "Reset Player-machine" will be passed to the Task Control. If the Request is Lowering Power Player-machine in the register CRL confirmed, Namastasyai Interrupt was oela-machine" will be passed to the Task of Control.

Interruption of Drive: the interruption of the Drive is an exclusive event related to the drive, such as bug tracking, bug search query eject a cartridge. This section discusses the mechanism required to notify the software that has occurred to Interrupt the Drive and what messages should be generated under such conditions.

Notification Interrupt Drive: If an Interrupt occurs the Drive, they require different recovery procedures, depending on what was done the drive in case of such an event. For example, if the drive was in standby mode and in the "push" caused the displacement tracking, then there is no need to restore. If, on the other hand, was reading, the drive must require a re-search, and then continue the read operation.

Only the current task, interacting with the drive, has the ability to take the necessary measures to restore, based on how the task was carried out. Therefore, the notification that was the interruption of the Drive must be delivered in the current task, interacting with discovod is to be responsible for interrupting the Drive. The first notification mechanism is therefore the direction of the message in the appropriate task, bearing such responsibility, in the event of interruption of the Drive. The aforementioned task is identified by a variable task_id_router, which is jointly managed by all tasks.

The first mechanism is based on each task waiting to receive messages, one of which may be a message Interrupt Drive. If the software is not waiting for a message, stop for the orderly implementation of the survey would mean a significant loss of computing resources. The second used the notification mechanism is not based on the survey objectives to define the event of interruption of the Drive. At critical points of the software can record on the register the code for vectorization when an Interrupt occurs the Drive. If this interrupt is missing, you will not need additional time in addition to costs for loading/unloading from the register.

Interrupt handling the Drive and the Coincidence in time: the Interrupt handler is executed as a Program Interrupt Service, first as this Program with a small core when blocking prirodna illustrative situation.

Example 1

Searches and SCSI interrupts are blocked. The drive has an error search, and thus there is interruption of the Drive. Program Interrupt Drive will be run as a Program Interrupt Service. If another SCSI command received, the hardware would have handled the first six bytes. The remaining bytes would expect Programmed I/O in the Maintenance Program of the SCSI Interrupt after the Interrupt function the Drive will allow interrupts. Because the drive was in search mode, the SCSI interrupt will be masked. So all the time, when you restore using Interrupt Drive (including re-treatment, if necessary), then the SCSI bus could be supported in the middle of the command.

Events and Messages of the Interrupt function Drive:

Specifies the source of the interrupt.

Sends the current message to the registered message listener Interrupts the Drive.

Sends messages to the command prompt Ejection of the Cassette from the Player-machine, a Request to Eject a Cartridge from the Front Panel, Set the Spindle Speed, the Limit With

Interrupt routing for the Drive and Caching: Task Control sends TCS for invalidation of Cache Read-Ahead, if you want the label of the Tracer Interrupt the Drive.

The task of the Drive must be registered as a task to receive messages Interrupt the Drive when it caches to the advance Reading. If there is an Interruption of the Drive (for example, error tracking, you will need the Task Drive for implementing corrective actions. The Monitoring task must submit the message to the Task Drive to her message about the need to stop and return the label of the Tracer Interrupt the Drive.

SCSI Transfer Mode Programmed I/O: If the transfer exceeds a certain number (TBD) of bytes to copy the data in the Buffer SOUPS and then from there, bring the Defective Management Area.

SCSI Messages: Reset components of the Tyre, to Complete the I/O to Stop.

Events: The Events List.

The types of Messages:

Types of Sources of Current TCS

SCSI_TCS Skip request from the Task Control Task Drive

ATTN_TCS From the Program Interrupt Drive

LL_RD Error Sector

Should be replaced with:

Message

SCSI Bus Reset

Reset with Player-machine

Request to Decrease Power Player-machine

TCS Interrupt Drive

Error (error, Search, Error, focus, Improper speed cassette and so on)

The tape in the neck

The tape on the sleeve

Request to Eject the Cassette from the player of the machine or from the front panel)

Limit Pushing

The required Spindle Speed

The Event request Timer

The Event occurred Timer

Request Start/ Stop Spindle

Status Start/Stop Spindle (correct, error)

Request to Eject a Cartridge

Status Eject a Cartridge (correct, error)

Request Initialization Tapes

Status Initialize Tape (correct, error, cartridge type)

Label Tracer Interrupt Drive

Return the Label of the Tracer Interrupt Drive (DAR)

Label DAR returned the Search Request

The status of the Search (label DAR returned)

Request Read caching

The Read request without caching

Status Read

Stop Caching When Reading (Read Request will follow)

Record status

Stop caching when Recording (to record and to suppress the Write Cache)

Request Timer Recording (to record the selected part of the Write Cache to the media)

To suppress the Write Cache (Reset or Query Lowering Power)

Status Suppression

The hardware requirements are: 1) 2K NVR for shading nonvolatile NVR for quick access to stored data. This allows you to satisfy the requirements for nerazidentoy commands (for example, Authentication Mode, Authentication of Registration). 2) the Elapsed Time Counter for counting hours of power.

Electronic circuits

The electronic circuit of the drive consists of three blocks of circuits: integrated circuit of the spindle motor shown in Fig.101A-101G, the scheme is flexible and conclusions with preamps, shown in Fig. 102-105, and the main circuit Board that contains most of the functional elements of the drive shown in Fig.A - 1119.

Integrated circuit Board of the motor spindle

Fee motor spindle has three functions. One function associated with the reception of signals of the actuator to the connector J2 (Fig.101A) and passing them to the main Board through soedineniya and preamp coarse position sensor. These features are described below.

It is shown in Fig.101A-C circuit provides excitation of the spindle motor. Diagram of the exciter spindle contains a cascade U1 (Fig.101), which is a brushless exciter, and various components for stabilization of the spindle motor (motor not shown). Circuit U1 is programmable and uses the clock signal of 1 MHz is supplied from the main Board. Circuit U1 FCOM sends a pulse signal to the main Board, so that the main Board can control the speed of the spindle.

The schema shown in Fig.101A-C, provides for the formation of the gross value of the position error. Operational amplifiers U2 and U3 form the error signal. Circuits U2 and U3 use power supplies 12 V and +5 C. the Source of +5 V is used as a reference. The reference signal is distributed through a ferrite bead to the input conclusions 3 and 5 cascade U3, which has the feedback resistors R18, R19 at 487 and capacitors C19 and C20 47 pF connected in parallel. Two amplifier with impedance connection: U3A, U3B accept an input signal from a position-sensitive detector located in the Executive mechanism (not shown). The detector is similar to the multi-channel photodiode l with U2A is transmitted to the main Board as a rough value of the position error.

Another operational amplifier U2B is the reference level on the input pin 6 is formed by the resistors R23, R17. This reference level requires that the total output signal of the amplifier with impedance connection: U3A,U3B at 5 U2B would be the same as in point 6 of the divider resistors R23, R17. The capacitor C21 in the feedback circuit causes the action U2B as integrator, stirring while the transistor Q3 through the resistor R21. The transistor Q3 excites the light-emitting diode, which emits light to the photodiode (not shown). This closed system is basically a closed loop guarantees a certain level of voltage at the outputs of amplifiers: U3A, U3B.

In accordance with Fig.101A-G, other features of this Board is connected with the drive eject the drive. The agent engine is a cascade, made by the Darlington circuit Q1 (Fig.E), the limited current of the transistor Q2, as defined by the resistor R7. The diode D1 and C11 are the squelch for the engine (not shown). The position of the ejection mechanism of the cassette is detected by a sensor Hall effect U4 (Fig.101D), providing a positioning gear in the process of ejection of the cassette. There are three per cartridge and a request switch on the front panel of the ejection of the cassette from the main processor.

Pre-amplifiers

Two options are described pre-amplifiers. Common elements shown in Fig.102A-D and 103A-D. Various elements for the two embodiments shown in Fig.A-V.

Flexible output optical module shown in Fig.102A-B, has three main functions. One is implemented amplifying section with impedance connection, the other preamplifier channel is read, and the third is the causative agent of the laser.

In Fig.102A presents connector J4; the signals coming from U1 (V), formed through impedances communication. TD and RD are the two quadrature detectors for signals from the tracking system. During initial alignment of the XI is not connected to x2, so that the separate quadrature detectors can be adjusted separately. Then conclusion 1 XI is connected with pin 1 x2, pin 2 XI - conclusion 2 x2, and so on, the Sum of the currents of the two quadrature detectors are amplified in the amplifiers impedance connection U1A-U1D. Four quadrature signal to generate the signals of the tracking system on the main Board. Amplification with the impedance bond in amplifiers U1A-U1D is carried out using resistors of 100 kω RP1A, RP1B, RP1C, RP1D with parallel connected capacitors CC, sensitive to the input effect, an indication of output power of the laser and transmitted to the main Board via connector J4 on the output 15.

As shown in Fig. V, U106 connected with J103, which represents another quadrature detector, two quadrants which are used to generate a differential magneto-optical signal and the total signal. VM8101, U106 is a pre-amplifier, specially designed for the magneto-optical pathogens and is an amplifier with impedance connection. The signal reading (+/-) U106 can switch between the values of the difference and sum signal by using signal pre-formation coming from pin 6 of connector J103.

In Fig. 103A-D presents the level converters U7B, U7C, U7D for the recording level, representing three of the differential amplifier, which compensated for stability with large capacitive loads. The resistors and capacitors connected to U7B, U7C, U7D, provide stabilization. These differential amplifiers have a gain of 1/2 to set recording levels for the bases of transistors Q301, Q302, Q303, Q304, Q305, Q306, shown in Fig.A-th different recording levels for the various pulses in the pulse sequence, which will write magneto-optical signals.

The fourth operational amplifier U7A (Fig.S) sets the current reading. U7A excites Q12, and the current, respectively, is reflected in the output signals of the transistors Q7, Q8, Q9. This current in Q7, Q8 is the actual current reading is transmitted to the laser.

System with optical disks made according to the invention, includes a combination containing the laser, the first means for passing an electric current to the laser, digital logic means for switching power to the first means for excitation of the laser, and electric power is consumed only when the laser is activated, thus improving the characteristics of the rise and fall switching. In a preferred embodiment, the digital logic means includes buffer cascades on CMOS structures, U301, U302, as shown in Fig.A and B, which can be connected between electrical ground and the full supply voltage. In addition, the first means preferably performed using pass transistors Q301-Q306 (Fig.A-IN).

In accordance with another aspect of the claimed system with optical diskette through the feedback circuit. The preferred implementation of this feedback circuit includes an electronic circuit for signal tracking circuit for correction of the focusing mechanism and a tracking mechanism, first means for passing an electric current to the laser and digital logic means for switching power to the first means for excitation of the laser, and electric power is consumed only when the excitation laser to provide improved characteristics rise and fall times switching. In this embodiment, the digital logic means may include a buffer cascades on CMOS structures, preferably included between the electrical ground and the full supply voltage. The first tool, as discussed above, may be implemented using pass transistors.

In Fig. A-presents pulse pathogens and means for turning the laser LD1. The laser actually protected by gates in CMOS structures U301, U302A to ensure that with the increasing of the voltage level of the laser are not exposed to current emissions. Cascade U302A provides a low logic level, which is determined by the enable signal of the laser, the findings of 1, 2 and 3 cascade U302A will not receive the permission signal through a high logic level on the outputs 20, 21, 22 and 23 of the cascade U302A. It also provides the resolution of the excitation laser pulses records only after the laser is running. The run input 4 cascade U302A that controls the inputs of stages 301A, B and W.

Enabling inputs (pins 13 and 24 cascades U302 and U301 and the output 24 of the cascade U301A) correspond to the signals account for strobe write strobe write 2 and gate entry 3, respectively. The inclusion of the current sources formed by transistors Q301-Q306, provides three levels of entry. Ferrite spacers 301 and 302 (Fig.V) provide isolation voltage read from the write current, and prevent the tip of the radio frequency modulation on the cables.

In accordance with Fig.105A-B6 cascade U303 is a component IDZ3, manufactured by Hewlett Packard, which is a custom chip that performs the function of generating current with a frequency of 460 MHz. This current is supplied to the laser for radio frequency modulation for reducing noise of the laser. Its output is isolated by S. Control input (pin 1 cascade U303) is provided to turn on and off modulation.

The present invention preduster lsnim the transition process. The generator includes a resonant circuit for the oscillator with high active resistance. The resonant circuit may also contain inductance. In one aspect of the present invention, the generator has a high supply voltage, allowing easier implementation of the increase of the amplitude of the radio frequency modulation and reduce transients. In a preferred embodiment, the electrical circuit of an improved three-point capacitive generator parallel power supply, as described in more detail below, includes a transistor having emitter, base and collector, a source of voltage and a resistor in series between the collector and the source supply voltage, while the transition process of the generator decreases when the application of pulses to the generator. Preferably can be provided by the load inductance, connected in series with a load resistor. In this embodiment, the recording pulses fed to the connection point between the load resistor and the load inductance and the resonant circuit split capacitor can be connected between the collector and ground, in parallel with the emitter and collector.


parallel power supply includes a transistor having emitter, base and collector, the resonant circuit with a split capacitor connected between the collector and the ground in parallel with the emitter and collector, a source of supply voltage, load inductance and load resistor in series between the collector and the supply voltage, making the transition process of the generator decreases when the application of pulses of a write to the connection point between the load resistor and load inductance. This option also requires an increased supply voltage, making it easier to increase the amplitude of the radio frequency modulation and reduction of transients. This three-point capacitive generator parallel power supply with a load circuit having increased resistance, can effectively be provided in combination with the laser and the pulsed source records. In a preferred embodiment, the load circuit includes the inductance.

This combination may alternatively include a laser, a source of pulses of the recording, the source of electrical supply voltage, three-point capacitive generator with computers, is connected in series between the collector and the supply voltage, allowing transients generator can be decreased by applying pulses to the generator. It may contain the inductance of the resonant circuit, is connected in series with a load resistor, and the recording pulses fed to the connection point between the load resistor and the inductance of the circuit, and/or resonant circuit with a split capacitor between the collector and ground, in parallel with the emitter and collector.

In another embodiment, this combination is for use in the system of drive corresponding to the present invention, includes a laser source pulse recording, three-point capacitive generator parallel power supply containing a transistor having emitter, base and collector, and a resonant circuit with a split capacitor between the collector and ground, in parallel with the emitter and collector, a source of supply voltage, load inductance and load resistor in series between the collector and the supply voltage, allowing transients generator can be decreased by applying pulses records to the connection point between the load is resistive impedance and a high supply voltage, making easier the implementation of the increase of the amplitude of the radio frequency modulation and reduce transients. The way to reduce transients in capacitive three-point generator parallel power supply includes the steps of increasing the load resistance in the generator and increase the voltage generator.

As shown above, the claimed system with optical disks having a focusing mechanism and a tracking mechanism, and mechanisms preferably are controlled by the feedback circuit containing an electronic circuit for processing the signals of the tracking error for correction of the focusing mechanism and a tracking mechanism, a laser, a source of pulses records three-point capacitive generator parallel power having emitter, base and collector, the resonant circuit with a split capacitor between the collector and ground, in parallel with the emitter and collector, a source of supply voltage, the inductance of the resonant circuit and the load resistor in series between the collector and the power source, thus reducing transients in the generator for applying pulses of the recording is shown in Fig. 104, the second option uses a three-point capacitive generator parallel power transistor Q400 (Fig.V), split capacitor C and S and inductance L400. This scheme uses a bias voltage of 12 V and resistive load R400 for 2 To ensure that the recording pulses coming through the ferrite bead FB301, did not cause transients in the circuit of the generator. The blocking oscillator may be provided by the signal on the base by zakolachivaniya R402 on the ground.

Known schemes capacitive three-point generator parallel power supply used a 5 V supply voltage and inductance instead of R400. This proposed design provides a sufficient level of amplitude modulation of the laser to reduce noise. In the known circuit, however, transients occurred whenever the application of pulses of the recording. In the present invention, the recording pulses do not cause the transition process, as the inductance is replaced by a resistor R400. To eliminate transients and maintain sufficient magnitude of the current between the peak values when the RF modulation needed to change the supply voltage from 5 V to 12 V and, accordingly, change the denominations everything holding means, implement the functionality of the drive, not included in the cost of the spindle motor, or pre-amplifiers. This includes SCSI controller, encoders/decoders read and write, read channel, servo systems, amplifiers and shapers error tracking.

In Fig.A presents the connection from the circuit J1 preamp. Conclusion 15 schematic J1 pre-amplifier is a current-sensitive input effects Board with circuit of the preamplifier (Fig.102A). Resistor R2 (Fig.A) compares the output signal with a negative reference voltage. Operational amplifier U23B buffers this signal, which is measured ADC U11 (Fig.110S-D).

Two resistors R58, R59 (Fig.A) fulfil the function of a resistor divider to obtain the exact permissions of the current levels of the reading laser. The outputs from the DAC U3 (Fig.110D) set the current reading of the laser. LTP U4 (Fig.110A-B) controls the converters.

In Fig.E shows the connector J6 for inspection. This test connector J6 provides serial communication channel in test mode with the processor U38 (Fig.A-IN) through the ports of the I/o U43 (Fig. 108A(1)-A(3)). The comparator U29A (Fig.106F) generates a signal SCSI Vet system in the initial state, while supply voltage 5 V and 12 V are within tolerances.

Connector J3F (Fig. 106N) connects the main circuit Board from the main power source. Filters power supply F1, F2 provide filtering for the main circuit Board.

The fastening elements MT, MT2 chassis due to capacitive decoupling provide a capacitive connection to earth main circuit Board, providing isolation AC chassis.

In Fig.107A-C shows the SCSI control circuit/control buffer memory uint32_t. This circuit performs the function of buffering and control commands to the SCSI bus. Scheme U19A provides stretch of detection signal ID with U43 (Fig.108A). According Fig.S, U41, U42, U44 represent the buffer NVR on MB for the buffer memory SCSI. In Fig.V presents basepairing switch with double-row pin S2. Switch S2 provides a choice of options SCSI bus, such as reset and load.

In Fig.108A shows a diagram U43 encoding/decoding, represents part of a SCSI controller. The encoding/decoding U43 performs encoding/decoding data in RLL 2,7-code and provides all the necessary signals, and decodes the format of the sector for the mill which performs various functions, including data exchange with a variety of serial devices, the start of the exciter coil offset and determining the polarity of the coil offset.

Non-volatile NVR small amount of U34 (Fig.1-8A(3)) provides storage options specific to disk. These parameters are set in the calibration process in the manufacture.

Blocks active load SCSI U50, U51 (Fig.108B) can be enabled via a switch S2 shown in Fig.W.

The encoding/decoding U43 (Fig.108A) has a special mode, which is used in the drive, if the input and the output can be enabled combination bit NRZ. With the high resolution custom scheme GLENDEC U100 (Fig. A-C) may be used for encoding/decoding in RLL 2,7-code 4 disks. In this mode, the encoding/decoding circuit U43 can provide many other schemes for encoding/decoding for disks with various other specifications.

In Fig.109 shows the system control processor S. He works with a frequency of 20MHz, uses a programmable memory U35, U36 256 Kbytes and NVR U39, U40 256 KB (Fig.S-IN). The system control processor U38 manages the TCI different formats and cater to the various requirements of the consumer. Various disc formats can be processed with appropriate hardware support and the use of systems of encoding/decoding.

In Fig.110 shows the tracking controller U4 TI TMS 320C50 DSP, multi-channel input ADC U11 to convert signals of the tracking error and 8-channel 8-bit DAC U3 for generating signals servo drive control and installation levels. Servo controller U4 DSP receives signals from the ADC U11 and outputs the signals to the DAC U3.

The controller U4 controls such functions as control of spindle speed using the signal at the output 40 of the controller U4 LTP. It also determines whether the drive is in write mode or read by the control signal at the output 45. He communicates with the processor U38 through a scheme U100 (Fig.A-C). The controller U38 performs servo control accurate tracking servo control coarse tracking servo control of focusing, the power control of the read laser and control the ejection of the cassette. The controller U38 also controls the spindle speed, checking whether the rotation speed of the disk in the specified limits. ADC U11 converts signals of the focusing, tracking and gruberova signal from outputs 17 and 18 ADC U11, generated from total quadrature signal. Quadrature sum signal represents the sum of the signals tracking. Normalization of error signals is performed by using the +/- quadrature signal as a reference. Signals coarse positioning, the quadrature sum signal and sensitive to the input effects of signal converted using the +/- of the reference voltage.

DAC U3 (Fig. 110V) generates at its outputs the signal drive, rough drive, focus, LS and MS signals. These signals are the signals tracking, providing excitation power amplifier (U9 and U10 in Fig.Street 111A-IN and U8 in Fig.112 VDC) and circuit tracking circuits. When focusing signals are used FOCUSDRYLS and FOCUSDRYMS. The signal FOCUSDRYLS provides accurate stepper drive control focus mode open circuit to capture the disk by moving a very small steps. The signal FOCUSDRYMS is used as the exciter servo circuit. In conclusion 7 DAC U3 (Fig.110D) signal READ_LEVEL_MS. In conclusion 9 DAC U3 signal READ_LEVEL_ LS. These signals from outputs 7, 9 DAC U3 are used to control the power of the reading laser. On output 3 DAC U3 has a threshold signal offsets used for Voss is.

The claimed system with optical drives generally includes a lens and a disc to be read, and the invention also provides associated with an improved way of seizure focus, including the steps of directing light to the disk to be read, the initial movement of the lens in the lowest position of its stroke, scanning in the upper position of the stroke of the lens when searching for the maximum total quadrature signal (pin 25 circuit U11, Fig.110D), move the lens from the disc, full control the amount of light coming from the drive, determination of the control process, when the total amount of light exceeds half the measured maximum values, find the first zero crossing determining when the quadrature sum signal exceeds half the maximum amplitude and closure of the focus at the moment. In another embodiment of this method corresponding to the invention, transactions of the direction of light to read the disk, moving the lens in the first position, control total quadrature signal, move the lens from the first position to the disk when searching for the maximum total quadrature signal, lens shift is and the total amount of light exceeds half the measured maximum values, find the first zero crossing determining when the quadrature sum signal exceeds half the maximum amplitude, and the focusing circuit, when the quadrature sum signal exceeds half the maximum amplitude. In another variant implementation of the method, the incident light may be formed by a laser.

Improved seizure focus, according to the invention, includes means for directing light on the disk to be read, means for first moving the lens in the lowest position of its stroke for subsequent scanning in the upper position of the stroke of the lens when searching for the maximum total quadrature signal and then to move the lens from the disc, means to control the total amount of light from the disc and to determine the control process, when the total amount of light exceeds half the measured maximum values, means for searching for the first zero crossing and a means for determining when the quadrature sum signal exceeds half the maximum amplitude, and snapping the focus at this point.

In another embodiment, the capture system focusing according to the invention the content is redtwo to move the lens in the first position, to move the lens from the first position to the disk when searching for the maximum total quadrature signal and to move the lens from the disc, means to control the full amount of light received from the disk, means for determining the light control process, when the total amount of light exceeds half of the maximum measured value, a means of finding the first zero crossing, the means of determining when the quadrature sum signal exceeds half the maximum amplitude, and means for snapping the focus when the quadrature sum signal exceeds half the maximum amplitude. In this embodiment, the means for directing light to the disk for reading may include a laser.

In another aspect the present invention provides a feedback circuit used in the claimed system with optical disks containing the focusing mechanism and a tracking mechanism, the lens and the disk to be read, and the above-mentioned mechanisms are controlled by using the feedback circuit. One of the variants of this feedback circuit includes an electronic circuit for signal tracking for correction of the focusing mechanism and the mechanism trichiinae the position of its stroke, for the subsequent scan in the upper position of the stroke of the lens when searching for the maximum total quadrature signal and then move the lens from the disc, means for controlling the total quantity of light returning from the disk, and to determine the control process, when the total amount of light exceeds half the measured maximum values, means for searching for the first zero crossing and a means for determining when the quadrature sum signal exceeds half the maximum amplitude, and snapping the focus at the moment, thanks to the efficiency of the seizure focus.

In Fig.110D also shows the reference voltage 2.5 V U24, which is amplified by a factor of 2 in the amplifier U23D, generating the reference voltage of 5V. The reference voltage 2.5 V U24 used in the comparator U29, which compares the variable component of the error signal of the tracking zero for the determination of zero-crossings of signal tracking. The error signal tracking is converted to digital form and supplied to the circuit GLENDEC U100 shown in Fig.A, to determine the intersections of the tracks that is used in search operations.

ADC U11 (Phi is and. Using quadrature the total signal as a support for the conclusions 17 and 18 ADC U11 signals errors automatically normalized with respect to total quadrature signal. ADC U11 divides the error on the total signal and generates a normalized error signal to enter it in the servo circuit. The advantage of this solution is that the witness chain must work fewer changes. This feature normalization can be performed externally using an analog dividers. However, they have problems of accuracy and performance. This function can also be performed using the controller tracking the LTP U4 (Fig.110A-B) by digitally dividing the error signal by the quadrature sum signal. The division in the servo controller U4 LTP requires substantial time interval. With a sampling rate of 50 kHz may not be sufficient time for the division, and signal processing errors in digital form within the servo circuits. Since the quadrature sum signal is used as a reference, the division is not required and signals errors automatically regulated.

According Fig.110 and 113 of the reference signals for the ADC on the conclusions 17, 18 ADC U11 get from operas and U27A, U27B select the reference input to operational amplifier U17A, U17B. These amplifiers provide the generation of the reference voltage is 1 V and the reference voltage 4 V (2.5 V +/-1,5) upon actuation of the switch U27B or reference signal of the quadrature of the total signal activates when the switch U27A. Switches U27A, U27B switch with the sampling frequency of the servo circuit 50 kHz. This provides a sampling of signals for focus and tracking for total quadrature signal at each sample servo circuit, while the quadrature sum signal, which is sensitive to the input effect, and the signal coarse positioning will be determined by the reference voltage of 2.5 V +/-1,5 Century By multiplexing the reference signal automatic normalization of the signals of the tracking error is provided in conjunction with analog-to-digital conversion.

Thus, the switching system shown in Fig.113, provides multiplexing of two different reference levels. The switching system allows you to perform analog to digital conversion with the true reference level corresponding to the laser power and the magnitude of the detected signal are being shown from disk, and Ossete can be produced in real time for such signals, as the laser power, the level of total quadrature signal, the signals of the focus errors and tracking, by switching of the reference levels with a frequency of 50 kHz.

In Fig.111 the circuit containing the amplifier focus U9 (Fig.Street 111A) and the power amplifiers exact drive U10 (Fig.11B). Amplifiers U9, U10 have digital inputs permit the pin 10, controlled by the processor. The advantage of microprocessor control is that the power amplifiers are inactive at power-drive, which eliminates the damage and uncontrolled movements of the respective blocks of focus and drive. Amplifiers U9, U10 using the reference signal 2.5 V and supplied from the source voltage of 5V. Amplifiers U9, U10 are digital-to-analog inputs from the controller U4 DSP to control the output current. The power amplifier focus can produce a current of +/-250 mA, and the power amplifier exact drive can produce a current of +/-200 mA.

In Fig. 112 the circuit containing the power amplifier U30 (Fig. A) and U8 (Fig. 112 VDC) to the excitation coil actuator offset and a coarse actuator. The power amplifier U30, U8 supplied from the source voltage is Ana) controlled by digital permissive signal for setting the polarity of the erase or polarity record. The power amplifier U30 generates a current of 1/3 And the coil 20 Ohms. The amplifier U8 coarse actuator generates a current of 0.45 And load 1365 Ohms. The amplifier U8 is a level Converter U23F at the entrance, providing a reference voltage of 5 instead of 2.5 Century.

Amplifiers U9, U10, U30, U8 in Fig.111 and 112 are made similarly and compensated to ensure the lines are not more than 30 kHz. Diodes limiting CR1, CR2, CR4, CR5 (Fig.112 VDC) power amplifier U8 support the voltage at the output of amplifier U8 within the specified limits when reversing the direction of the coarse actuator. These diodes prevent the transition of amplifier U8 in saturation for an extended interval of time, which would impede the search.

The output signal of the amplifier U26F (Fig.A) and resistor divider R28/R30 supply bias current to the ADC U6 (Fig.A). This provides the processor U38 the opportunity to ensure that the coil displacement is at the required level before you write.

As shown in Fig.113, the quadrature Converter total signal is implemented in the diagrams U27A, U27B, U17A, U17B, as discussed above with reference to Fig. 110. The connector J2 of the spindle drive sends signals to drugome voltage of 2.5 C. Error coarse positioning Board (J2) of the drive spindle is processed relative to the reference signal Vcc. The transistor Q14 is a causative agent for LEDs LED1 front panel.

According Fig. 114 U6 is a serial ADC, which converts the signal from the temperature sensor U20. Re-calibration of the drive is performed when the temperature changes. This is an important feature of the invention, especially for recording on the media type 4, for which the power of entry is a critical factor and may require a change in function of the temperature of the system.

The signals on outputs 2 (PWCAL) and 6 ADC U6 are servo signals from the differential amplifier supplied with 64910 (Fig.117). These signals can be used for sampling the signals of the channel are read and controlled by the digital signals on outputs 27-30 with 84910 (Fig.117V). In this embodiment, the conclusions 27-30 grounded, but a specialist should be borne in mind that these conclusions can be instituted and other signals and can provide samples of various signals for calibration.

On output 3 U6 (Fig.A) is formed AGC level, which is buffered by U21B and then divided seatbeats known in the sector accounts. The resulting value will be written to the output 19 U16 as a fixed AGC level, which can then be inserted in 84910 (Fig. 117), where the AGC level is set so as to interfere with the operation of the amplifier at maximum gain when the sector is evaluated to determine whether it is empty.

The claimed system drive optical disc includes a combination of a carrier in the form of a disc having a number of sectors of data, amplifying means for the evaluation of specific sectors to determine whether the sector is blank, and means preventing the operation of the amplifying means when the maximum enhancement in the evaluation of the sector. In a particular embodiment, the means preventing the operation of the amplifying means at maximum gain, is a microprocessor U38 (Fig.A In), designed for the installation of the gain level of the amplifier means.

As described below, the claimed optical system containing a focusing mechanism and a tracking mechanism, a lens, and readable disc, characterized by the fact that the mechanisms are controlled by the feedback circuit containing an electronic circuit for generating tracking signals for konkretnogo disk sector to determine whether it is blank, and means preventing the operation of the amplifying means with the maximum gain in the estimation process sector. In another embodiment, the means for preventing the operation of the amplifying means at maximum gain, includes a microprocessor, U38 in Fig.A and designed to set the level of amplification of the amplifying means.

The bias current, mentioned with reference to Fig.112, is controlled at the output 4 ADC U6 in Fig.A to ensure reliable control of the write and erase, to determine the correct amplitude and polarity.

Signals PWCALLF, PWCALHF are formed on the findings 7 and 8 U6 at A6 and A7, respectively. These receive signals from the sampling scheme and storage (Fig.118), and can be controlled by the encoder/decoder connecting logic circuits (GLENDEC), using signals WTLF or WTHF, as shown in Fig. W. They are used within the sector in order to implement the sampling frequency combination record and averaged DC component low-frequency combinations account. Average values can be compared to obtain the offset, which can be used for optimization of the recording power for INTD-. These signals are a constant part of the data relative to the level of the DC component of the signal recovery signal reader 4. The differential signal determines the threshold level for the comparator in the signal reader 4. Using DAC threshold for LTP at U3 pin 3 (Fig.110D), the DC offset can be compensated. Additionally to restore error offset must be entered when attempting to restore data that otherwise may be unrecoverable. This is to restore channel read 4 and calibration.

The signal ReadDIFF on output 12 U6, A1, is formed as an output signal of the differential amplifier U15B (Fig. A-IN). This signal represents the constant component of the magneto-optical pre-amplifier or pre-amplifier preformative. Therefore, it may be determined the value of the constant component of the signal read and can be used to measure the constant component erased tracks in the first direction and erased tracks in the second direction, in order to obtain a differential value for magnetooptic the us to get an average DC component, which provides a quantitative assessment of the ongoing recording. This value is also used to calibrate the power of the recording mode 4.

U16 Fig.V is a DAC that is controlled from the processor S (Fig.A, U38). Output signals U16 represent the voltages that control the current levels for the three power levels entry: WR1-V, WR2-V, WR3-V. These signals determine the capacity of individual pulses. The fourth output signal is above a fixed level AGC.

Scheme GLENDEC U100 shown in Fig.115. It performs various functions using gate arrays, for example the function of encoding/decoding in RLL 1,7-code. The input encoding is NRZ with U43 (Fig.108A) on output 70 and its output RLL 1,7-code that is written to disk using pins 36, 37, 38 U100 (WR1, WR2, WR3). Function decode receives data encoded in an RLL code from disk, which are decoded and returned to NRZ for transmission to U43 (Fig.108A). U16 (Fig.V) also uses 4 format sector, which is used to specify temporal characteristics. Of course, U16 can be programmed so that it can be specified in various formats.

Other features of the scheme GL. nedosmotreli counters for crossing tracks, timers to measure the time between the intersections of tracks that GCHQ used for search functions.

In Fig. 116 schema generation error tracking. Signals QUADA, QUADB, QUADC, QADDD (Fig.116A) are the output signals of servo amplifier with impedance connection, which are on-Board pre-amplifier (Fig.V, UF-U1D). These signals are summed and subtracted in operational amplifiers U22A, U22B (Fig.116A-B) for forming then signal error tracking and focusing of the TE and FE, respectively J4 (Fig. 116A). U22C (Fig.V) sums the signals QUADA, QUADB, QUADC, QADD for the formation of total quadrature signal QS.

Switches U28A, U28B, U28C, U28D, U27C, U27D used to account for lowering the gain of the circuits due to the increase in quadrature currents in the record. When recording all signals QUADA, QUADB, QUADC, QUADD weakened about 4 times.

Read channel is described with reference to Fig.118A. The signals read RFD+, RFD - formed on-Board preamps (Fig.V, U106) and pass through the switches gain U48A, U48B (Fig.118A (1)) to normalize the relative levels reformatted signal and optical signal. Turning evritania rich and areas on the magneto-optical disk.

When write operations U48C and U48D opened and the signals read not saturate the input channel reading. When you read both of these switches are closed and the signal readout passes through a differentiator U47 (Fig. 118A(2)), which compensated for the error group delay and can operate at frequencies up to 20 MHz. The output signal U47 isolated AC current through C36 and S relatively SSI filter U1 and 84910 through FRONTOUT+ and FRONTOUT-. Signals respectively attenuated by R75 and R48, as shown in Fig.117S, so that the valid signal levels received on 84910 through S and s respectively.

In 84910 included various functions, ensuring the proper functioning of the channel reading. These include AGC channel readout, phase locked loop frequency channel of the read detection data, sharing data, synthesizing frequencies. Shapers error tracking, which is the typical functional probes Winchester error tracking, are also included in 84910. They are, however, not used in the present invention.

The output signal of the divided data with 84910 (U13 in Fig.117) arrives at conclusions 14 and 15 and then fed to the SN330 (U43 in Fig.108A). These signals are used in retsa two separate AGC signal. One is used to read the header data pre-formatted, and the other for reading a magneto-optical data.

In the case of channel readout type 4x signals SSIFR, SSIFN (Fig.118A(2)) are fed to the buffer amplifier (U49, Fig.A). The output signal U49 comes to Q3, Q4, Q5 (Fig.A-IN), which acts as an integrator with gain. U5 in Fig.V is an amplifier for integrated and amplified signal. Read channel 4, thus, uses the SSI filter, frequency correction, differentiation and integration.

The output signal U5 is buffered through amplifier U12 (Fig.A) and served on the schema that defines the midpoint between levels from peak to peak, also called the recovery scheme. The restored signals INTD+ and INTD- (Fig.S) is fed to the input of the comparator, the output of which provides a threshold signal for data sharing. Signals INT+, INT-, INTD+, INTD - then served on U14 (MRC1, Fig.S), where they are compared, and data sharing. The output signal U14 served on the scheme GLENDEC U100 (Fig.115) for the operation of the encoding/decoding.

Software Digital Signal Processor disclosed in Priya

In the technique well known to control positioning, using the actuator, the control signal which is proportional to the acceleration. These systems control the positioning require compensation lead/lag for significant exceptions fluctuations and stabilization control positioning or tracking system.

Scheme corresponding to the present invention is a digital compensation circuit lead/lag, which not only significantly suppresses uctuations, but also provides the use of a notch filter with frequency rejectee equal to half the frequency of the digital sampling rate. In the next section, entitled Transfer Function, mathematical transfer function for the digital compensation of the lead/lag corresponding to the invention, providing compensation for a single lead and a complex lag. Also mentioned for comparison some well-known digital payment schemes lead/lag and analog compensation circuit lead/lag. As presented below, the transfer function of the system, corresponding to izaberete the E. the wording in the s-region of the transfer function suitable for display in a graph Bode. From the graph Bode you can see that the compensation scheme corresponding to the invention, has a minimal effect on the phase.

While the prior art compensation schemes that have minimal effect on the phase, only the present invention in the compensation scheme used notch filter at a frequency equal to half the frequency of the digital sampling rate. With appropriate selection of the sampling frequency of this notch filter can be used to rejectee frequency parasitic mechanical resonance, such as the compensated frequency servo drive. In drive 10 in Fig.1 is used, the compensation scheme of a single lead and the integrated delay to suppress mechanical resonance decoupling accurate servo drive and servo drive of the focus, as shown below.

Transfer function

Below mathematical calculations illustrate the transfer function of the digital payment schemes lead/lag corresponding to the present invention. First will be considered the transfer function of the circuit of focus, after which a detailed description will be presented the OTE at 23 WITH

Tfactor=1

0= 23000i

The model of the actuator: Frequency response: isolation:

1= Tfactor233103< / BR>
1= 0,01

< / BR>
Spurious response:

3= Tfactor223103< / BR>
3= 0,03

2= Tfactor227103< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Breakdown phase high frequency:

4= 2100103< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Main frequency:

Mconstant=790m/(s^2A)

5=Tfactor236.95= 0.08

< / BR>
The response of the actuator:

Hactuator(s)=H1(s)(H2(s)(H3(s)(H4(s)

Model DSP: Scheme of a single advance/complex lag:

The period of sampling:

T=2010-6< / BR>
< / BR>
The delay in the DSP (sample-and-hold) and while processing:

< / BR>
Response LTP:

Hdsp(s)=(ZOH(s)(Hdelay(s)(Hleadlag(s))

Filter protivopolojnie:

Rfilt=2000

Cfilt=10010-12< / BR>
filt= RfiltCfilt< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Ffilt= 7.958104< / BR>
Simplified response of the amplifier chain focus:

pa1= 228000

pa1= .4

< / BR>
< / BR>
pa2= 2450000

pa2= 0.8

Gpa=Gpa1Gpa2A/BIT

< / BR>
Gpa=7.47710-6< / BR>
filt(s) Volts/Volt Volt/Volt

Response LTP:

H(s)=Hdsp(s) Volts/Volt Volt/Volt

The response of Power Amplifier:

H(s)=Hpa(s) Amps/bit Amperes/bit

The response of the actuator:

H(s)=Hactuator(s) m/a m/a

The response signal focusing errors:

H(s)=Hfebit/m-bit/m

Response open circuit:

H(s)=Hfilt(s)Hdsp(s)Hpa(s)H'actuator(s)Hfe< / BR>
Gain:

< / BR>
G=36.059

The response of the closed loop:

< / BR>
Generating a Nyquist diagram with M-circles":

The selected number of maxima Mr a closed circuit:

j=1...4

< / BR>
The radius of the M-circle:

< / BR>
The center M of the circle:

< / BR>
n2=100

m=1...n2< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
n=300

k=1...n

Nk=1000+100k

The data for a graph Bode:

min=100

max=10104< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Mang(s) = 20log(|GH(s)|)

(s) = angle(Re(H(s)),Im(H(s)))-360deg

Magn1(s) = 20log(|HCl(s)|)

1(s) = angle(Re(HCl(s)),Im(HCl(s)))-360deg

As shown in Fig.124, the Nyquist diagram the transfer function of the circuit of focus includes the locus of equal highs, forming M-circumference: 9-22, 9-24, 9-26, 9-28, having a value of Mr, respectively 4,0; 2,0; 1,5; 1,3. On f the Ana amplitude characteristic response open circuit 9-32 and amplitude characteristic of the closed loop 9-34. In Fig. 126 shows the phase characteristic of the response open circuit 9-36 and phase characteristic of the response of the closed loop 9-38.

The transfer function compensation:

T=2010-6< / BR>
0= 2i3000

The delay in the DSP (sample-and-hold) and while processing:

< / BR>
Model DSP: triple-lead/lag:

< / BR>
< / BR>
Bilateral conversion:

< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Defining Z

Z=esT< / BR>
< / BR>
The response of the triple lead/lag:

< / BR>
The response of a single lead/lag:

< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Comprehensive advance/delay:

center= 22200

Span = 1.0

2=center-0.5 Spancenter< / BR>
< / BR>
3= 1.7

2= 0.707

< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Compensation analog block:

Analog Compensation Box:

lead= 20.51030.0110-6< / BR>
< / BR>
lp= 33010-1220.5103< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Single advance/complex delay:

6= 2900

7= 222000

7= 0.8

< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
< / BR>
Chart data:

< / BR>
n=400

k=1...n

min=100

< / BR>
< / BR>
max=10104<(s)|)

< / BR>
Magn3(s) = 20log(|HAnalogBox(s)|)

< / BR>
Magn4(s) = 20log(|Hslcl(s)|)

< / BR>
In Fig.127 shows the amplitude of the response for the transfer functions of the compensation of the focus obtained from the above equations. In the graphs presented separately characteristics response for triple timing delay, a single timing lag, complex timing delay, analog block and a single lead and a complex lag, as shown in the legend on the graph. Similarly, in Fig.128 shows the phase characteristics of the response for the transfer functions of the compensation of the focus obtained from the appropriate equations. The graph shows separately the phase characteristics of the response to triple timing delay, a single timing lag, complex timing delay, analog block and a single advance/complex lag, as shown in the legend.

Comprehensive advance/delay:

< / BR>
< / BR>
N1=-0.554

N2=1

< / BR>
N3=-0.456

D1=1

< / BR>
D2=-0.916

< / BR>
D3=0.068

Single OpenAir>< / BR>
< / BR>
N1=1

< / BR>
N2=0.107

< / BR>
N3=-0.893

|N1|+|N2|+|N3| = 2

< / BR>
D2=0.356

< / BR>
D3=0.136

For more information on this issue is contained in U.S. patent N 5155633, 5245174, 5177640.

Although the invention has been described in detail with reference to the preferred embodiments of the, it should be borne in mind that the invention is not limited to these options. On the contrary, bearing in mind the present disclosure that describe the best modes of practical implementation of the invention, the experts can make various modifications and changes, without going beyond the scope and essence of the invention. The scope of invention is defined by claims, not the previous description. All changes, modifications and variations that match the meaning, or an equivalent set forth in the claims, should be considered as included in its scope. Tr

1. The way to move a block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the information carrier, characterized by a center and a circumference and rotating on the said block carriage at a peripheral speed of around upone between the mentioned initial position of the block carriage and the center of the carrier; defining a second radial distance between the said end position of the block carriage and the center of the carrier; determining a distance along the circle between the mentioned initial position of the block carriage and its final position parallel to mentioned the circumference of the carrier; determining the initial peripheral speed of the carrier around its center; the definition of the trajectory velocity on the basis of the said first radial distance, referred to the second radial distance, the distance around the circumference and the above-mentioned initial peripheral speed so that the moving block carriage of the above-mentioned initial position in the above-mentioned end position in accordance with said trajectory speed, the block carriage is moved as radially, and the circle in the above-mentioned end position essentially at the same time, and a moving block carriage of the above-mentioned initial position in the above-mentioned end position essentially in accordance with said trajectory speed.

2. The way to move a block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the information carrier, characterized by the center and the length Okruzhnaya fact, that includes the following operations: moving block carriage of the above-mentioned initial position radially in said end position; determining an intermediate block position of the carriage relative to the carrier; determining a first radial distance between the said intermediate position of the block carriage and the center of the carrier; determining a second radial distance between the end position of the block carriage and the center of the carrier; determining a distance along the circle between the aforementioned intermediate position of the block carriage and the end position of the carriage in parallel with the aforementioned circumference of the carrier; determining the initial peripheral speed of the medium relative to its center; the definition of the trajectory velocity on the basis of the said first radial distance, this second radial distance mentioned distances around the circumference and the above-mentioned initial peripheral speed so that the moving block carriage of the above-mentioned intermediate position in the above-mentioned end position taking into account the mentioned path speed of the block carriage is moved both radially and circumferentially in said end position is essentially one, and that is their essentially in accordance with said trajectory speed.

3. The way to move a block of the carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the information carrier, characterized by a center and a circumference and rotating relative to the block carriage at a peripheral speed relative to that center, characterized in that it comprises the following operations: determining the radial distance between the said initial position of the block carriage and its final position; determining a distance along the circle between the mentioned initial position of the block carriage and its final position parallel to mentioned the circumference of the carrier; determining the initial peripheral speed of the medium relative to its center; the definition of the trajectory velocity on the basis of the above-mentioned radial distance, the radius distance and the above-mentioned initial peripheral speed so that the moving block carriage of the above-mentioned initial position in the above-mentioned end position in accordance with said trajectory speed unit carriage came, both radially and circumferentially, in the above-mentioned end position essentially at the same time, and a moving block carriage of the above-mentioned initial position in mentioned horse who I block carriage from an initial position to a final position relative to the information carrier, characterized by a center and a circumference and rotating relative to the block carriage at a peripheral speed relative to the center, characterized in that it comprises the following operations: moving block carriage of the said initial radial position to the end position in accordance with the first trajectory speed; determining an intermediate block position of the carriage relative to the carrier; determining a radial distance between an intermediate position of the carriage and its final position; determining a distance along the circle between the aforementioned intermediate position of the carriage and its final position parallel to the circumference of the carrier; determining the initial peripheral speed of the medium relative to its center; the definition of the trajectory velocity taking into account the mentioned radial distance, mentioned distances around the circumference and the above-mentioned initial peripheral speed so that the moving block carriage of the above-mentioned intermediate position in the above-mentioned end position in accordance with said trajectory velocity of the block carriage is moved, both radially and circumferentially in its final position essentially at the same time is usesto in accordance with said trajectory speed.

 

Same patents:

The invention relates to optical recording and can be used for high-speed recording, playback and store large amounts of information

The invention relates to devices designed for recording and reproducing information on the recording media, representing the disc, card or tape

The invention relates to the field of recording and reproducing information on optical disks

The invention relates to the making, in particular to systems optical recording and/or reproduction of information, and can be used as an external computer storage devices and measuring systems for various purposes, in which the measured value is represented in the form of repetitive increments

The invention relates to techniques for recording and/or reproduction of information with mutual relative movement of the optical medium and the optical head and can be used in the information technology, such as digital video recording devices, devices, digital audio, optical external storage devices of computers

The invention relates to automation and the accumulation of information by optical means, in particular to the technique of recording-playback information, and can be used in audio and video players, and other means to provide optical recording-reproduction of information

The invention relates to the field of recording or playback of signals in optical memory devices

The invention relates to a device for optical recording/playback for recording information and reproducing information from the optical media recording and, in particular, to a device of the optical recording/playback with actuator type rotary lever

The invention relates to a technique of recording information reproduction from the optical disc-based media, in particular to systems with accelerated data retrieval

The invention relates to data storage devices, namely, devices for reproducing optical recording disc media

Optical sensor // 2179750

The invention relates to a device display, and in particular to systems for transferring the digitized images on a sensitive basis
Up!